Lexus - GS 300 - Workshop Manual - 2010 - 2010

FOREWORD Congratulations on your selection of this Lexus. In Lexus vehicles we have invested all our engineering and design resources; all the know−how we have gained in over 60 years of making automobiles; the highest motivation of our most talented employees; and our tradition of incessant striving toward ever greater quality. This Owner’s Manual explains the features of your new Lexus. Please read it and follow the instructions carefully so that you can enjoy many years of safe motoring. When it comes to service, remember that your Lexus dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your complete satisfaction. Your Lexus dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require. If there is not a Lexus dealer near you, please call the following number: U.S. OWNERS If you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number: D When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada: Lexus Roadside Assistance Toll−free: 1−800−25−LEXUS or 1−800−255−3987 D HAWAII: Servco Automotive Roadside Assistance/Customer Services Toll−free: 1−800−25−LEXUS or 1−800−255−3987 CANADIAN OWNERS D When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland: Lexus Roadside Assistance/Customer Service Toll−free: 1−800−26−LEXUS or 1−800−265−3987 Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also. All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice. Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle. Please access our websites for further information. D The U.S. mainland www.lexus.com D Hawaii www.servcolexus.com D Canada www.lexus.ca i IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS Occupant restraint systems Lexus encourages you and your family to take the time to read Section 1−6 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. In terms of helping you understand how you can receive the maximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems this vehicle provides, Section 1−6 of this Owner’s Manual is the most important section for you and your family to read. Section 1−6 describes the function and operation concerning seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint systems of this vehicle and some potential hazards you should be aware of. These systems work together along with the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provide occupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect of each system is enhanced when it is used properly and together with other systems. No single occupant restraint system can, by itself, provide you or your family with the equal level of restraint which these systems can provide when used together. That is why it is important for you and your family to understand the purpose and proper use of each of these systems and how they relate to each other. The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help reduce the possibility of death or serious injury in the event of a collision. None of these systems, either individually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in the event of collision. However, the more you know about these systems and how to use them properly, the greater your chances become of surviving an accident without death or serious injury. Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants of the vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wear seat belts properly at all times. Children should always be secured in child restraint systems that are appropriate for their age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with, and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutes for them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducing the risk of head, chest and knee injuries by preventing contact of the head, chest and knee with interior portions of the vehicle. In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy with tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS airbags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sources of serious injury if an occupant is too close to an airbag, or if an object or some part of his or her body has been placed between the occupant and the airbag at the time of deployment. This is just one example of how the instructions in Section 1−6 of this Owner’s Manual will help ensure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, and increase the safety they can provide to you and your family in the event of an accident. Lexus recommends you to read the provisions in Section 1−6 carefully and refer to them as needed during your time of ownership of this vehicle. ii IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS Event data recorder Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a system to record data in a crash or a near car crash event. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a near car crash event, this device may record some or all of the following information:  Engine speed  Whether the brake pedal was applied or not If your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability control (VSC) system, its Electronic Control Unit (ECU) may contain another EDR. There are a variety of driving situations which include activating the VSC under which the VSC EDR will record certain information. The VSC EDR may record some or all of the following information:  Behavior of the vehicle  Steering wheel angle  Vehicle speed  To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed  To what extent the brake pedal was applied  Vehicle speed  To what extent the ECU controlled the condition of the 4 wheels  To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed  Vehicle stability control system diagnostic data  Position of the transmission selector lever  Whether the driver and front passenger wore the seat belts or not  Driver’s seat position The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers.  Front passenger’s occupant classification  SRS airbag deployment data  SRS airbag system diagnostic data iii IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:  An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained  Officially requested by the police or other authorities  Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit  Ordered by the court However, if necessary Lexus will:  Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance  Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed necessary  Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non−Lexus organization for research purposes New vehicle warranty Your new vehicle is covered by the following Lexus limited warranties:  New vehicle warranty  Emission control systems warranty  Others For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”. iv Your responsibility for maintenance It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified maintenance is performed. Section 5 of this Owner’s Manual gives details of these maintenance requirements. Included in Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”. Important health and safety information about your Lexus CAUTION  WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. In addition, oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.  Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water. IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle. This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuine Lexus products. Modification with non−genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty. Spark ignition system of your Lexus The spark ignition system in your Lexus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference−Causing Equipment Standard. Installation of a mobile two−way radio system As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, cruise control system, dynamic radar cruise control system, anti−lock brake system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation. Smart access system with push−button start Users of any electrical medical devices such as implanted pacemakers should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. For details, see “Keys” on page 8 and “Smart access system with push−button start” on page 11. Tires and loading on your Lexus Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and the excess load may result in the deterioration of steering ability and braking ability, leading to an accident. Check the tire inflation pressure periodically and be sure to keep the load limits given in this Owner’s Manual. For details about tire inflation pressure and load limits, see page 548 and 462. Scrapping of your Lexus The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle. v IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS Leak detection pump This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. This check is done several hours after the engine is turned off. So you may hear sound coming from underneath the luggage compartment for several minutes. It does not indicate a malfunction. vi HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL The contents of this manual are explained briefly on this page to help you make the best use of the manual. Please read this page and the rest of the Owner’s Manual carefully to make sure you fully understand the operation of your vehicle. SECTION 2 − AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO The features of the vehicle’s air conditioning and audio are explained in detail. Be sure to read this section so that you can make full use of them. SECTION 3 − STARTING AND DRIVING TABLE OF CONTENTS Starting the engine, driving, stopping, operation of features affecting vehicle handling, hints on vehicle safety and safe driving techniques are all explained. Please read everything in this section, and remember − drive safely! The table of contents and the pictorial index provide easy reference to the appropriate pages. SECTION 4 − IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY This will help you enjoy safe and comfortable driving. Operation of basic equipment is briefly explained in an easily understandable way for quick reference. This section explains what to do in the event of an urgent situation such as the engine not starting or getting a flat tire, etc. If such a problem occurs, check the contents of this Owner’s Manual and follow the instructions given. SECTION 1 − INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS SECTION 5 − MAINTENANCE The vehicle’s equipment is divided into the 8 groups listed below. Use of the equipment is explained, including any points you should pay particular attention to. This section explains the importance of regular maintenance. Regular and periodic inspection and maintenance of your Lexus will help to keep your vehicle in its best condition. BASIC OPERATION − QUICK REFERENCE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Keys and doors Switches Gauges, meters and service reminder indicators Interior equipment Exterior equipment Occupant restraint systems Steering wheel and mirrors Touch screen SECTION 6 − SERVICE PROCEDURES AND SPECIFICATIONS Simple maintenance procedure and service data are provided here for your reference should you wish to perform inspection and maintenance yourself. vii HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL INDEX Safety and vehicle damage warnings The page number is listed for each item in the Owner’s Manual so that you can rapidly find the item and page you are searching for. In this manual you will see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings. These are used in the following ways: GAS STATION INFORMATION The information you need to know for appropriate servicing at the gas station is provided here. QUICK INDEX This is designed so that you can quickly find the needed information when an urgent situation arises. Safety symbol CAUTION This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others. NOTICE This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment. Your Lexus Owner ’s Manual provides you with a considerable amount of information. To use this information most effectively, please take the time to familiarize yourself with the contents and use of the manual. In this manual, you will also see a circle with a slash through it. This means ”Do not”, ”Do not do this”, or ”Do not let this happen”. viii GAS STATION INFORMATION  Fuel selection: Premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance. However, if such premium type cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91).  Fuel tank capacity: 71 L (18.7 gal., 15.6 lmp.gal.)  Engine oil: “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil. Recommend oil viscosity − SAE 5W−30 if normal temperatures are below 38C (100F) Oil capacity: L (qt., lmp.qt.) Drain and refill with filter without filter GS430 5.1 (5.4, 4.5) 4.5 (4.8, 4.0) GS300 (2WD) 6.3 (6.6, 5.5) 5.9 (6.2, 5.1) GS300 (4WD) 6.4 (6.7, 5.6) 6.0 (6.3, 5.2) See page 530 for detailed information.  Engine coolant: Capacity: GS430 − 10.1 L (10.7 qt., 8.9 lmp.qt.) GS300 − 9.1 L (9.6 qt., 8.0 lmp.qt.) Coolant type − ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology (Coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.) Do not use plain water alone. For checking the engine coolant, see page 534.  Automatic transmission: Fluid type − “Toyota Genuine ATF Type WS” See page 540 or 544 for detailed information.  Tire information: See page 548 through 570 for detailed information.  Tire inflation pressure: Tire size: GS430 − 245/40R18 93Y or P245/40R18 93V GS300 − 225/50R17 94W or P225/50R17 93V Tire inflation pressure: Front 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi) Rear 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi) For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add the tire inflation pressure given below to the front tires and rear tires, but never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure molded on the tire sidewall. GS430 GS300 60 kPa (0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar, 9 psi) 50 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm2 or bar, 7 psi) You should know as much about the quality and importance of proper maintenance of your new vehicle as the people who built it. The Lexus authorized Repair Manual tells you how to maintain your vehicle and enables you to correctly perform your own maintenance. The best way to keep your new vehicle in top running order is to maintain it properly from the moment you drive it off the showroom floor. The Lexus authorized Repair Manual is packed with literally everything you need to know to perform your own maintenance in virtually every area of your new vehicle. cm−1 Maintenance procedures for the engine, chassis, body, electrical system, and more, are clearly explained and illustrated. Periodic maintenance and tune−up Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to prevent small problems from growing into larger ones later on. The repair manual outlines exactly what maintenance is required and clearly explains how to do the work yourself step−by−step. Areas covered include such things as spark plug replacement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oil and filter replacement. cm−2 Where to obtain the Repair Manual The repair manual for GS430, GS300 may be purchased from any Lexus dealer or call the Material Distribution Center. To purchase the repair manual, please contact your Lexus dealer or the Material Distribution Center toll−free at 1−800−622−2033. PICTORIAL INDEX INSTRUMENT PANEL (Vehicles with navigation system) G00011b  Four−wheel drive models i PICTORIAL INDEX Page Page Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 1 Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 59 17 2 Driving position memory switches . . . . . . . . . . . 202 18 Trunk lid opener main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 3 Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 19 Tire pressure warning select switch . . . . . . . . . . 448 4 Door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 20 Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 5 Side vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 21 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 6 Engine switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 22 Seat heater switches or Seat ventilator/heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 65 7 Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . 258 23 8 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Traction control system off switch (Two−wheel drive models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 9 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 24 Driving pattern selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 10 Center vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 25 Damping mode select switch (GS430 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 11 Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 26 Coin box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 12 Touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Navigation system display (See the separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”) 27 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 28 Automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . 359 13 Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 29 Tire pressure warning reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . 446 14 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 30 Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 31 Parking brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 15 Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . 78 32 Switch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi 16 Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section. ii PICTORIAL INDEX INSTRUMENT PANEL (Vehicles without navigation system) G00012b  Four−wheel drive models iii PICTORIAL INDEX Page Page Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 1 Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 59 17 2 Driving position memory switches . . . . . . . . . . . 202 18 Trunk lid opener main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 3 Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 19 Tire pressure warning select switch . . . . . . . . . . 448 4 Door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 20 Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 5 Side vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 21 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 6 Engine switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 22 Seat heater switches or Seat ventilator/heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 65 7 Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . 258 23 8 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Traction control system off switch (Two−wheel drive models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 9 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 24 Driving pattern selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 10 Center vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 25 Damping mode select switch (GS430 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 11 Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 26 Coin box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 12 Touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 27 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 13 Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 28 Automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . 359 14 Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 29 Tire pressure warning reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 15 Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . 78 30 16 Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 31 Parking brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 32 Switch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section. iv PICTORIAL INDEX INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (Vehicles sold in U. S. A.) G00041 v PICTORIAL INDEX Page Page Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 1 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 17 2 Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . 49 18 3 Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Adaptive front−lighting system off indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 19 Anti−lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 80 4 Headlight indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 20 Pre−collision system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 5 Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425, 428, 429 21 Brake system warning light (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 6 Fog light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 22 Master warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 7 Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 23 Electric power steering system warning light . . 82 8 SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 24 Multi−information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 9 Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 25 Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 10 Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 359 26 Tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 11 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 27 Intuitive parking assist indicator light . . . . . . . . 373 12 Fuel filler door indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 28 Snow mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 13 Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 29 Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 14 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 30 Power mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 15 Charging system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 31 Damping mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 16 Brake system warning light (yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . 77 For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section. vi PICTORIAL INDEX INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (Vehicles sold in Canada) G00043 vii PICTORIAL INDEX Page Page Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 1 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 17 2 Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . 49 18 3 Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Adaptive front−lighting system off indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 19 Anti−lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . 80 4 Tail light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 20 Pre−collision system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 5 Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425, 428, 429 21 Brake system warning light (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 6 Fog light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 22 Master warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 7 Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 23 Electric power steering system warning light . . 82 8 SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 24 Multi−information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 9 Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 25 Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 10 Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 359 26 Tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 11 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 27 Intuitive parking assist indicator light . . . . . . . . 373 12 Fuel filler door indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 28 Snow mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 13 Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 29 Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 14 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 30 Power mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 15 Charging system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 31 Damping mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 16 Brake system warning light (yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . 77 For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section. viii PICTORIAL INDEX FRONT SEAT Page G00094 1 Seat position, seat cushion angle and height control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145, 146 2 Seatback angle control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 3 Lumbar support control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section. ix PICTORIAL INDEX STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN Page 1 Headlight, turn signal and fog light switches . . . . . . . . 46, 49, 50 2 Audio remote control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 3 Distance switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 4 Speech command button (See the separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.) 5 Telephone button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 6 Windshield wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 7 Multi−information change switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 8 Cruise control switch . . . . . . 398, 401 9 Tilt and telescopic steering adjustment switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 G00095b For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section. x PICTORIAL INDEX SWITCH BOX Page G00096 1 Headlight cleaner switch . . . . . . . . 57 2 Rear view mirror folding switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 3 Rear electric sunshade switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 4 Intuitive parking assist switch . 372 5 Adaptive Front Lighting system cancel switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 6 “ODO TRIP” and “RESET” switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 7 Instrument panel light control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 8 Light sensitive optitron meter mode change switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 9 Trunk lid opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 10 Fuel filler door opener . . . . . . . . . 132 11 Power rear view mirror control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section. xi PICTORIAL INDEX EXTERIOR VIEW Page G00001 1 Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 2 Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . 58 3 Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 4 Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 5 Windshield wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 589 6 Outside rear view mirror . . . . . . . 209 7 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 8 Tire and wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 9 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 594 10 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section. xii PICTORIAL INDEX xiii BASIC OPERATION QUICK REFERENCE Driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlight and turn signal switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 3 5 6 1 QUICK REFERENCE 1. DRIVER’S SEAT 2. STEERING WHEEL  TILT STEERING COLUMN G00102 Seat position G00151 Seat cushion angle Seat cushion height To tilt the steering column up or down to the desired angle, push the control switch in the required direction and release the button when the steering column reaches the desired angle.  TELESCOPIC STEERING COLUMN Seatback angle Lumbar support G00103 Head restraint height Head restraint angle 2 To move the steering column to the desired position, push the control switch away from you or pull it toward you until the steering column reaches the desired position. QUICK REFERENCE 3. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION OF SELECTOR LEVER G00104 SELECTOR LEVER POSITION P: Parking and engine starting G00105 R: Reverse position N: Neutral position D: Normal driving position (Shifting into overdrive possible) S: “S” mode driving +: Upshifting –: Downshifting  Shift while pressing the brake pedal. (Engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode.) 3 QUICK REFERENCE NOTE: Vehicles with the cruise control: When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from “D” or “6” (sixth range) to “5” (fifth range), or “D” or “5” (fifth range) to “4” (fourth range), engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For vehicle speed reduction, see page 400. Vehicles with the dynamic radar cruise control: When the cruise control is being used in the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode or in the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode, even if you downshift from “D” or “6” (sixth range) to “5” (fifth range) or “D”, or “5” (fifth range) to “4” (fourth range), engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For vehicle speed reduction, see pages 423. 4 QUICK REFERENCE 4. HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCHES D HEADLIGHT SWITCH Parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights turn on. Headlights also turn on. G00108 D TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Right or left turn G00111 Lane change (Right or left) Automatic light control D HEADLIGHT DIMMER SWITCH High beam G00110 Headlight flasher 5 QUICK REFERENCE 5. WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH Rain−sensing windshield wipers Mist wiper operation Mist wiper operation Automatic operation Variable intermittent operation Low speed operation G00113 6 Variable intermittent wipers Low speed operation G00112 High speed operation High speed operation Washer on Washer on SECTION 1–1 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Keys and doors Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Smart access system with push−button start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 7 KEYS AND DOORS KEYS G11007 1 Electronic keys − These keys will work for the doors, trunk and can start the engine. They will not work for glove box and trunk storage extension door. Your dealer will need one of them to make a new key. Before you use these keys, be sure to read “Smart access system with push−button start” on page 11. 8 2 Mechanical keys − These keys work for the doors, trunk, glove box and trunk storage extension door, but cannot start the engine. 3 Key number plate − Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. Using a mechanical key G11008 When you use the mechanical key included on the side of the electronic key, slide the lock knob in the arrow direction and take out the key as shown. To put the key back, slide the key gently until it locks, paying attention to the angle and position of the key. Be sure to put the key back when not in use. KEYS AND DOORS CAUTION NOTICE  People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away from the smart access system antennas, because the radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. For the antenna locations, see “Antenna locations” on page 28.  Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.  If necessary, the entry functions can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. When using an electronic key, observe the following precautions:  Do not affix any material that cuts off electromagnetic waves (such as a metal seal) on the electronic key.  Do not knock the electronic key hard against other objects.  Do not leave the electronic key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard or hood under direct sunlight.  Do not put the electronic key in water or wash it in an ultrasonic washer.  Do not keep the electronic key together with the products emitting electromagnetic waves such as a cellular phone.  Do not disassemble the electronic key.  Do not place the electronic key near electrical appliances (e.g. television, computer or stereo) or electrical medical equipment such as low frequency medical appliances.  If gasoline, polishing agents or oil adheres to the electronic key, it may deform or crack over time. 9 KEYS AND DOORS The electronic keys are required to deactivate the engine immobilizer, and are essential for the engine immobilizer to function correctly, so be careful not to lose these keys. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine. To protect items when using valet parking, turn the trunk lid opener main switch to inoperative or lock the glove box if necessary, and leave the electronic key (with the mechanical key removed) with the attendant. For details, see “Trunk lid opener main switch” on page 130. If you should lose your electronic keys or if you need additional electronic keys, duplicates can be made by a Lexus dealer using the key number. We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in a safe place. 10 KEYS AND DOORS SMART ACCESS SYSTEM WITH PUSH−BUTTON START G11024  1 Engine immobilizer 2 Entry function 3 Wireless remote control 4 Push−button starting The smart access system with push−button start comprises 4 kinds of functions; engine immobilizer, entry function, wireless remote control and push−button starting. For engine immobilizer, see page 12. For entry function, see page 14. For wireless remote control, see page 29. For push−button starting, see page 348. 11 KEYS AND DOORS If the electronic key battery is discharged, the entry function and wireless remote control cannot be used. Use the mechanical key integrated into the electronic key by inserting it in the door keyhole to lock or unlock doors and into the trunk lid keyhole to unlock the trunk lid. To start the engine, see “Starting the engine when the electronic key battery is discharged” on page 357. In order to activate the entry function and wireless remote control, the battery should be replaced. For details, see “Replacing the battery” on page 34. (a) Engine immobilizer G11009 The engine immobilizer is a theft prevention function. When you enter the vehicle carrying an electronic key and press the engine switch, the electronic code in the key is automatically checked to determine whether it corresponds to the registered ID code for the vehicle. If the ID code is verified, you can start the engine. The system is automatically set when the engine switch is off. The indicator light will start flashing to show the system is set. 12 KEYS AND DOORS If any of the following indicator conditions occurs, contact your Lexus dealer.  The indicator light stays on except when the theft deterrent system is setting or activating. (See “Theft deterrent system” on page 41.)  The indicator light does not start flashing when the engine switch is off.  The indicator light flashes inconsistently. For your Lexus dealer to make you a new key, your dealer will need your key number and electronic key. However, there is a limit to the number of additional keys your Lexus dealer can make for you. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the function or start the engine. NOTICE For vehicles sold in U.S.A. FCC ID: NI4TMIMB−1 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Do not modify, remove or disassemble the engine immobilizer. If any unauthorized changes or modifications are made, proper operation of this function cannot be guaranteed. 13 KEYS AND DOORS For vehicles sold in Canada (b) Entry functions* Entry functions are as follows: This device complies with RSS−210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.  Locking the doors (For details, see page 20.)  Unlocking the door(s) (For details, see page 23.)  Changing the doors to be unlocked (For details, see page 24.)  Unlocking the trunk lid (For details, see page 26.)  Battery power saving (For details, see page 27.) NOTE: *These functions can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. 14 KEYS AND DOORS CAUTION  People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away from the smart access system antennas, because the radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. For the antenna locations, see “Antenna locations” on page 28.  Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.  If necessary, the entry functions can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. INFORMATION  Be sure to take the electronic key with you.  In the following cases, the entry function, wireless remote control or push−button starting feature may not operate properly. If this happens, use a mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors and trunk lid. If you are unable to use push−button starting, follow the procedure for starting the engine on page 357.  When facilities issuing strong electromagnetic waves such as TV towers, electric power stations, broadcasting stations are nearby.  In places where automated payment facilities are installed (such as gas stations).  When you are carrying an electronic key together with a mobile communications system such as a two−way radio or cellular phone.  When the electronic key is in contact with or covered by a metallic object.  When in proximity to a number of electronic keys  When placed in proximity to electrical appliances e.g. computer  When another person is operating a wireless remote control function on another vehicle near your vehicle.  When the electronic key is in close contact with one’s body. 15 KEYS AND DOORS  If you do not drive your vehicle, store the electronic key, keeping it at least 5 m (15 ft.) away from the vehicle. ALARMS AND WARNING MESSAGES Your Lexus is equipped with alarms inside and outside, as well as warning messages in the multi−information display, that remind you if there is a problem involving the entry function. Cases which are expected to happen frequently are shown in the illustrations and the other cases are described in the table. If an alarm or warning message comes on, check to see what the problem is referring to the illustrations and table, and take the appropriate measure. If a warning message appears, the master warning light will blink. 16 KEYS AND DOORS G11025 When a door is opened and closed with the engine switch in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode and with the selector lever in the “P” position, and then the electronic key is carried outside of the vehicle. Inside alarm: One chime G11026 When you attempted to lock the door(s) with the electronic key still in the vehicle. Outside alarm: One beep (sounds for 2 seconds) See page 21 and 22 for details. Outside alarm: 3 beeps Multi−information display: “KEY IS NOT DETECTED” See page 93 for details. 17 KEYS AND DOORS G11149 18 G11027 When you pushed the lock button on the outside door handle while carrying the electronic key with the engine switch not to be turned off. When you attempted to lock a door which is not completely closed while carrying an electronic key with the engine switch off. Outside alarm: One beep (sounds for 2 seconds) Outside alarm: One beep (sounds for 10 seconds) See page 21 and 22 for details. See page 22 for details. KEYS AND DOORS Outside warning alarm Warning message on the multi−information display Chimes None None The driver’s door was opened when the engine switch is selected in “ACC” mode and the selector lever was in “P”, or when the steering lock is not activated. Beep (sounds continuously) Beep (sounds continuously) “SHIFT TO P RANGE” and “KEY IS NOT DETECTED” appear alternately. The electronic key was not in the vehicle, the driver’s door was opened and closed when the engine switch was selected in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode and the selector lever was in a position other than “P”. Beeps (sound intermittently) None None The driver’s door was opened when the engine switch was selected in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode and the selector lever was in a position other than “P”. One chime None “KEY IS NOT DETECTED” (shown for about 8 seconds) The engine switch was pushed while the electronic key was not in the vehicle or the electronic key battery was discharged. One chime None ”LOW KEY BATTERY” Electronic key battery is low. Inside warning alarm Causes 19 KEYS AND DOORS LOCKING THE DOORS WITH ENTRY FUNCTION NOTICE If the key is in the vehicle, do not perform door locking operation, or you might lock your keys inside the vehicle. G11028 INFORMATION  When locking the doors, be sure to push the lock button on the outside door handle slowly and firmly. If you push the button quickly, the doors may not lock. When the engine switch is off and you push the lock button on the outside door handle while carrying an electronic key, all the doors will be locked. At this time, one beep will sound and the turn signal lights will flash once. The entry function will be activated within about 1m (3ft.) from each outside door handle. However, when you push the lock button on the outside door handle with any door not closed securely, a beep sounds for 10 seconds. (For details, see page 22.) If outer foot lights are illuminated, you can turn off the lights by pushing the lock button on the outside door handle. (For details, see “Outer foot lights” on page 212.) 20  When opening or closing a door, do not touch the lock button on the outside door handle.  When an electronic key is used to lock the doors and an electronic key is left in the effective range of the entry function in the vehicle, the doors cannot be unlocked using the entry function. In this case, use the wireless remote control function to unlock the doors.  You cannot activate unlocking function within 3 seconds after the locking function is activated. KEYS AND DOORS The doors cannot be locked using the entry function in the following conditions: G11029 Key reminder alarm If you push the lock button on the outside door handle with an electronic key left in the vehicle, an alarm sounds for 2 seconds and the doors will not lock. Before you push the lock button, make sure you are carrying the electronic key. INFORMATION  Do not put an electronic key on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the glove box or auxiliary box near the selector lever, which falls outside of the effective range of the entry function. As the alarm does not sound when a key is left in such a place, you might accidentally lock the doors by pushing the lock button on the outside door handle and be locked out of the vehicle. Be sure to take the electronic key with you.  If you have the electronic key but bring it very close to the window or outside door handle, the alarm might activate. In this case, keep the electronic key a certain distance away from the window or outside door handle and then push the lock button again.  If the electronic key is left in the vehicle, attempting to lock the door by pushing in the lock button located in the inside door handle and closing the door will unlock all the doors and activate the alarm for 2 seconds. 21 KEYS AND DOORS G11030 G11031 Engine switch on/off reminder alarm Open door warning If you push the lock button on the outside door handle without turning off the engine switch, an alarm sounds for 2 seconds and the doors will not lock. If you push the lock button on the outside door handle while any door is not completely closed, an alarm sounds for 10 seconds and the doors will not lock. Before you push the lock button, make sure you have an electronic key and that the engine switch is off. To stop the alarm, close all the doors securely or push the “UNLOCK” button on the electronic key. Before you push the lock button, make sure you have an electronic key and all the doors are securely closed. 22 KEYS AND DOORS UNLOCKING THE DOOR(S) WITH ENTRY FUNCTION G11032 When the door(s) is(are) unlocked, the interior lights come on for 15 seconds if the interior light switch is in the “DOOR” position. However, the interior lights go out when you push the power door lock switch in the lock position or select the engine switch in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode. For further information, see “Interior lights” on page 100. You have 30 seconds to open a door after operating the unlocking function. If a door is not opened by then, all the doors will be automatically locked again. INFORMATION When you take hold the back side of the outside door handle on the driver’s door carrying an electronic key, the driver’s door will be unlocked. When you take hold the back side of the outside door handle except on the driver’s door, carrying an electronic key, all the doors will be unlocked. At this time, two beeps will sound and turn signal lights flash twice. When you get close to your vehicle (about 1 m (3 ft.) from each outside door handle), and are carrying the electronic key, the electronic code emitted from the key is automatically checked to determine if it corresponds to the registered ID code for the vehicle. After this, the outer foot lights come on. (For outer foot lights, see “Outer foot lights” on page 212.) You can select the doors to be unlocked. For details, see “Changing the doors to be unlocked” on page 24.  When unlocking the door(s), be sure to take hold of the back side of the outside door handle firmly as shown in the illustration. Taking hold of the handle with a gloved hand might cause a delay in unlocking or may not unlock.  When you take hold of the handle to unlock the door(s), be sure to confirm that the door(s) has(have) been unlocked. If the turn signal lights flash twice, two beeps sound outside the vehicle, the doors are unlocked. At this time, you can pull the outside door handle to open the door. If you quickly move closer to the vehicle or pull the outside door handle quickly, the doors might not unlock. If you cannot open the door by pulling the outside door handle at this time, push it back to the original position and then pull it out again. 23 KEYS AND DOORS  If you bring the electronic key very close to the outside door handle, the doors might not unlock.  If the electronic key is within effective range, even persons not carrying an electronic key may lock or unlock the doors. CHANGING THE DOORS TO BE UNLOCKED When you push the “LOCK” button together with the “UNLOCK”, “TRUNK” or “PANIC” button on the electronic key for about 5 seconds with the engine switch off, you can change the settings for door unlocking.  If a large amount of water is applied to the outside door handle during heavy rain or a car wash, and someone carrying an electronic key is near the vehicle, the door(s) might be unlocked. However, if the outside door handle is not pulled out, the doors will lock automatically after about 30 seconds. G11183 Each time you push the buttons, the multi−information display and setting changes as shown. 1 Driver’s door unlocking mode The setting displays flash alternately for 4 seconds. When the setting is complete, you will hear the following: 3 beeps (Outside), One chime (Inside) This mode allows you to unlock only the driver’s door when you hold the driver’s door handle and all the doors when you hold any door other than the driver’s door handle. 24 KEYS AND DOORS 2 Side doors unlocking mode The setting displays flash alternately for 4 seconds. When the setting is complete, you will hear the following: 4 beeps (Outside), One chime (Inside) This mode allows you to unlock the front and rear doors on your side when you hold any door handle. 3 Single door unlocking mode The setting display changes as shown. When the setting is complete, you will hear the following: One beep (Outside), One chime (Inside) This mode allows you to unlock the door for which you hold the door handle. 4 INFORMATION If you get in the vehicle from the driver’s door using an electronic key while the side doors or one door is set to be unlocked, all the unlocking controls activated by the electronic key will be stopped for security. If you get out of the vehicle from the driver’s door carrying the electronic key and reaches out of the effective range of the entry function, unlocking control by the electronic key will be possible. However, unlocking control may not be carried out for 5 seconds after you get out from the vehicle. In this case, perform unlocking operation again after 5 seconds. All doors unlocking mode The setting display comes on for 4 seconds. When the setting is complete, you will hear the following: 2 beeps (Outside), One chime (Inside) This mode allows you to unlock all the doors when you hold any door handle. The display will return to driver’s door unlocking mode when you attempt to change the setting from all doors unlocking mode. 25 KEYS AND DOORS UNLOCKING THE TRUNK LID WITH ENTRY FUNCTION G11055 G11056 Key reminder alarm When you push the trunk button on the trunk lid while carrying an electronic key, the trunk lid will unlock. If you lock your electronic key in the trunk when all doors are locked, an alarm sounds for about 2 seconds to remind you that the electronic key is in the trunk. INFORMATION At this time, the trunk lid is unlocked. Even after the alarm stops sounding, pushing the trunk button will unlock the trunk lid. If you bring the electronic key close to the center of the bumper, or it is close to the ground or in a high place, the trunk lid might not unlock. 26 KEYS AND DOORS INFORMATION  If you close the trunk lid while an electronic key is left in the trunk and all doors are locked, an alarm should be activated. However, if the electronic key is placed near the spare tire or at the edge of the trunk, or if the electronic key is in a metallic bag, the trunk lid might not be unlocked.  If you accidentally lock an electronic key in the trunk when all doors are locked, be aware that anyone can unlock the trunk by pushing the trunk button.  Even when the electronic key is outside the trunk, an alarm still might be activated if the electronic key is near the trunk. However, if you have the electronic key, there is no problem. BATTERY POWER SAVING If the electronic key is left within the effective range of the outside of the vehicle for more than 10 minutes without locking or unlocking the doors, the entry function is disabled. If the electronic key does not enter the effective range of the outside of the vehicle for 4 days, the output interval of the electromagnetic signal is extended. If this situation continues for 14 days, the entry function is disabled. To reactivate the entry function properly, perform any of the following: (a) Press the lock button on the outside door handle while carrying the electronic key. (b) Perform a wireless remote control function. (c) Insert and turn the mechanical key in the keyhole of the door. 27 KEYS AND DOORS INFORMATION ANTENNA LOCATIONS  To maintain communication with the vehicle, electronic keys use built−in battery power. The battery service life is about 1 to 2 years on average. If battery power becomes insufficient, replace the battery with a new one.  The electronic key continually receives electromagnetic waves, and if it receives strong electromagnetic waves over a period of time, the battery can be drastically run down. Therefore, avoid storing electronic keys near any electrical appliances. Here is a list of electrical appliances which may have adverse effects on the electronic key performance: TVs, personal computers, cellular phone or cordless phone recharger units, electric light stands and fluorescent desk lights Note that you should always keep such electrical appliances at least 1 m (3 ft.) away from the electronic key. 28 1 Antennas outside cabin 2 Antennas inside cabin 3 Antenna outside trunk 4 Antenna inside trunk KEYS AND DOORS For vehicles sold in U.S.A. (c) Wireless remote control* FCC ID: NI4TMLF−1 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. G11014 CAUTION 1 Locking the doors Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 2 Unlocking the doors and opening the windows and moon roof 3 Unlocking the trunk lid 4 Sounding an alarm For vehicles sold in Canada 5 This device complies with RSS−210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Indicator light NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated as vehicle theft deterrent measure in case of the loss of the electronic key. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. When you operate any button on the electronic key, push it slowly and firmly. At this time, the indicator light flashes once. 29 KEYS AND DOORS The operational range of the wireless remote control is approximately 1 meter (3 ft.). The effective range may vary with different conditions. To activate the wireless remote control without fail, do it approximately 1 meter (3 ft.) from your Lexus. The electronic key is an electronic component. Observe the following instructions in order not to cause damage to the electronic key. In the following cases, the battery in the electronic key may be discharged.  Avoid knocking it hard against other objects or dropping it.  The message “LOW KEY BATTERY” appears on the multi−information display.  The remote control does not work.  The operational range of wireless remote control becomes extremely short.  The indicator light on the electronic key is dimmed or does not come on. For the replacement of the battery, see ”Replacing the battery” on page 34. You can also have the battery of the key replaced by your Lexus dealer. If you lose the electronic key, contact your Lexus dealer immediately to avoid the possibility of theft, or an accident. You can use up to 7 electronic keys for the same vehicle. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information. 30  Do not leave the electronic key in places where the temperature becomes high such as on the dashboard.  Avoid putting it in water. KEYS AND DOORS LOCKING/UNLOCKING THE DOORS The wireless remote control will not operate when the engine switch is selected in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode. When you push the ”LOCK” button on the electronic key briefly, all the doors can be locked from outside the vehicle. When they are locked securely, the turn signal lights will flash and one beep will sound.* However, when you push the ”LOCK” button with any door not closed securely, the buzzer sounds for 10 seconds.** To stop the buzzer, close all the doors securely or push the ”UNLOCK” button. If the electronic key is left in the vehicle, locking cannot be done. Make sure all the doors are locked when you leave the vehicle. Push the ”LOCK” button once again. If they were already locked, the turn signal lights will flash and one beep will sound.*** NOTE: *The turn signal lights can be set not to flash and beep can be set not to sound. **The buzzer can be set not to sound if a door is not closed securely. ***The turn signal lights can be set not to flash. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. When you push the ”UNLOCK” button, the driver’s door is unlocked. Pushing that button once again within 3 seconds from the first push, all other doors are also unlocked.* NOTE: *The 2−step unlocking function can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. At this time, the turn signal lights will flash twice and two beeps will sound.* Together with the activation of unlocking, the interior lights come on for 15 seconds if the interior light switch is in ”DOOR” position.** For further information, see ”Interior lights” on page 100. You have 30 seconds to open a door after using the wireless remote unlock feature.*** If a door is not opened by then, all the doors will be automatically locked again. Even if the ”LOCK” or ”UNLOCK” button is kept pressed in, the locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the button and then push again. NOTE: *The turn signal lights can be set not to flash and beep can be set not to sound. **The interior light can be set not to come on or the duration of lighting can be changed. ***The time before automatic re−locking can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. 31 KEYS AND DOORS UNLOCKING THE TRUNK LID G11015 When you keep the button pushed for about 1 second, you can unlock the trunk lid.* One beep sounds. This function does not work in either of the following conditions.  When the engine switch is selected in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode.  When the trunk opener main switch is deactivated. NOTE: *The operation method can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. 32 SOUNDING AN ALARM* G11016 When you push the ”PANIC” button for about 1 second, an alarm sounds to deter any person trying to break into or damage your vehicle. If you want to stop the alarm, push any button. This function does not work when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. NOTE: *The alarm can be set not to sound. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. KEYS AND DOORS OPERATING THE WINDOWS AND MOON ROOF The windows and moon roof can be operated using an electronic key from outside the vehicle.* NOTE: *The windows can be deactivated. The moon roof can be set to slide open, tilt up or deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. G11017 Push the “UNLOCK” button until the windows and moon roof start to move. When you release the button, the windows and moon roof stop operating. This function will work even with the window lock switch pressed in. For vehicles sold in U.S.A. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. 33 KEYS AND DOORS  Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. REPLACING THE BATTERY When you replace the battery, prepare a lithium battery CR1632 or equivalent and flathead screwdrivers. However, if the inner parts are touched or the electronic key is dropped, it will not function properly. We recommend you to have an electronic key battery replaced by your Lexus dealer. CAUTION Special care should be taken to prevent small children from swallowing the removed battery or components. NOTICE  Do not touch the components in an electronic key with your hand. It may cause static electricity to occur, and an electronic key will be broken.  When replacing the electronic key battery, be careful not to lose components.  Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer.  Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws. 34 KEYS AND DOORS G11034 1. After taking out the mechanical key, insert the flathead screwdriver into the space, and turn it. G11035 2. Using a screwdriver of smaller diameter, insert the screwdriver with the gap and remove the battery. G11036 3. After placing the battery in the slot at an angle, with the positive side facing up, press down on the battery and ensure it is properly in place. G11037 4. Replace the cover by pressing down in the order of 1 and 2 as shown in the illustration. 35 KEYS AND DOORS DOORS NOTICE  Make sure the positive side and negative side of the battery are faced correctly. See page 20 for locking the doors with entry function and page 23 for unlocking them with entry function.  Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may cause unexpected rust. Locking with a mechanical key  Do not touch or move any components inside the transmitter, or it may interfere with proper operation.  Be careful not to bend the electrode when inserting the battery and that dust or oils do not adhere to the inside of the module. G11001 5. After replacing the battery, be sure to return the mechanical key to its original position.  1 Lock 2 Unlock Turn the mechanical key towards the front of the vehicle to lock and towards the back to unlock. The doors lock and unlock simultaneously with the driver’s door. Turning the mechanical key once will unlock the driver’s door and twice in succession will unlock all doors simultaneously.* NOTE: *The 2−step unlocking function can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. 36 KEYS AND DOORS If a wrong key is used, the key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism. So, door locking is protected from thieves. Locking with inside lock button The windows and moon roof can be opened and closed from outside the vehicle using a mechanical key. For details, see “Power window switches” on page 59 and “Moon roof” on page 136. G11002a  1 Lock 2 Unlock Push in the lock button to lock and unlock the door. The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handles even if the lock buttons are in the locked position. CAUTION Do not pull the inside handle of the front doors while driving. The doors will open and an accident may occur. Lexus strongly recommends that all children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle. 37 KEYS AND DOORS Closing the door with the lock button pushed in will also lock the door. If the electronic key is left in the vehicle, locking cannot be done. Locking with power door lock switch If the vehicle is subjected to a severe frontal, rear or side impact with the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode, all the doors will unlock automatically after a few seconds. G11003 CAUTION Before driving, make sure the doors are closed and locked, especially when small children are in the vehicle. Along with the proper use of seat belts, locking the doors helps prevent the driver and passengers from being thrown out from the vehicle during an accident. It also helps prevent the doors from being opened unintentionally.  1 Lock 2 Unlock To lock all the doors simultaneously, push the power door lock switch down on the lock side. Pushing down on the unlock side will unlock them. When you push the power door lock switch on the unlock side to unlock the doors to allow a passenger to get in, the outer foot lights come on. To turn off the lights, push the power door lock switch on the lock side. (For details, see “Outer foot lights” on page 212.) The same switch is also found on the front passenger’s side. However, pushing this switch will neither turn on nor off the outer foot lights. 38 KEYS AND DOORS Automatic door locking and unlocking functions To select the locking linked with the vehicle speed: AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING 1. Close all doors and select the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode. You can select the following functions: 2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the “N” position.  Locking linked with the shift position 3. Within 10 seconds of selecting the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode, press and hold the driver’s side power door lock switch in the lock position for 5 seconds and then release. All doors are automatically locked when the selector lever is moved out of “P” position.  Locking linked with vehicle speed The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the function is set. All doors are automatically locked when the vehicle speed goes above about 20 km/h (12 mph). To cancel the function, do the above operation again. You can set or cancel the automatic door locking functions: Be sure to apply the parking brake when performing the following operations. To select the locking linked with the shift position: 1. Close all doors and select the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode. 2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position. 3. Within 10 seconds of selecting the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode, press and hold the driver’s side power door lock switch in the lock position for 5 seconds and then release. The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the function is set. To cancel the function, do the above operation again. 39 KEYS AND DOORS AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCKING To select the unlocking linked with the engine switch: You can select the following functions: 1. Close all doors and select the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode.  Unlocking linked with the shift position All doors are automatically unlocked when the selector lever is moved to “P” position.  Unlocking linked with the engine switch All doors are automatically unlocked when the the driver’s door is opened within 10 seconds after the engine switch is selected in “ACC” or “OFF” mode. You can set or cancel the automatic unlocking functions: Be sure to apply the parking brake when performing the following operations. To select the unlocking linked with the shift position: 1. Close all doors and select the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode. 2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position. 3. Within 10 seconds of selecting the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode, press and hold the driver’s side power door lock switch in the unlock position for 5 seconds and then release. The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the function is set. To cancel the function, do the above operation again. 40 2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the “N” position. 3. Within 10 seconds of selecting the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode, press and hold the driver’s side power door lock switch in the unlock position for 5 seconds and then release. The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the function is set. To cancel the function, do the above operation again. KEYS AND DOORS Locking with rear door child−protector G11004  1 Unlock 2 Lock Whenever small children are in the vehicle, lock the rear door so that it does not open by the inside door handle. To do this, turn the knob to the lock position as shown and then close the door. THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM G11005 To deter theft of the vehicle, this system is designed to sound an alarm if any of the doors, trunk or hood is forcibly unlocked or opened, or the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected while the vehicle is locked. The alarm blows the horn intermittently, flashes the headlights, tail lights, turn signal lights and other exterior lights. When the interior light switch is in the “DOOR” position, the interior lights also turn on. After the alarm is activated, when you unlock any door or the trunk using a entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key, the tail lights turn on for about 2 seconds to inform you that the system was activated. 41 KEYS AND DOORS Cancelling the system When you unlock any door or trunk using entry function, wireless remote control or a mechanical key, the system is cancelled. G11006a Security indicator light NOTE: * The turn signal lights can be set not to flash and beep can be set not to sound. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. Setting the system Activating the system 1. Turn the engine switch off. The alarm sounds for 60 seconds if any of the following are operated: The engine immobilizer causes the security indicator light to flash. 2. Close and lock all the doors, trunk and hood using entry function, wireless remote control or a mechanical key. If you lock them with entry function or wireless remote control, the turn signal lights flash once and one beep will sound.* At this time, the indicator light comes on. NOTE: * The turn signal lights can be set not to flash and beep can be set not to sound. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. 3. After 30 seconds, the illuminated indicator light changes flashing and the system is set. 42 If you unlock any door or trunk with entry function or wireless remote control, the turn signal lights flash twice and two beeps will sound.*  Unlocking any door or trunk without using entry function, wireless remote control or a mechanical key.  Opening the hood forcibly.  Reconnecting the battery. If any door is unlocked during the alarm sounding, its door is automatically locked. To stop the alarm: Use either of the following methods.  Unlock the door or trunk using entry function, wireless remote control or a mechanical key.  Start the engine. KEYS AND DOORS Testing the system 1. Open all the windows. 2. Set the system as described above. All the doors should be locked with entry function, wireless remote control or a mechanical key. Be sure to wait until the indicator light starts flashing. 3. Unlock one of the doors from the inside through one of the opened windows. The system should activate the alarm. 4. Unlock any of the doors with entry function, the wireless remote control or a mechanical key to cancel the system. 5. Repeat this operation for the other doors, trunk and hood. When testing the hood, also check that the system is activated when the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected. If the system does not work properly, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. NOTICE When disconnecting the battery, be sure to cancel the theft deterrent system. Otherwise, the system could activate an alarm and lock the unlocked door(s) automatically. 43 KEYS AND DOORS 44 SECTION 1–2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Switches Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlight dimmer and turn signal switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlight cleaner switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch . . . . . Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat ventilator/heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 49 50 51 57 58 59 62 63 65 45 SWITCHES HEADLIGHT SWITCH Vehicles sold in U.S.A.: When the headlights are on, the headlight indicator lights up in the instrument cluster. Vehicles sold in Canada: When the tail lights are on, the tail light indicator lights up in the instrument cluster. G12001  1 U.S.A. 2 Canada To turn the lights on, twist the knob on the end of the lever. FIRST CLICKSTOP: Only the parking, tail, license plate, side marker and instrument panel lights turn on. SECOND CLICKSTOP: Headlights also turn on. THIRD CLICKSTOP (”AUTO”): The headlights and all other lights automatically turn on depending on the darkness of the surroundings.* NOTE: *The operating condition or sensitivity can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. 46 With the knob in the “AUTO” position, there may be a case that the headlights do not turn on immediately, even when the vehicle enters a dark place such as a tunnel or parking lot according to lighting conditions. In this case, we recommend you to twist the knob manually to the second clickstop to turn on the headlights immediately. When the headlight switch is turned to the first or second clickstop, the brightness of the instrument cluster will be reduced slightly unless the maximum brightness is provided by pushing the “MAX” button. However, the brightness of the instrument cluster will not be reduced in daytime even when the headlight switch is turned to first or second clickstop. SWITCHES Daytime Running Light System G12002 The headlights turn on at reduced intensity when the parking brake is released with the engine started, even with the light switch in the ”OFF” position. They will not go off until the engine switch is turned off. To turn on the other exterior lights and instrument panel lights, twist the knob to the first clickstop. Twist the knob to the second clickstop to turn on the headlights to full intensity for driving at night. The automatic light control sensor is on top center of the instrument panel. Do not place anything on the instrument panel, and/or do not affix anything on the windshield to block this sensor. When the headlights come on, the lights automatically turn off about 30 seconds after any of the doors is opened and closed with the engine switch off.* To turn them on again, select the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode, or turn the headlight switch off and then twist the knob until the first or second clickstop. If you are going to park for over one week, make sure the headlight switch is off. When setting the knob to the third clickstop (”AUTO”), the headlights will automatically adjust to full intensity and/or turn on the other lights depending on the darkness of the surroundings. Likewise, as the surroundings become brighter, the headlights will turn to reduced intensity, ultimately turning off the other lights. NOTICE To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. When the headlight switch is on with all the doors locked and the trunk closed, pushing the ”LOCK” button on the electronic key turns off the headlights. NOTE: *The time before turning off the lights can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. 47 SWITCHES Automatic headlight leveling system The headlight beam level is always maintained automatically at the proper level in all loading conditions so that your headlights do not dazzle other road users. If there is a problem somewhere in this system, the message “CHECK HEADLIGHT” appears on the multi−information display. At this time, the master warning light comes on and a warning tone sounds. If the warning message appears, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. If you do not want to activate the system, you can cancel the system. Adaptive Front Lighting System cancel switch is located in the switch box. G12017 Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) provides the proper headlight beam level according to the current driving conditions. This system moves the headlight beam left or right according to the turning angle of the tires. The synergy of this system and the automatic headlight leveling system improves visibility at the intersections and curves. Push the button to use the switch box. To cancel the system, push the “AFS OFF” switch. To turn it on, push it again. The system operates when the vehicle speed increases above 10 km/h (6 mph), and stops when the vehicle speed drops below 10 km/h (6 mph). When the system is canceled, the “AFS OFF” indicator lights up in the instrument cluster. The system can operate within the limited range of the tires turning angle. If the system fails, the indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. After operation, be sure to close the switch box to its original position. 48 SWITCHES CAUTION To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when not in use while driving. HEADLIGHT DIMMER AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCHES G12004 For high beam, push the lever forward. Pull it back for low beam. For the headlight flasher, pull it further back. A blue light in the instrument cluster indicates high beam or headlight flasher is on. The headlight flasher works even when the headlight switch is off. 49 SWITCHES FOG LIGHT SWITCH G12005 G12006 For signaling turns, move the lever up or down in the conventional manner. The engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode. The turn signal is self−cancelling after a turn, but after a lane change, you may have to cancel it by hand. You can also signal a lane change by moving the turn signal lever partway and holding it there. If the green light in the instrument cluster flashes faster than normal, it indicates that the front or rear turn signal bulb has burned out. If this indicator light does not come on, the fuse or the indicator light itself has probably failed. 50 To turn on the fog lights, twist the band of the headlight lever to the fog light mark. They will come on only when the headlights are on low beam. When the fog lights are on, the indicator lights up in the instrument cluster. SWITCHES WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCHES Variable intermittent wipers G12007 The wiper lever must be in the ”INT” position. The time interval between sweeps is shortened when the vehicle speed increases. When the vehicle speed reaches more than about 20 km/h (12 mph) with the interval adjuster twisted down to the lowest position, the time interval becomes the shortest 1.5 seconds. If you stop the vehicle with the wiper switch in the “LO” position, the wiper speed automatically changes from low speed to intermittent operation speed.* This function does not work with the interval adjuster twisted down to the lowest position. NOTE: * This feature can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. For mist wiper operations (a single wipe), pull the lever up and release it.  1 Interval adjuster 2 Washer on To turn the wipers on, move the lever down until you reach the desired speed setting. The engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode. There are 3 settings: ”INT” position: Intermittent operation ”LO” position: Low speed operation ”HI” position: High speed operation Twist the interval adjuster upward to increase the wiping time interval between sweeps, and downward to decrease it. To make the washer squirt, push the lever toward you and release it. If the wiper lever is in the “OFF” position, the wipers will automatically make 3 wipes and then a single wipe later to sweep the windshield completely.* The interval between the 3 wipes and the last wipe will depend on the vehicle speed. The last sweep does not happen if the vehicle speed exceeds about 170 km/h (106 mph). NOTE: *This function can be changed as follows:  The time before the last single wipe can be set for about 3 seconds.  The last single wipe can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. 51 SWITCHES The warning message “LOW WASHER FLUID” is displayed in the multi−information display when the fluid level in the tank becomes very low. For information on adding washer fluid, see “Adding washer fluid” on page 589. In cold weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before using the washer. This will help prevent icing, which could block your vision. Rain−sensing windshield wipers G12008 NOTICE Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch the glass.  1 Automatic control adjuster 2 Washer on To turn the wipers on, move the lever down until you reach the desired speed setting. The engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode. There are 3 settings: “AUTO” position: Automatic operation “LO” position: Low speed operation “HI” position: High speed operation 52 SWITCHES Automatic operation* The wiper speed is determined by the vehicle speed and the amount of raindrops and sunlight detected by the automatic wiper control sensor. Twist the automatic control adjuster in the “–” direction to lower the sensitivity, and the “+” direction to boost the sensitivity. With the engine switch turned off, if the windshield sensor is touched by reason of cleaning the windshield or for any other reason, either of the following operations may cause automatic wiper activation.  Turning the engine switch on with the wiper lever in the “AUTO” position.  Turning the engine switch on and move the wiper lever down in the “AUTO” position. Even with the wiper lever in the “AUTO” position, the system will switch to intermittent operations if the system malfunctions. G12009 The sensor is on the inside of the windshield as shown above. The system will turn off if the windshield gets extremely hot (at more than 80C or 176F) or cold (at less than –10C or 14F). When the engine switch is turned off with the wiper lever in the “AUTO” position, and then the engine switch is turned on again, the automatic operation may not work even if raindrops are on the windshield. In this case, move the lever to another position and return it to the “AUTO” position again. NOTE: *Automatic operation can be changed to an intermittent operation. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. 53 SWITCHES CAUTION For mist wiper operations (a single wipe), pull the lever up and release it. Be careful not to get your fingers caught between the wipers and windshield. To make the washer squirt, pull the lever toward you and release it. When the wiper lever is in the “AUTO” position with the engine switch on, the wipers could operate automatically in the following cases: If the wiper lever is in the “OFF” position, the wipers will automatically make 3 wipes and then a single wipe later to sweep the windshield completely.* The interval between the 3 wipes and the last wipe will depend on the vehicle speed. The last sweep does not happen if the vehicle speed exceeds about 170 km/h (106 mph).  If you touch the upper center of the windshield adjacent to the sensor.  If you wipe the upper center of the windshield (adjacent to which the sensor is located) with a towel.  If the windshield vibrates.  If you touch the sensor. NOTE: *This function can be changed as follows:  The time before the last single wipe can be set for about 3 seconds.  The last single wipe can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. The warning message “LOW WASHER FLUID” is displayed in the multi−information display when the fluid level in the tank becomes very low. For information on adding washer fluid, see “Adding washer fluid” on page 589. When the headlights are on and the washers are activated by pushing the windshield washer switch, the headlight cleaner operates once automatically. In cold weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before using the washer. This will help prevent icing, which could block your vision. The rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger automatically turns on when you operate the wipers. 54 SWITCHES NOTICE Shifting the windshield wiper position Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch the glass. G12020  1 Rest position 2 Retracted position The wiper blades retract under the hood when the wipers are turned off. In the following cases, the wipers should be shifted from the retracted position to the rest position above the hood level.  When cleaning the windshield  When inspecting or replacing the wipers  When the retraction may be obstructed by snow, etc., at the bottom of the windshield Other than the above cases, keep the wipers in the retracted position. 55 SWITCHES G12021  More than 10 cm (3.9 in.) To shift the windshield wipers from retracted to rest position, hold the connection of the wiper arm and wiper blade and pull it upward along the windshield glass with the force of about 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf.). NOTICE To prevent the wiper blades from being deformed, be sure to hold the connection of the wiper arm and wiper blade securely. 56 G12022 To return the windshield wipers to retracted position, push the connection of the wiper arm and wiper blade downward. NOTICE To prevent the wiper blades from being deformed, be sure to hold the connection of the wiper arm and wiper blade securely. SWITCHES HEADLIGHT CLEANER SWITCH The headlight cleaner switch is located in the switch box. G12010 CAUTION To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when not in use while driving. NOTICE Do not turn the headlight cleaner on with the washer fluid tank empty. It may cause the cleaner motor to overheat. Push the button to use the switch box. To spray fluid on the headlights, push the switch with the headlights on. The engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode. The warning message “LOW WASHER FLUID” is displayed in the multi−information display when the fluid level in the tank becomes very low. For information on adding washer fluid, see “Adding washer fluid” on page 589. After operation, be sure to close the switch box to its original position. 57 SWITCHES REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR DEFOGGER SWITCH G12011 CAUTION Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them when the switch is on. If further defrosting or defogging is desired, simply actuate the switch again. When the surface has cleared, push the switch once again to turn the defogger off. Continuous use may cause the battery to discharge, especially during stop−and−go driving. The defogger is not designed to dry rain water or to melt snow. If the outside rear view mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use a spray de−icer before operating the switch. NOTICE To turn the electric rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger on, push the switch. The engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode. The thin heater wires on the inside of the rear window and the heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear the surface. Keep your hands off the mirror faces when the switch is on. An indicator light is on when the defogger is operating. The system will automatically shut off when the defogger has operated about 15 minutes. 58  When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or connectors.  To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn the switch off when the engine is not running. SWITCHES POWER WINDOW SWITCHES G12023 G12012 Operating the switches  1 2 3 4 For driver’s window For front passenger’s window For left rear window For right rear window To raise or lower the windows, use the switch on each door. The passengers’ windows can also be controlled by the switches on the driver’s door. To lower the window, push the switch halfway down. Pull it up to raise the window. The window glass moves as long as the switch is operated. Automatic operation: To fully raise or lower the window automatically, pull the switch fully up or push it fully down. To stop the window partway, lightly push or pull the switch in the opposite direction and then release it. The power windows work when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. Retained accessory power operation: Even if the engine switch is off with all the doors closed, the window can be operated until any of the doors is opened (or for about 45 seconds). 59 SWITCHES Operating the window lock switch Operating the windows from outside the vehicle The windows can be operated using a mechanical key.* G12013 Indicator light NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. G12014 With the window lock switch pressed in, only the driver’s window can be raised or lowered. The indicator lights on the switches tell you which of the switches can be operated. Even with the window lock switch pressed in, the windows will be opened from outside the vehicle using a mechanical key or wireless remote control. Insert the mechanical key into the key hole on the driver’s side. To close the windows: Turn the key in the locking direction and hold it. After the door is locked, the windows begin to close. To stop in the middle, return the key. To open the windows: Turn the key in the unlocking direction and hold it. After the door is unlocked, the windows begin to open. To stop in the middle, return the key. 60 SWITCHES This function will work even with the window lock switch pressed in. CAUTION The windows also can be opened using the wireless remote control. For details, see page 29. To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following. Jam protection function During automatic raising operation, retained accessory power raising operation or raising operation using the mechanical key from the outside, the window stops and is lowered if something gets caught between the window and window frame. If the window receives a strong impact, this function may work even if nothing is caught. If the battery is disconnected or run down The power window may not operate automatically and the jam protection function will not function correctly after you reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. At this time, the indicator lights of the switches will flash. In any of these cases, you should normalize the power window on each door.  Before you close the power windows, always make sure there is nobody around the power windows. You must also make sure the heads, hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants are kept completely inside the vehicle. If someone’s neck, head or hands get caught in a closing window, it could result in death or serious injury. When anyone closes the power windows, make sure he or she operates the windows safely.  When small children are in the vehicle, never let them use the power window switches without supervision. Use the window lock switch to prevent them from making unexpected use of the switches. To normalize the power windows: 1. Push down the power window switch of each door and lower the windows halfway. 2. Pull up the switch until the windows close and hold the switch for one second. Make sure the windows open and close automatically. If the power windows cannot be operated properly, have them checked by your Lexus dealer. 61 SWITCHES  Be sure to turn the engine switch to “OFF” mode when you leave your vehicle.  Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone in your vehicle, especially when the engine switch is on. Otherwise, he/she could use the power window switches and get trapped in a window. Unattended persons (particularly a small child) can be involved in a serious accident. EMERGENCY FLASHER SWITCH G12015a  Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally, as it could result in a serious injury.  The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closed. To turn on the emergency flashers, push the switch. To turn them off, push the switch again. All the turn signal lights will flash. The emergency flashers will work with the engine running or off and with or without the electronic key. Turn on the emergency flashers to warn other drivers if you must stop your vehicle where it might be a traffic hazard. Always pull your vehicle as far off the road as possible. The turn signal light switch will not work when the emergency flashers are in operation. NOTICE To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the switch on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 62 SWITCHES SEAT HEATER SWITCHES G12026 G12024 To turn on the heater, turn the dial as shown. The indicator light (yellow) comes on. To use the seat heater switches, pull the lever to slide the rear console box cover backward. The engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode. The heating level will be increased as you turn the dial to the higher number. To disable this function, turn the dial to the “0” position. The indicator light goes off. Keep the dial in this position when not in use. G12025  1 For driver’s seat 2 For front passenger’s seat 63 SWITCHES CAUTION NOTICE Occupants must use caution when operating the seat heater because they may experience minor burns even at low temperatures. Use extra caution for;  Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.  Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons or persons with physical disabilities  When cleaning the seats, do not use organic substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline, etc.). They may damage the heater and seat surface.  Persons who have sensitive skin  Persons who are exhausted  Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs which induce sleep (sleeping drug, cold remedy, etc.). To prevent the seat from overheating, do not use the seat heater with a blanket, cushion, or other insulating objects which cover the seat. 64  To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn the switches off when the engine is not running. SWITCHES SEAT VENTILATOR/HEATER SWITCHES The seats can be warmed and deliver airflow from the seat surface using seat ventilator/heater switches. G12027 G12028  1 For driver’s seat 2 For front passenger’s seat To use the seat heater/ventilator switches, pull the lever to slide the rear console box cover backward. 65 SWITCHES Seat ventilator NOTICE  Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat. G12029  When cleaning the seats, do not use organic substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline, etc.). They may damage the seat ventilation / heating system and seat surface.  When cleaning the seats, fully wring out a towel to be used. The wet seats may cause the seat ventilation/heating system to malfunction. To turn on the seat ventilator, turn the dial as shown. The indicator light (green) comes on. The engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode. More air will be delivered as you turn the dial to the higher number. After the switch is turned on, it takes several minutes until you feel cool. To disable this function, turn the dial to the “0” position. The indicator light goes off. Keep the dial in this position when not in use. 66  To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn the switches off when the engine is not running. SWITCHES Seat heater CAUTION Occupants must use caution when operating the seat heater because they may experience minor burns even at low temperatures. Use extra caution for; G12030  Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons or persons with physical disabilities  Persons who have sensitive skin  Persons who are exhausted  Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs which induce sleep (sleeping drug, cold remedy, etc.). To turn on the seat heater, turn the dial as shown. The indicator light (yellow) comes on. The engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode. To prevent the seat from overheating, do not use the seat heater with a blanket, cushion, or other insulating objects which cover the seat. The heating level will be increased as you turn the dial to the higher number. To disable this function, turn the dial to the “0” position. The indicator light goes off. Keep the dial in this position when not in use. 67 SWITCHES NOTICE  Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.  When cleaning the seats, do not use organic substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline, etc.). They may damage the seat ventilation/heating system and seat surface.  When cleaning the seats, fully wring out a towel to be used. The wet seats may cause the seat ventilation/heating system to malfunction.  To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn the switches off when the engine is not running. 68 SECTION 1–3 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Gauges, meters and service reminder indicators Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light sensitive optitron meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi−information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 70 71 72 73 74 84 98 69 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS FUEL GAUGE See the inner back cover for fuel capacity and recommended fuel selection. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE G13001 G13002 Low fuel level warning light The gauge indicates the approximate quantity of fuel remaining in the tank when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. It is a good idea to keep the tank over 1/4 full. If the fuel level approaches ”E” or the low fuel level warning light comes on, fill the fuel tank as soon as possible. On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual. If the fuel tank is completely empty, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill the fuel tank immediately. The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. 70 Normal range The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. The engine operating temperature will vary with changes in weather and engine load. If the needle points to the red zone or higher, stop your vehicle and allow the engine to cool. Your vehicle may overheat during severe operating conditions, such as:  Driving up a long hill on a hot day.  Reducing speed or stopping after high speed driving. GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS  Idling for a long period with the air conditioning on in stop−and−go traffic. TACHOMETER NOTICE  Do not remove the thermostat in the engine cooling system as this may cause the engine to overheat. The thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant to keep the temperature of the engine within the specified operating range. G13003  Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. See ”If your vehicle overheats” on page 473. The tachometer indicates engine speed in thousands of rpm (revolutions per minute). Use it while driving to prevent engine over−revving. Driving with the engine running too fast causes excessive engine wear and poor fuel economy. Remember, in most cases the slower the engine speed, the greater the fuel economy. NOTICE Do not let the indicator needle get into the red zone. This may cause severe engine damage. 71 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS ODOMETER AND TRIP METER The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip meter records two different distances independently. For example, you can use one meter to calculate the fuel economy and the other to measure the distance on each trip. G13045 To change the trip meter indication from one trip to the other, push the “ODO TRIP” change switch. To set the A trip meter to zero, display the A meter reading, then push the “RESET” switch. The same applies for the B trip meter. The data of trip meters will be cancelled if the electrical power source is disconnected. This meter displays the odometer and two trip meters. To change the mode indication, use the “ODO TRIP” switch. After operation, be sure to close the switch box to its original position. The “ODO TRIP” switch is located in the switch box. CAUTION To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when not in use while driving. G13004 Push the button to use the switch box and then push the “ODO TRIP” switch. 72 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS LIGHT SENSITIVE OPTITRON METER Light sensitive optitron meter reduces unwanted glare of the instrument cluster to provide a fine view for the driver. The meter is originally set to “AUTO−Norm” mode, so the reflection of the instrument cluster is adjusted automatically by tinting the cluster glass depending on the lighting condition of your surroundings. Push the “MODE” switch once and then again within 6 seconds. Each time you push the button, the mode changes in the following order: 1. “AUTO−Norm” . . . . Recommended mode 2. “AUTO−Lo” . . . . . . The cluster glass is tinted with the surroundings darker than in “AUTO−Norm” mode. 3. “AUTO−Hi” . . . . . . . The cluster glass is tinted with the surroundings brighter than in “AUTO−Norm” mode. There are “AUTO” and “MANUAL” modes. To change the mode as you like, follow the procedure below. 4. “MANUAL−1” . . . . . The cluster glass is adjusted in deep tints. The reflection control switch is located in the switch box. 5. “MANUAL−2” . . . . . The cluster glass is adjusted in neutral tints. 6. “MANUAL−3” . . . . . The cluster glass is adjusted in light tints. G13044 7. “MANUAL−4” . . . . . The cluster glass is not tinted, however, if the surroundings are very bright, it is automatically adjusted in light tints. The setting display goes off automatically about 6 seconds after the “MODE” switch is pushed. The mode shown last is set. Push the button to use the switch box. When you push the “MODE” switch, the present setting appears on the multi−information display. The cluster glass may not be tinted in “MANUAL−1”, “MANUAL−2” or “MANUAL−3” mode in the night or cloudy dark day. When the ambient temperature in the vehicle interior is low, it may take time for the cluster glass to be tinted. After operation, be sure to close the switch box to its original position. 73 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS CAUTION To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when not in use while driving. SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS AND WARNING BUZZERS IF THIS INDICATOR OR BUZZER COMES ON ... (a) or (Red indicator and buzzer) G13106 (b) (Yellow indicator) DO THIS. If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Lexus dealer. Take vehicle to Lexus dealer. If brake system warning light (red) is also on, stop immediately and contact Lexus dealer. The light sensitive optitron meter sensor is located under the high mounted stoplight. NOTICE (Indicator and buzzer)  Do not apply window tint or a sticker on the rear window. Otherwise the light sensitive optitron meter may not operate properly.  If snow, mud, frost or the like is attached to the rear window just behind the sensor, remove it soon, or the light sensitive optitron meter may not operate properly. 74 Fasten driver’s seat belt. (c) (d) WG5 Fasten front passenger’s seat belt. GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS IF THIS INDICATOR OR BUZZER COMES ON ... IF THIS INDICATOR OR BUZZER COMES ON ... DO THIS. (e) Take vehicle to Lexus dealer immediately. (j) (f) Stop immediately and contact Lexus dealer. (k) (g) or See multi−information display. (h) (i) Take vehicle to Lexus dealer. or Take vehicle to Lexus dealer. If brake system warning light (red) is also on, stop immediately and contact Lexus dealer. DO THIS. Close all doors. WG10 If flashing, take vehicle to Lexus dealer. (l) WG6 Adjust tire inflation pressure. If light remains on, contact Lexus dealer. (m) WG8 Take vehicle to Lexus dealer. (n) (o) WG7 Low fuel level warning light Take vehicle to Lexus dealer. Fill up tank. 75 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS IF THIS INDICATOR OR BUZZER COMES ON ... (p) Key reminder buzzer DO THIS. Turn off the engine switch. (a) Brake System Warning Light (red) and Buzzer This light comes on in the following cases when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode.  When the parking brake is applied ... GS430—This light comes on for a few seconds when the engine is started even after the parking brake is released. GS300—This light comes on for a few seconds when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode even after the parking brake is released. If you drive your vehicle without releasing the parking brake, the buzzer sounds and the message “PARK BRAKE” appears on the multi−information display.  When the brake fluid level is low ... CAUTION It is dangerous to continue driving normally when the brake fluid level is low. Have your vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer in the following case:  The light does not come on even if the parking brake is applied when the engine is started.  The light does not come on even if the engine is started with the parking brake released. 76 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem. CAUTION If either of the following conditions occurs, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.  The light does not turn off even after the parking brake is released while the engine is running. In this case, the brakes may not work properly and your stopping distance will become longer. Depress the brake pedal firmly and bring the vehicle to an immediate stop.  The brake system warning light remains on together with the “ABS” warning light. In this case, not only the anti−lock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking. GS430 only—Any of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate the malfunction:  The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the engine is started. It is normal if it turns off after a while.  Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the warning light and buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off and the buzzer stops sounding after a few seconds.  You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment after the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake system, and it is not a malfunction. (b) Brake System Warning Light (yellow) The light comes on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. GS430—If the engine is started, and the traction control system, vehicle stability control system and hill−start assist control system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if any part of the system malfunctions, the light comes on again. GS300—If the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, and the traction control system, vehicle stability control system and hill−start assist control system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, if any part of the system malfunctions, the light comes on again. Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. (c) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light and Buzzer The light and buzzer act as a reminder to have the driver buckle up the seat belt. 77 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS Once the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, the reminder light flashes and buzzer sounds if the driver’s seat belt is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens the belt, the light continues flashing and the buzzer stops after about 4 to 8 seconds. If the vehicle speed exceeds about 15 km/h (10 mph) with the driver’s seat belt reminder light flashing, beeps sound intermittently for about 20 seconds. (d) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Reminder Light The light acts as a reminder to have the front passenger buckle up the seat belt. Once the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, the reminder light flashes if a passenger sits in the front passenger seat and does not fasten the seat belt. Unless the front passenger fastens the belt, the light continues flashing. However, if a front passenger uses an additional seat cushion, the indicator light may not flash even when the seat belt is not buckled up. If luggage or other load is placed on the front passenger seat, depending on its weight and how it is placed on the seat, built−in sensors in the seat cushion may detect the pressure, causing the reminder light to flash. 78 (e) SRS Warning Light The indicator comes on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the SRS airbags and seat belt pretensioners are operating properly. This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, occupant detection sensor, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.  When the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, the light does not come on or remains on for more than 6 seconds.  The light comes on while driving. If the light stays on, it indicates that the SRS driver and front passenger airbags, SRS side and curtain shield airbags and/or seat belt pretensioners have a problem. GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS (f) Charging System Warning Light (g) Malfunction Indicator Lamp This warning light comes on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, and goes off when the engine is started. This lamp comes on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode and goes off after the engine starts. This means that the warning light system is operating properly. When there are problems in the charging system while the engine is running, the warning light comes on. If the lamp remains on, or the lamp comes on while driving, first check the followings: NOTICE When the charging system warning light comes on while the engine is running, malfunctions such as the engine drive belt being broken may have occurred. If the warning light comes on, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.  Empty fuel tank If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immediately.  Loose fuel tank cap If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely tighten it. These cases are temporary malfunctions. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips. If the lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel tank cap is not loose...  There is a problem somewhere in the engine, emission control system, electronic throttle control system, automatic transmission electrical system or warning light system itself. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle. If this lamp comes on and engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal is depressed, there may be a problem somewhere in the electronic throttle control system. 79 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. (i) ”ABS” Warning Light Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be recovered until the engine is stopped and the engine switch is selected in “ACC” or “OFF” mode. GS430—If the anti−lock brake system and the brake assist system work properly, the light turns off in a few seconds after the engine is started. Thereafter, if either system malfunctions, the light comes on again. Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs GS300—If the anti−lock brake system and the brake assist system work properly, the light turns off in a few seconds after the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. Thereafter, if either system malfunctions, the light comes on again. Your vehicle may not pass a state emission inspection if the malfunction indicator lamp remains on. Contact your Lexus dealer to check your vehicle’s emission control system and OBD (On−Board Diagnostics) system before taking your vehicle for the inspection. For details, see “Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs” on page 505. (h) Master Warning Light If any system malfunctions, this warning light comes on or flashes together with a warning tone, and a warning message appears on the multi−information display. When the cause of the problem is eliminated, the warning tone and message on the display will turn off. The light comes on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. When the “ABS” warning light is on, the anti−lock brake system and the brake assist system do not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally. If any of the following conditions occur, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.  The light does not come on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode.  The light remains on after the engine is started (GS430), or remains on after the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode (GS300).  The light comes on while you are driving. A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem. 80 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS CAUTION If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the brake system warning light (red), immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. In this case, not only the anti−lock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking. GS430 only—Either of the following conditions may occur, but does not indicate a malfunction:  The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the engine is started. It is normal if it turns off after a while.  Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it turns off after a few seconds. (k) Adaptive Front Lighting System Off Indicator Light This light comes on when you turn off the Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) by pushing the “AFS OFF” switch. If there is a problem somewhere in the Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS) or automatic headlight leveling system, the light flashes. At this time, both systems do not operate properly. Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. (l) Tire pressure warning light This light comes on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. If the tire pressure warning system works properly and tire inflation pressure is appropriate, the light goes off after a few seconds. (j) Open Door Warning Light This light comes on or flashes in the following cases when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. This light remains on until all the doors are completely closed.  When the low tire inflation pressure is detected while driving... If any tire has low inflation pressure, the light comes on. The light goes off after the tire inflation pressure is adjusted to a specified level.  When initializing the system... If initialization is completed, the light blinks three times.  When the system malfunctions... If the system malfunctions, the light blinks. 81 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. (m) Electric Power Steering System Warning Light The light comes on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. If the electric power steering system works properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. If the system has malfunctions, the light comes on again. If the following conditions occur, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.  The light does not come on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode or remains on.  The light stays on while you are driving. The warning light turning on while racing the engine for a long time may not indicate malfunction. To turn off the light, restart the engine and start driving. CAUTION If the electric power steering system warning light comes on, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. In this case, more effort is required for the steering wheel to turn than usual. Drive your vehicle while firmly gripping the steering wheel. 82 (n) Pre−Collision System Warning Light The light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the pre−collision system. The light comes on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. If the system works properly, the light goes off after a few seconds. If the light does not come on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. (o) Low Fuel Level Warning Light This light comes on when the fuel level in the tank becomes very low. Fill the tank as soon as possible. On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual. (p) Key Reminder Buzzer This buzzer acts as a reminder to turn off the engine when you bring out the electronic key from the vehicle with the engine switch in “IG−ON” or “ACC” mode. GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS How to check all the service reminder indicators (except the low fuel level warning light): WG6 WG7 WG8 The following service reminder indicators go off after a few seconds. 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Open the door. The following service reminder indicator should come on. It goes off when you close the door completely. WG6 WG8 WG10 GS300 only—The above and following service reminder indicators go off after a few seconds. 3. Select the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode. or The following service reminder indicators should come on. (yellow) The following service reminder indicator goes off after about 6 seconds. or or The lights other than the slip indicator light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the engine is started. It is normal if they go out after a while. (red) or WG10 (yellow) If any service reminder indicator or warning buzzer does not function as described above, have it checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. 83 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS MULTI−INFORMATION DISPLAY (a) Cruise information The following information is shown with the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode. Each time you push the “DISP” switch, the displayed information is changed.  Outside temperature G13037  Available driving distance  Average fuel consumption after being refueled  Current fuel consumption  Blank The multi−information display provides various information, including your vehicle’s driving condition, outside temperature, and warning messages if your vehicle is in trouble. During ordinary driving, cruise information or graphic information is displayed. However, if any problem occurs in your vehicle, the display changes to a warning message screen. 84 The displayed cruise information values indicate the general driving condition and may not always reflect precise and actual conditions.  Outside temperature g13047 The outside temperature is displayed. For details, see “Outside temperature display” on page 109. GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS  Available driving distance g13039 The available driving distance is calculated and displayed depending on the amount of remaining fuel.  Average fuel consumption after refueling g13046  Current fuel consumption g13040 The current fuel consumption is calculated and displayed based on the driving distance and the fuel consumption at 20 revolutions of the engine. The value is updated every 0.5 seconds. If you are driving at low speeds just before stopping, the accurate figure may not be shown. The average fuel consumption after refueling is calculated and displayed based on the total driving distance and the total fuel consumption after refueling. The value is updated every 10 seconds. When refueling, be sure to stop your vehicle and turn the engine switch off. The average fuel consumption could not be calculated in either of the following cases:  Refueled by opening the fuel filler door using the manual lever in the trunk  Refueled with a small quantity of gasoline 85 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS (b) Graphic information (c) Warning messages The following graphic information is shown on the display. The following warning messages are shown on the multi−information display.  Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped)  Open Door Warning  Dynamic radar cruise control display (if equipped) See page 372 for intuitive parking assist and page 401 for dynamic radar cruise control. G13041 G13006 If you push the intuitive parking assist switch or turn the engine switch on with the main switch of the intuitive parking assist on, the intuitive parking assist screen appears for 2 seconds and then the multi−information display returns to the previous screen. G13042 G13043 When you push the main switch of the dynamic radar cruise control, the dynamic radar cruise control screen appears. When you push the “DISP” switch with the radar cruise control screen on the display, the screen changes to cruise information display.  Hood Open Warning G13008 86 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS  Trunk Open Warning G13007 When any door, hood or trunk is open with the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode, a message appears to let you know which door, the hood or trunk is open. If you continue driving in this condition, the master warning light flashes and a warning tone sounds when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 km/h (3 mph). If any of the above warning messages appears, stop your vehicle and close the door, hood or trunk securely.  Moon Roof Warning G13013 If the driver’s door is opened with the engine switch turned off and the moon roof opened, the master warning light flashes, a warning tone sounds and the above message appears.  Parking Brake Release Warning G13009 If you start driving with the parking brake applied, the master warning light flashes, a warning tone sounds and the above message appears when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 km/h (3 mph). If the above warning message appears, stop your vehicle and release the parking brake.  Headlight Leveling System Failure Warning G13010 If there is a problem in the automatic headlight leveling system, the master warning light comes on, a warning tone sounds and the above message appears. If the above warning message appears, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. When you leave your vehicle, be sure to close the moon roof. 87 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS  Rear Lights System Failure Warning G13011 If there is a problem in the rear lights system (tail lights, license plate light, stop lights, rear side marker light, high mounted stoplight), the master warning light comes on, a warning tone sounds and the above message appears. If the above warning message appears, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.  Low Washer Fluid Warning  Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning G13012 When the engine oil pressure becomes too low, the master warning light flashes, a warning tone sounds and the above message appears. If this message appears while you are driving, pull off the road to a safe place and stop the engine immediately. Call a Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance. The message may appear when the oil level is extremely low. It is not designed to indicate low oil level, and the oil level must be checked using the oil level dipstick. G13020 NOTICE When the fluid level in the tank becomes very low, the master warning light flashes, a warning tone sounds and the above message appears. Fill the tank as soon as possible. 88 Do not drive the vehicle while this warning message is displayed − even for one block. It may ruin the engine. GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS  Low Engine Oil Level Warning  Engine Oil Maintenance Reset Warning (U.S.A. only) G13022 G13033 When the engine oil level is too low, the master warning light comes on, a warning tone sounds, and the above message appears. Add oil as soon as possible. (For instructions, see “Checking the engine oil level” on page 530.) While driving on steep inclines or rough roads which causes the vehicle to substantially sway or on curves, this message may appear due to the movement of engine oil in the engine. In normal conditions, due to engine oil consumption, this message may appear earlier than the specified service interval of the scheduled maintenance. This is because the engine oil is consumed to the low level within the scheduled maintenance interval and does not indicate a problem. (For detailed information, see “Facts about engine oil consumption” on page 528.) NOTICE This message indicates that the engine oil maintenance data has been reset. After replacing the engine oil, be sure to reset the maintenance data. To reset the data, perform the following operations: 1. Push the “ODO TRIP” switch in the switch box to change the display to blank. 2. Turn the engine switch off. 3. Turn the engine switch on with the trip meter “RESET” switch held down. 4. Keep pushing the “RESET” switch for longer than 7 seconds after the engine switch is turned on. After the above operation, the master warning light comes on, a warning tone sounds and the above message appears to inform you that the engine oil maintenance data has been reset. Continued engine operation with low engine oil will damage the engine. 89 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS  Engine Oil Replacement Reminder (U.S.A. only) G13035 G13034 If the driving range exceeds 4,500 miles after the engine oil maintenance data is reset, the master warning light comes on, a warning tone sounds and the above message appears for about 15 seconds when you select the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode. 90  Engine Oil Replacement Warning (U.S.A. only) If the driving range exceeds 5,000 miles after the engine oil maintenance data is reset, the master warning light comes on, a warning tone sounds and the above message appears. This message indicates that the engine oil should be replaced soon. If the message appears, it is recommended to inspect the engine oil with the engine switch off. For details about inspection, see “Checking the engine oil level” on page 530. This message indicates that the engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible. If the message appears, it is recommended to inspect the engine oil with the engine switch off. For details about inspection, see “Checking the engine oil level” on page 530. If the engine oil level is low, engine oil should be replaced. Have it replaced at your Lexus dealer. If the engine oil level is low, engine oil should be replaced. Have it replaced at your Lexus dealer. After the engine oil replacement, reset the engine oil maintenance data and make sure the “OIL MAINT RESET” appears on the display. After the engine oil replacement, reset the engine oil maintenance data and make sure the “OIL MAINT RESET” appears on the display. NOTICE NOTICE The warning message on the display is based on the driving range after the engine oil maintenance data reset. This is not based on the monitoring of dirty condition of the engine oil. The warning message on the display is based on the driving range after the engine oil maintenance data reset. This is not based on the monitoring of dirty condition of the engine oil. GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS  Electronic Brake System Failure Warning G13100  Variable Gear Ratio Steering System Warning (GS430 only) G13028 G13027 GS430 GS300 If the above message appears and the brake system warning light (yellow) comes on, the following systems do not operate. (GS430 only—In some cases, the multi−information display shows either “CHECK VSC” or “CHECK ECB*” only.)  Traction control system  Vehicle stability control system  Hill−start assist control system If the above message appears and the brake system warning light (yellow) and “ABS” warning light come on, the following systems do not operate. (GS430 only—In some cases, the multi−information display shows either “CHECK VSC” or “CHECK ECB*” only.)  Anti−lock brake system  Brake assist system Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. If there is a problem in the variable gear ratio steering system, the master warning light comes on and the above message appears. If this message appears, the system does not work. Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.  Four−Wheel Drive System Warning (Four−wheel drive models only) G13021 If there is a problem in the four−wheel drive system, the master warning light comes on, a warning tone sounds and the above message appears. If the above warning message appears, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. *: Electronically Controlled Brake System 91 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS  Tire Pressure Warning G13026 G13025 When the low tire inflation pressure is detected while driving, the tire pressure warning light and master warning light come on, and the above message appears. Adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning message. If the message remains on, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. G13024 This message indicates the tire pressure warning system is initialized. After replacing the tires or wheels, adjust all 4 tires to specified tire inflation pressure and initialize the tire pressure warning system. To initialize the system, start the engine and push the tire pressure warning reset switch for longer than 3 seconds with the vehicle stopped. The above message appears. 92 If there is a problem in the tire pressure warning system, the tire pressure warning light blinks and master warning light comes on, and the above message appears. The tire pressure warning light system is not working properly. In this case, it is probable that a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is malfunctioning or the system is experiencing signal interference. In the case of signal interference, the warning message will turn off when the interference ends. If the tire pressure warning light blinks and master warning light comes on, and the above message appears frequently, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS  Electronic Key System Warning G13015 G13014 In the following cases, the master warning light flashes, a warning tone sounds and the above message appears.  An electronic key is not detected in the vehicle when you push the engine switch. In this case, the above message appears for 8 seconds.  An electronic key is not detected in the vehicle because someone has taken an electronic key outside of the vehicle without turning the engine switch off. At this time, the electronic key sounds an alarm. The above message turns off if you turn the engine switch off or the entry function detects an electronic key in the vehicle. In addition to either of the above conditions, if you get out from the vehicle, having an electronic key when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode and the selector lever is in a position other than “P”, “SHIFT TO P RANGE” and “KEY IS NOT DETECTED” appear alternately. If you get out from the vehicle, having an electronic key when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode and the selector lever is in a position other than “P”, the master warning light flashes, a beep sounds inside the vehicle and the above message appears. When you shift the selector lever to the “P” position or start driving, the beeping stops sounding, the above message turns off. In addition to the above condition, if the entry function does not detect an electronic key in the vehicle, “SHIFT TO P RANGE” and “KEY IS NOT DETECTED” appear alternately. G13016 If the entry function determines that the battery voltage is low (2V to 3V) when the engine switch is turned off more than 20 minutes after turned on, the master warning light flashes, a warning tone sounds and the above message appears. If the above message appears, the battery needs to be replaced. Although you can replace the battery referring to “Replacing the battery ” on page 34, we recommend you have it replaced by your Lexus dealer as it is easy to be scratched. 93 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS  Intuitive Parking Assist Warning G13017 If the steering lock is malfunctioning, the master warning light comes on, the engine switch indicator light blinks amber and the above message appears. The engine will not start in this case. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. G13018 If the steering lock is not unlocked due to the load applied to the steering wheel when pushing the engine switch, the master warning light comes on, the engine switch indicator light blinks green and the above message appears. The engine will not start in this case. To start the engine, push the engine switch again while turning the steering wheel in either direction. G13077 If icicles, snowflakes or mud gets on the ultrasonic sensors of the intuitive parking assist when it is on, the above message appears and the vehicle symbol and indicator bars continue flashing until the suspected sensor is cleaned. Remove the foreign matter or deice the sensor, the intuitive parking assist returns to normal. G13076 If the ultrasonic sensor of the intuitive parking assist is malfunctioning or a sensor cable is broken when it is on, the malfunctioning sensor flashes, 2 beeps sound 5 times and the above message appears. The flashing sensor is disabled, but other sensors work properly. Have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. 94 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS  Radar Cruise Control Warning G13074 G13073 If the system cannot easily measure the vehicle−to−vehicle distance because of a dirty millimeter wave radar sensor or grille cover while the dynamic radar cruise control is on, the master warning light comes on and the “CRUISE” indicator light flashes. At this time a warning tone sounds and the above message appears. If this message appears, clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth and try setting the preset speed again. If the dirt is removed without cleaning, the system will automatically enter the “RADAR READY” mode. If the system does not enter the “RADAR READY” mode even after cleaning or the message remains on the display, the system might be malfunctioning. Although it is no problem to continue driving, contact your Lexus dealer. If the system cannot easily measure the vehicle−to−vehicle distance because of the following conditions while the dynamic radar cruise control is on, the master warning light comes on, the “CRUISE” indicator light flashes. At this time a warning tone sounds and the above message appears.  The driving pattern selector switch is set to the snow position mode.  It is determined that it is difficult to make a measurement because of bad weather (such as extremely hot weather)  The wipers are operated at high speed with the wiper lever in the “AUTO” position In the following cases, the dynamic radar cruise control switches to the “RADAR READY” mode:  The driving pattern selector switch is changed to the normal or power position.  The wipers are stopped or are switched to low speed or intermittent operation. (Including intermittent and stopped wipers in the “AUTO” position) 95 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS In the above conditions, press the control lever upward in the “+ RES” direction and release it. The dynamic radar cruise control will be restored, however, even after the weather clears, if the setting operation cannot be performed or if the warning message still appears, the system might have malfunctioned. Although it is no problem to continue driving, contact your Lexus dealer. G13075 If the system malfunction is detected when dynamic radar cruise control is in the “RADAR READY” mode or operating, the master warning light comes on and the “CRUISE” indicator light flashes. At this time a warning tone sounds and the above message appears. If this message appears, stop your vehicle in a safe place, turn the engine switch off, and then restart it to reset the system. If the setting still cannot be made or the same message appears again, the system might have malfunctioned. Although it is no problem to continue driving, contact your Lexus dealer. NOTICE While you are cruising with the dynamic radar cruise control on, if the master warning light comes on, the “CRUISE” indicator light flashes, “CHECK CRUISE SYSTEM” appears on the multi−information display and the warning tone sounds, turn the engine switch off and then on again. If the function is cancelled again after setting or if settings cannot be made, the dynamic radar cruise control system may be malfunctioning. Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. 96 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS  Pre−Collision System Warning The above conditions do not indicate a malfunction. If the problem is removed, the warning lights and message go out and the system returns to normal. G13031 If the pre−collision system is malfunctioning, the pre−collision system warning light and master warning light comes on, a warning tone sounds and the above message appears. If the above message appears, the pre−collision system may not operate. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. G13030 In the following conditions, the pre−collision system warning light blinks, the master warning light comes on, a warning tone sounds, and the above message appears.  The millimeter wave radar sensor or the grille cover is dirty. Clean the grille or sensor with a soft cloth to remove the dirt.  The pre−collision seat belts are activated repeatedly for a short time. The system turns off temporarily for overheating protection. 97 GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT CONTROL The brightness of the instrument panel lights is automatically adjusted at the maximum when the engine switch is turned on. Using the light control switch, you can also adjust the brightness as you like. Perform the following operation. Instrument panel light control switches are located in the switch box. However, if the brightness is automatically adjusted at the maximum, pushing the switch cannot change the brightness. And this switch cannot adjust the brightness of the outside temperature display and clock on the instrument panel as well as the touch screen. Pushing the “MAX” switch will turn the brightness of all indicators on the instrument panel at the maximum. The intensity of the instrument panel lights will not be reduced when the headlight switch is on with the brightness adjusted at the maximum using the “MAX” switch. When the light control switch is turned to minimum, the foot lights and inside door handle lights will turn off. After operation, be sure to close the switch box to its original position. G13005 CAUTION To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when not in use while driving. Light control switch Push the button to use the switch box. And push the light control switch upward to increase brightness and downward to decrease it. 98 SECTION 1–4 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Interior equipment Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cigarette lighter and ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coin boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overhead console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk storage extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear electric sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tie−down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First−aid kit holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 100 101 102 106 106 109 110 111 112 113 114 118 119 120 121 122 122 123 125 125 99 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT SUN VISORS INTERIOR LIGHTS Front G14002 G14003 To block out glare, move the sun visor as shown. 1 2 To block out glare from the front , swing the sun visor down. Rear To block out glare from the side, remove the sun visor from the hook and swing it to the side. At this position, the vanity light may not come on. 3 To block out glare coming obliquely from behind you, slide the visor backwards. At this position, the vanity light does not come on. 100 G14052 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT To turn on or off the front and rear lights, push the interior light switches. “ON” switch—Keeps the lights on all the time. PERSONAL LIGHTS Front “OFF” switch—Turns the lights off. “DOOR” switch—If you get close to the vehicle (about 1 m (3 ft.) from each outside door handle, carrying an electronic key or open a door, all the interior lights come on when the engine switch is off. However, if the engine switch is already on, only the interior light near the door you opened comes on. G14004 The light(s) will go off when all the doors are closed. For details, see “Illuminated entry system” on page 102. Rear G14005 To turn on the personal light, push the switch. To turn it off, push the switch again. 101 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT For some models: When you open a door with the interior lights in “DOOR” position, the personal light near the door you opened will come on. You can change this setting. For details, see the following “Illuminated entry system”. 102 ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM INTERIOR EQUIPMENT  1 Outer foot lights 2 Steering spot light 3 Front interior lights (in “DOOR” position) 4 Selector lever spot light 5 Front personal lights 6 Inside door handle lights 7 Rear personal lights 8 Rear interior lights 9 Door courtesy lights 10 Foot lights 11 Front scuff lights The outer foot lights, steering spot light and front and rear interior lights will come on when you get close to the vehicle (about 1 m (3 ft.) from the outside door handle), carrying an electronic key, or open the door.* After all the doors are closed, the lights remain on for about 15 seconds and then fade out.** (For details, see “Outer foot lights” on page 212.) NOTE: *When you open a door other than the driver’s door, the front and rear interior lights near the door you opened comes on. **The duration of lighting can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. The foot lights and inside door handle lights will come on when any of the doors are opened or the engine switch is in “IG−ON” mode. After all the doors are closed and the engine switch is turned off, the lights remain on for about 15 seconds and then fade out.* NOTE: *The duration of lighting can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. However, the lights go out immediately when all the doors are locked and the engine switch is turned off. The intensity of the foot lights and inside door handle lights can be changed with the instrument panel light control switch. The lights will be turned off when the light control switch is turned to minimum. (For details, see “Instrument panel light control” on page 98.) Front scuff lights and courtesy lights Front scuff lights and courtesy lights will come on when any of the doors are opened. After all the doors are closed, the lights will turn off. However, in the following cases, the lights go out immediately:  All the doors are closed and the engine switch is selected in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode.  All the doors are locked. 103 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT Selector lever spot light The selector lever spot light will come on when the engine switch is selected in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode and the tail lights are on. (For some models: The selector lever spot light will come on when the engine switch is selected in “ACC” or ”IG−ON” mode.) When the selector lever is moved out of “P” position, the intensity of the light will be reduced. The intensity of the selector lever spot light can be changed with the instrument panel light control switch. This light will be turned off when the light control switch is turned to minimum. Front and rear personal lights (for some models) When you open a door, the personal light near the door you opened will come on. This setting can be changed. To change the setting, change the engine switch from “OFF” to “IG−ON” mode while pushing the front interior light switches “DOOR” and “ON” together. Each time you perform this operation, the setting changes from mode i to mode ii, iii and then back to i. Mode i: When you open a door, the personal light near the door you opened alone will come on. When you set this mode, the front personal lights flash once. Mode ii: When you open a door, all the personal lights will come on. When you set this mode, the front personal lights flash twice. Mode iii: Opening a door will not turn on the personal lights. When you set this mode, the front personal lights flash three times. 104 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT Lighting table The lighting conditions are as follows: If several conditions concur, the lights may not operate as shown. Inside door handle lights & foot lights* Front scuff lights, door courtesy lights* & front and rear personal lights Selector lever spot light* ON** →Fade out about 15 seconds later — — — Locking all the doors OFF OFF — — Opening the door(s) ON ON ON — Closing all the doors OFF (ON for about 15 seconds before turned off) OFF (ON for about 15 seconds before turned off) OFF — OFF ON (IG−ON only) — ON*** (When the tail lights are on) ON** →Fade out about 15 seconds later OFF (ON for about 15 seconds before turned off) — OFF Lighting condition Getting close to the vehicle with the electronic key in possession or unlocking any doors Turning the engine switch from “OFF” to “ACC” or “IG−ON” Turning off the engine switch Steering spot light & front and rear interior lights NOTE: *The lights can be set to dim when the selector lever is moved out of “P” and the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. **The front and rear interior lights can be set not to be turned on. ***The selector lever spot light on some models will come on even with the tail lights off. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. 105 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT G14035a To turn on the luggage compartment light, open the trunk lid or push the switch. Closing the trunk lid will turn the light off. CLOCK G14007 The digital clock indicates the time with the engine switch in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode. Vehicles with navigation system: The clock can be corrected manually or automatically using signals from the GPS. For details, see the separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. Vehicles without navigation system: To adjust the clock or set the daylight saving time, follow the procedures below. 106 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT G14054 1. Push the “INFO” button to display the setting screen. G14055a 2. Touch the “Adjust Clock” switch to display the adjust clock screen. When the headlight switch is turned to the first or second click stop, the brightness of the display will be reduced. You can brighten the display. To adjust the brightness, see “Instrument panel light control” on page 98. 107 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT (a) To adjust a clock G14056 You can adjust the clock manually with “H”, “M” and “:00” switches. “H”: To set the hour. “M”: To set the minute. “:00”: To adjust the time to the nearest hour. For example, if the “:00” switch is pressed when the time is between 9:30 − 9:59 or between 10:01 − 10:29, the time will change to 10:00. If the electrical power source has been disconnected from the clock, the time display will automatically be set to 1:00. After adjustment, touch “OK”. 108 (b) To set the daylight saving time G14057 You can set or cancel the daylight saving time. “ON”: To set the daylight saving time. “OFF”: To cancel the daylight saving time. After setting, touch “OK”. INTERIOR EQUIPMENT OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY G14037 G14036 Multi−information display On the instrument panel This display shows the outside temperature when the engine switch is on. The displayed temperature ranges from – 40C (– 40F) up to 50C (122F). If the temperature does not appear on the display or it shows “− − −”, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. When the headlight switch is turned to the first or second click stop, the brightness of the display will be reduced. You can brighten the display. To adjust the brightness, see “Instrument panel light control” on page 98. When you push the “DISP” switch with the engine switch on, another outside temperature display appears on the multi−information display. The displayed temperature ranges from – 40C (– 40F) up to 50C (122F). If the temperature does not appear on the display or it shows “E” or “− −”, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. When the headlight switch is turned to the first or second click stop, the brightness of the display will be reduced. You can adjust the brightness of the display. To adjust the brightness, see “Instrument panel light control” on page 98. 109 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAY G14008 Front cigarette lighter and ashtray To use the cigarette lighter and ashtray, slide the ashtray cover forward. Then when the ashtray opens out, press in the cigarette lighter. After it finishes heating up, it automatically pops out ready for use. Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in. If the engine is not running, “ACC” mode must be selected. When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire. After using the ashtray, close it by pushing the lid forward. To remove the ashtray, slide the lever attached beside the ashtray, to the right, and the ashtray will be lifted. Use a Lexus genuine cigarette lighter or equivalent for replacement. 110 NOTICE If you spill a drink in the ashtray, take it out and wipe off the spilt drink thoroughly, or the ashtray may not activate properly. INTERIOR EQUIPMENT POWER OUTLET G14009a G14010 Rear ashtray To use the ashtray, open the cover. When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire. After using the ashtray, close the lid completely. The power outlet is designed for power supply for car accessories. The power outlet is located in the rear console box. To remove the ashtray, press down on the lock spring plate and pull it out. The power outlet works when “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode is selected. CAUTION NOTICE To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop while driving, always close the ashtray cover completely after use.  To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the electricity over the total vehicle capacity of 12V/120W.  To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 111 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT  Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug that fits the outlet, or allowing any liquid to get into the outlet may cause electrical failure or short circuits. REAR CONSOLE BOX G14028 To open the rear console box, pull the lever upward and slide the console box lid rearward as shown in the illustration. The sliding lid comes once to a stop when the switches appear. To open the box fully, pull the lever and slide the box lid again from this position. The rear console box light comes on when the tail lights are turned on. 112 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT GLOVE BOX CAUTION  To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the rear console box closed while driving.  Do not apply excessive load over the tray with your hand, or closing the console box lid may injure your fingers. G14012  Do not open the rear console box while operating the rear vents, or closing the console box lid may injure your fingers.  1 Unlock 2 Open 3 Lock To open the glove box door, push the button. To lock the glove box door, insert the mechanical key and turn it clockwise. With the tail lights on, the glove box light will come on. CAUTION To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed while driving. 113 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT GARAGE DOOR OPENER  The garage door opener ( Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink and can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems, etc. For Canadian users, follow the procedure in “Programming an entrance gate/Programming all devices in the Canadian market”. 1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink  buttons you want to program. (a) Programming the HomeLink G14058a G14013 2 Hand−held garage transmitter  1 HomeLink 3 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)  1 Indicator light 2 Buttons The HomeLink in your vehicle has 3 buttons and you can store one program for each button. To ensure correct programming into the HomeLink, install a new battery in the hand−held transmitter prior to programming. The battery side of the hand−held transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink during the programming process. 114 2. Place your hand−held garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink. Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink  in view while programming. INTERIOR EQUIPMENT G14059 3. Simultaneously press and hold the hand−held garage transmitter button along with the selected HomeLink button. Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. 4. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons. G14060 5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. If programming a garage door opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes. If the garage door does not operate, identify if your garage transmitter is of the “Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLink) flashes rapidly and then remains lit after 2 seconds. If your garage transmitter is the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the heading “Programming a rolling code system”. 6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLink button to program another device. 115 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT Programming a rolling code system If your device is “Rolling Code” equipped, it is necessary to follow steps 1 through 4 under the heading “Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with the steps listed below. 1. Locate the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener. Refer to the owner’s guide supplied by the garage door opener manufacturer for the location of this “training” button. 2. Press the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 below. INFORMATION If you register a program in the HomeLink using a “Rolling Code” type transmitter, the transmitter must be reprogrammed to use it again. Programming an entrance gate / Programming all devices in the Canadian market 1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink buttons you want to program. 2. Place your hand−held gate/device transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink. Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink  in view while programming. 3. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink button twice. The garage door may open. If the door does open, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door. 4. Continuously press and release (cycle) the hand−held gate/device transmitter button every two seconds until step 5 is complete. The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink unit and be able to activate the garage door up/down. 5. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons. 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each remaining HomeLink button to program another rolling code system. 3. Press and hold the selected HomeLink button. 6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly. 7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remaining HomeLink button to program another device. 116 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT Programming other devices To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance. Reprogramming a button HomeLink Individual buttons cannot be erased, however, to reprogram a single button, follow the procedure “Programming the HomeLink”. INFORMATION The transmitting range from the HomeLink may differ from that from your hand−held garage transmitter. (c) Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all three programs) INFORMATION Keep your hand−held garage transmitter even after programming. The hand−held garage transmitter will be required if reprogramming is necessary. G14061 (b) Operating the HomeLink To operate the HomeLink, press the appropriate HomeLink button to activate the programmed device. The HomeLink indicator light should come on. If the “Rolling Code” type program is registered, the HomeLink indicator light flashes several times, then remains on. The HomeLink continues to send the signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed. To erase all previously programmed codes at one time, press and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicator light flashes. If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink memory. 117 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT CUPHOLDERS CAUTION  When programming the HomeLink Universal Transceiver, you may be operating a garage door or other device. Make sure people and objects are out of the way of the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage.  Do not use this HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards. (This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object (signaling the door to stop and reverse), does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases risk of serious injury or death. G14014 Front To use the cupholder, push the cupholder lid. CAUTION This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS−210 of the IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. 118  Do not place anything else other than cups or drink−cans in the cupholder, as such items may be thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.  To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop while driving, keep the cupholder closed when not in use. INTERIOR EQUIPMENT COIN BOXES G14015 G14016 Rear To use the cupholder, push the cup holder portion of the center armrest in the rear seat. The cup holder is designed for holding cups or drink−cans securely. On the instrument panel To use the coin box, push the button. CAUTION CAUTION Keep the coin box closed when not in use.  Do not place anything else other than cups or drink−cans in the cupholder, as such items may be thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.  To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop while driving, keep the cupholder closed when not in use. 119 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT OVERHEAD CONSOLE BOX G14034 G14020a Under the lid of the rear console box To use the coin box, slide the rear console box as shown. To use the overhead console box, push the lid as shown. CAUTION  To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the overhead console box closed while driving.  Do not place any object heavier than 100 g (0.22 lb.) in it. Heavier objects may cause the box to open and the contents to fly out resulting in injuries. 120 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT NOTICE DOOR POCKETS During hot weather, the interior of the vehicle becomes very hot. Do not leave anything flammable or deformable such as a lighter, glasses, etc. inside. G14030 To use the door pocket, open it as shown. CAUTION To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, always keep the door pockets closed while driving. 121 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT TRUNK STORAGE EXTENSION G14021  1 Lock 2 Unlock 3 Open Pull down the center armrest in the rear seat. Push down the handle and open the armrest door. Access to the trunk can be prevented by locking the armrest door with the mechanical key. See “Stowage precautions” on page 463 for precautions when loading luggage. CAUTION Be sure to close the door when the trunk storage extension is not in use. Luggage or cargo in the trunk may be thrown into the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or crash resulting in injury. 122 FLOOR MAT G14025 Use a floor mat of the correct size. If the vehicle carpet and floor mat have 2 holes, then they are designed for use with locking clips. Attach the floor mat to the vehicle carpet using the clips. Lock the clips into the holes in the vehicle carpet. INTERIOR EQUIPMENT REAR ELECTRIC SUNSHADE The rear electric sunshade switch is located in the switch box. G14026 G14024 CAUTION Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet. If the floor mat slips and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an accident. Push the button to use the switch box and then push the rear electric sunshade switch. The rear electric sunshade will be raised. To lower the shade, push the switch again. The sunshade works when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. After operation, be sure to close the switch box to its original position. When the selector lever is shifted into the “R” position while the sunshade is raised, the sunshade will be automatically lowered. 123 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT To raise the sunshade again, perform any of the following operations:  Shift the selector lever into the “P” position.  Push the switch again.  Move the selector lever out of “R” position and drive your vehicle over 15 km/h (9 mph). Retained accessory power: Even after the engine switch is turned off, the sunshade can be operated for about 60 seconds. CAUTION  To prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged, always operate the shade while the engine is running.  Observe the following to avoid damage and/or malfunction:  Do not overload the shade motor and other parts (for instance by pushing down on the sunshade bracket while it is opening).  Do not place anything where it may hinder the opening/closing of the shade.  Do not affix anything to the shade.  Do not touch the brackets fastening the shade to avoid injuring your fingers or hands.  Clean the shade groove if there is any foreign matter or dust on it.  Do not put your fingers in the shade groove while the shade is operating to avoid getting them caught or injured by the runner.  Do not operate the rear electric sunshade repeatedly for a long time as its motor may overheat.  To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when not in use while driving. 124 NOTICE INTERIOR EQUIPMENT TIE−DOWN HOOKS FIRST−AID KIT HOLDER G14017 To secure your luggage, use the tie−down hooks as shown above. See “Cargo and luggage” on page 463 for precautions when loading luggage. G14018  1 To loosen 2 To tighten This belt is designed to hold the first−aid kit. To loosen: Pull the buckle forward. To tighten: Pull on the belt. CAUTION Make sure the first−aid kit is securely held. To avoid personal injury, keep the tie−down hooks stored under the carpet when not in use. 125 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT 126 SECTION 1–5 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Exterior equipment Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 129 132 136 127 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT HOOD G15002 G15001 2. Insert your fingers under the hood, push up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood. 1. To open the hood, pull the hood lock release lever under the instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly. Before closing the hood, check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc. Then lower the hood and make sure it locks. CAUTION Before driving, be sure that the hood is closed and securely locked. Otherwise, the hood may open unexpectedly while driving and an accident may occur. 128 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT TRUNK LID The trunk lid can be unlocked by any of the following ways: Using a trunk lid opener The trunk lid opener switch is located in the switch box.  Using a trunk lid opener  Using a mechanical key  Using a trunk button (with the entry function)  Wireless remote control G15003 The explanation about how to unlock the trunk lid using a mechanical key and trunk lid opener is made here. For the use of trunk button and wireless remote control, see “Smart access system with push−button start” on page 11 and “Wireless remote control” on page 32. Push the button to use the switch box and then push the trunk lid opener switch for about 1 second. Open the trunk lid. After operation, be sure to close the switch box to its original position. To close the trunk lid, lower it and press down on it. After closing the trunk lid, try pulling it up to make sure it is securely closed. 129 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT CAUTION Trunk lid opener main switch  Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. This not only keeps the luggage from being thrown out, but also prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.  Always lock the trunk lid and all doors, and keep away the vehicle keys out of children’s reach.  Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Un supervised children may lock themselves in the vehicles or trunk and suffer serious injuries or death.  To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when not in use while driving. G15005  1 Main switch 2 Operative 3 Inoperative If you do not want to activate the trunk lid opener system, turn off the main switch in the glove box. To turn it on, push in the main switch. 130 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT Using a mechanical key Trunk lid closer If the trunk lid is closed but does not latch shut, it automatically closes completely. CAUTION G15004  Pay careful attention not to get your fingers trapped as the trunk lid automatically closes when the trunk has not been fully closed.  Never allow a child to operate the trunk lid. To unlock the trunk lid, insert the mechanical key and turn it clockwise. To close the trunk lid, lower it and press down on it. After closing the trunk lid, try pulling it up to make sure it is securely closed. NOTICE Do not apply excessive force when the trunk lid closer is operating. Doing so may damage the trunk lid closer. Also, be careful not to leave the key inside the trunk. CAUTION  Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. This not only keeps the luggage from being thrown out, but also prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.  Always lock the trunk lid and all doors, and keep away the vehicle keys out of children’s reach.  Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Un supervised children may lock themselves in the vehicles or trunk and suffer serious injuries or death. 131 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT Internal trunk release handle G15007 If a person is locked in the trunk, he/she can pull down the phosphorescent handle on the inside of trunk lid to open the trunk lid. The phosphorescent (glow−in−the−dark) handle will continue to glow for a time after the trunk lid is closed. Exposing the handle to stronger light will cause it to glow longer. 132 FUEL TANK CAP 15G014 This indicates that the fuel filler door is on the left side of your vehicle. EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT The fuel filler door opener switch is located in the switch box. CAUTION  Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames when refuelling. The fumes are flammable. G15018  When opening the cap, do not remove the cap quickly. In hot weather, fuel under pressure could cause injury by spraying out of the filler neck if the cap is suddenly removed.  To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when not in use while driving. 1. Push the button to use the switch box and then push the fuel filler door opener switch. After operation, be sure to close the switch box to its original position. When refueling, turn off the engine. 133 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT G15016 2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn the cap slowly counterclockwise by 90 degrees (to the pressure point 1 , then turn it additional 30 degrees (to point 2 ). Pause slightly before removing it. It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh when the cap is opened. G15015 3. The removed cap can be stored on the back side of the fuel filler door. Position the cap so that the hooks point to the left and right, and set it in the receptacle on the back side of the door. When installing the cap, turn the cap clockwise until you hear a click. When you hear the click, the cap is fully closed. If the cap is not installed securely, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Make sure the cap is tightened securely. The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. 134 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT CAUTION In case the opener is not actuated  Make sure the cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.  Use only a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap for replacement. It is designed to regulate fuel tank pressure. G15021 NOTICE To prevent damage to the cap, apply force only in the turning direction to the cap. Do not pull or pry it. Remove the cover and pull up the manual lever in the trunk. This is used in case the fuel filler door cannot be opened due to a discharged battery or other trouble. 135 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT MOON ROOF To close the moon roof, push the “CLOSE” button for about 1 second. The moon roof will fully close. To stop partway, push the “OPEN”, “CLOSE”, “UP” or “DOWN” button briefly. G15010 G15011  1 Open 2 Close To slide open the moon roof, push the “OPEN” button for about 1 second. The moon roof will open and stop partway 40 mm (1.6 in.) from the fully opened position. When you push the switch once again, the moon roof will fully open. To stop partway, push the “OPEN”, “CLOSE”, “UP” or “DOWN” button briefly. As driving with the moon roof opened fully will cause wind throbs, we recommend you to drive with the moon roof partway 40 mm (1.6 in.) from the fully opened position. The sun shade can be opened or closed manually. However, if you open the moon roof, the sun shade will be opened with the moon roof. 136  1 Tilt up 2 Lower To tilt up the moon roof, push the “UP” button for about 1 second. The moon roof will fully tilt up. To stop partway, push the “UP”, “DOWN”, “OPEN” or “CLOSE” button briefly. To lower the moon roof, push the “DOWN” button for about 1 second. The moon roof will be fully lowered. To stop partway, push the “UP”, “DOWN”, “OPEN” or “CLOSE” button briefly. To operate the moon roof, the engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode. EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT If the moon roof is left open when you turn the engine switch to “OFF” mode and open the driver’s door, a buzzer will remind you to close the moon roof. Retained accessory power operation: Even if the engine switch is off, the moon roof can be operated until any of the doors is opened (or for about 45 seconds). Operating the moon roof from outside the vehicle The moon roof can be closed or opened using a mechanical key.* NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated, or sliding open or tilting up can be selected. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. G15020 Insert the mechanical key into the key hole on the driver’s door. To close the moon roof: Turn the key in the locking direction and hold it. After the door is locked, the moon roof begins to close. To stop in the middle, return the key. 137 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT To open the moon roof: Turn the key in the unlocking direction and hold it. CAUTION After the door is unlocked, the moon roof begins to open. To stop in the middle, return the key. To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the following. Jam protection function If something gets caught into the roof opening during closing operation, the moon roof stops and is open. If the moon roof receives a strong impact, this function may work even if nothing is caught. If the battery is disconnected or run down The moon roof may not operate automatically and the jam protection function will not function correctly after you reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. In any of these cases, you should normalize the moon roof. To normalize the moon roof, push and hold the “UP” button until the moon roof tilts all the way up and then down a little automatically. Make sure the moon roof opens and closes automatically. If the moon roof cannot be operated properly, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.  While the vehicle is moving, always keep the heads, hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants away from the roof opening. Otherwise, they could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or if the vehicle is involved in an accident.  Before you close the moon roof, always make sure there is nobody around the moon roof. You must also make sure nobody places his or her head, hands and other parts of the body in the roof opening. If someone’s neck, head or hands get caught in the closing roof, it could result in death or serious injury. When anyone closes the moon roof, first make sure it is safe to do so.  Be sure to turn the engine switch to “OFF” mode when you leave your vehicle.  Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone in your vehicle, especially when the engine switch is on. Otherwise, he/she could use the moon roof switches and get trapped in the roof opening. Unattended persons (particularly a small child) can be involved in a serious accident.  Never sit on top of the vehicle around the roof opening. 138 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT  Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally, as it could result in a serious injury.  The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closed. 139 EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT 140 SECTION 1–6 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Occupant restraint systems Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front passenger seat position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 142 147 148 148 151 162 172 182 202 204 141 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS SEATS While the vehicle is being driven, all vehicle occupants should have the seatback upright, sit well back in the seat and properly wear the seat belts provided. FRONT SEATS Front seat precautions Driver seat CAUTION CAUTION  Do not drive the vehicle unless the occupants are properly seated. Do not allow any passengers to sit in the luggage compartment or cargo area. Persons not properly seated and/or not properly restrained by seat belts can be severely injured in the event of emergency braking or a collision. The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (”NHTSA”) advises:  During driving, do not allow any passengers to stand up or move around between seats. Otherwise, severe injuries can occur in the event of emergency braking or a collision. Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 50−75 mm (2−3 in.) of inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 250 mm (10 in.) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:  Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.  Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 250 mm (10 in.) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non−slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature. 142 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS  If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck. The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls. Front seats CAUTION The SRS front side airbags are installed in the driver and front passenger seats. Observe the following precautions.  Do not lean against the front door when the vehicle is in use, since the front side airbag inflates with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may be killed or severely injured. Front passenger seat CAUTION The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.  Do not use seat accessories which cover the area where the front side airbags inflate. Such accessories may prevent the front side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or serious injury.  Do not modify or replace the front seats or upholstery of the seats with front side airbags. Such change may prevent the side airbag system from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the front side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury. 143 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Seat adjustment precautions Adjusting front seats CAUTION  Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.  Be careful that the seat does not hit a passenger, luggage or the rear seat. NOTICE Do not operate the control switch in more than one dimension at a time. It may cause electrical overload. G16001  1 Seat position, seat cushion angle and height control switch 2 Seatback angle control switch 3 Lumbar support control switch 144 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Adjusting seat position G16072 G16002 For passenger’s seat For driver’s seat Move the control switch in the desired direction. Releasing the switch will stop the seat and head restraint in that position. Do not place anything under the seat, as this might interfere with the seat movement. Move the control switch in the desired direction. Releasing the switch will stop the seat in that position. Do not place anything under the seat as this might interfere with the seat movement. You can adjust the head restraint in the desired position. To adjust the head restraint, see “Head restraints” on page 148. 145 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Adjusting seatback angle g16003 G16004 Move the control switch in the desired direction. Move the control switch in the desired direction. Releasing the switch will stop the seatback in that position. Releasing the switch will stop the seat cushion in that position. CAUTION Avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the front passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death or personal injury . 146 Adjusting seat cushion angle and height OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Adjusting lumbar support REAR SEATS Rear seat precautions Rear seats (with SRS rear side airbags) G16005 CAUTION The SRS rear side airbags are installed in the outboard rear seats. Observe the following precautions. Push the control switch on either side. The amount of lumbar support will change while the switch is pushed.  Do not lean against the rear door when the vehicle is in use, since the rear side airbag inflates with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may be killed or severely injured.  Do not use seat accessories which cover the area where the rear side airbags inflate. Such accessories may prevent the rear side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or serious injury.  Do not modify or replace the outboard rear seats or the upholstery of the seats with rear side airbags. Such change may prevent the side airbag system from activating correctly, disable the system, or cause the rear side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury. 147 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ARMREST HEAD RESTRAINTS For your safety and comfort, adjust the head restraint before driving. Front seats G16125 G16002 To use the armrest, pull it down as shown above. NOTICE To prevent damage to the armrest, avoid putting heavy loads on it. Driver’s seat The height of the driver’s head restraint is automatically adjusted along with the seat position movement when the seat position control switch is used. When the seat is adjusted to the foremost (or rearmost) position, the head restraint is adjusted to the lowest (or highest) position. The height of the head restraint can be adjusted manually. 148 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS G16250 G16130 To adjust the height of the head restraint manually, adjust it while pushing the button located on the shoulder. To move the head restraint forward or rearward, move the head restraint as shown. After adjusting the head restraint manually, even if you adjust the seat to the foremost (or rearmost) position using seat position control, the head restraint may not be adjusted to the lowest (or highest) position. And if the head restraint reaches the highest (or lowest) position while the seat is being adjusted backward (or forward), the head restraint will be fixed in that position. The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not recommended. CAUTION Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is closest to the top of your ears. 149 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Rear seats G16006 G16007 Front passenger seat To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the lock release button and push the head restraint down. To move the head restraint forward or rearward, move the head restraint as shown. The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not recommended. CAUTION  Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is closest to the top of your ears.  After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is locked in position.  Do not drive with the head restraints removed. 150 Outboard rear seats To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the lock release button and push the head restraint down. To move the head restraint forward or rearward, pull or push on the top. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS SEAT BELTS Seat belt precautions G16008 Lexus strongly urges that the driver and passengers in the vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts provided. Failure to do so could increase the chance of injury and/or the severity of injury in accidents. The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for people of adult size, large enough to properly wear them. Center rear seat To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the lock release button and push the head restraint down. Center rear head restraint: When an occupant sits on the center rear seat, always pull up the head restraint to the lock position. The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not recommended. CAUTION  Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is closest to the top of your ears.  After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is locked in position. Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belts. See ”Child restraint” on page 182 for details. If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If a child must sit in the front seat, the seat belts should be worn properly. If an accident occurs and the seat belts are not worn properly, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag may cause death or serious injury to the child. Do not allow any children to stand up or kneel on either rear or front seats. An unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or death during emergency braking or a collision. Also, do not let the child sit on your lap. Holding a child in your arms does not provide sufficient restraint.  Do not drive with the head restraints removed. 151 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Pregnant woman. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips and not on the waist. Injured person. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt. Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific recommendations. CAUTION Persons should ride in their seats properly wearing their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious bodily injury or death in the event of sudden braking or a collision. When using the seat belts, observe the following:  Use the belt for only one person at a time. Do not use a single belt for two or more people − even children.  Avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the front passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death or personal injury. 152  Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or hardware. Take care that they do not get caught or pinched in the seat or doors.  Inspect the belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Damaged parts should be replaced. Do not disassemble or modify the system.  Keep the belts clean and dry. If they need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners, or allow them to come into contact with the belts − they may severely weaken the belts. (See “Cleaning the interior” on page 604 for instructions.)  Replace the belt assembly (including bolts) if it has been used in a severe impact. The entire assembly should be replaced even if damage is not obvious. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Fastening front and rear seat belts G16009 When a seat belt is completely extended and is then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system securely. (For details, see ”Child restraint” on page 182.) To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor. CAUTION Adjust the seat as needed and sit up straight and well back in the seat. To fasten your belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the tab into the buckle. You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle. The seat belt length automatically adjusts to your size and the seat position. The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It also may lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend, and you can move around freely.  After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the belt is not twisted.  Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.  If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot protect an adult occupant or your child from injury. 153 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS G16010 Adjust the position of the lap and shoulder belts. 1 Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips − not on your waist. 2 Adjust it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder portion upward through the latch plate. G16011 Front seat belts only Adjust the shoulder anchor position to your size. To raise the anchor position, push the anchor up. To lower the anchor position, support the anchor while you push the lock release button then slide the anchor down. After adjustment, make sure the anchor is locked in position. CAUTION  Both high−positioned lap belts and loose−fitting belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on hips as possible.  Do not place the shoulder belt under your arm. 154 CAUTION Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause serious injuries in a collision. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Seat belt comfort guides G16012 G16013 To release the belt, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract. If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts. The seat belt comfort guides are installed on the outboard rear seats to relieve uncomfortableness from the shoulder belt when it is applied closer to a child’s neck (at the age of 10 or so), by pulling the shoulder belt a little forward. Slide the seat belt comfort guide forward to adjust the shoulder belt. The seat belt comfort guide should not be in the forward position for other purposes. 155 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS CAUTION Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the neck, and should not fall off the shoulder. Failure to observe these precautions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in an accident, causing death or serious injury. Seat belt extender If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge. Please contact your local Lexus dealer so that the dealer can order the proper required length for the extender. Bring the heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper measurement and selection of length. Additional ordering information is available at your Lexus dealer. CAUTION When using the seat belt extender, observe the following precautions. Failure to follow these instructions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt restraint system in case of an accident, increasing the chance of personal injury.  Remember that the extender provided for you may not be safe when used on a different vehicle, for another person, or at a different seating position than the one originally intended. 156 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS  Be sure to wear the seat belt without the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender. G16018  Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision.  If the seat belt extender has been connected to the driver’s seat belt buckle but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the driver’s seat belt, the SRS driver’s airbag system will judge that the driver is wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the driver’s airbag may not activate correctly, causing death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender. Otherwise, there will also not be any effective protection in a sudden stop or a collision provided by the seat belt. 157 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS CAUTION G16014 To connect the extender to the seat belt, insert the tab into the seat belt buckle so that the ”PRESS” signs on the buckle release buttons of the extender and the seat belt are both facing outward as shown. You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle. When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself. When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle for future use. 158  After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt and the seat belt extender are not twisted.  Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent you from properly latching the tab and buckle.  If the seat belt does not function normally, immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot protect an adult occupant or your child from death or serious injury. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Seat belt pretensioners G16016 G16015 Both front seats and the two outboard rear seats are equipped with seat belt pretensioners and are designed to be activated in response to a severe frontal impact. When the sensor detects a severe frontal impact, the seat belts are quickly drawn back by the retractor so that the belts snugly restrain the occupants. The front passenger seat belt pretensioner will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger seat belt pretensioner may activate if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up regardless of the presence of the occupant in the seat.  1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Front airbag sensors Occupant detection sensor Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch Front seat belt pretensioner assembly SRS warning light Rear seat belt pretensioner assembly Airbag sensor assembly The seat belt pretensioner system consists mainly of the above components, and their locations are shown in the illustration. The seat belt pretensioners are controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor. The outboard rear seat belt pretensioners are activated even with no passengers in the outboard rear seats. The seat belt pretensioners and SRS airbags may not operate together in all collisions. 159 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS When the seat belt pretensioners are activated, an operating noise may be heard and a small amount of non−toxic gas may be released. This does not indicate that a fire is occurring. This gas is normally harmless. Once the seat belt pretensioners have been activated, the seat belt retractors remain locked. Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the seat belt pretensioners in some cases. CAUTION  Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile two−way radio, cassette tape player or CD player. Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent the seat belt pretensioners from activating correctly, cause sudden operation of the system or disable the system, which could result in death or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any repair and modification. 160 NOTICE  Repairs on or near the seat belt retractor assemblies.  Modification of the suspension system.  Modification of the front end structure.  Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to the front end.  Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end structure or console. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. 16G017  When the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, the light does not come on or remains on for more than 6 seconds.  The light comes on while driving.  If any seat belt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the relevant seat belt pretensioner. This indicator comes on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the seat belt pretensioners are operating properly.  The seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding area has been damaged. This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, occupant detection sensor, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page 74.) 161 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS SRS DRIVER AIRBAG AND FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG G16019 G16020 In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.  The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the seat belt pretensioners to operate.  The seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding area is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.  1 Driver airbag 2 Front passenger airbag 3 Front passenger knee airbag 4 Driver knee airbag The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags are designed to provide further protection for the driver and front passenger in addition to the primary safety protection provided by the seat belts. In response to a severe frontal impact, the SRS front airbags work with the seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The SRS front airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s head or chest or knees caused by hitting the vehicle interior. 162 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up, regardless of the presence of an occupant in the seat. Always wear your seat belt properly. CAUTION  The SRS front airbag system is designed only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver and front passenger seat belt systems. The driver and front passenger can be killed or seriously injured by the inflating airbags if they do not wear the available seat belts properly. During sudden braking just before a collision, an unrestrained driver or front passenger can move forward into direct contact with or close proximity to the airbag which may then deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum protection in an accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an accident reduces the chances of death or serious injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see ”Seat belts” on page 151.  Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by the deploying airbags. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seat is the safest for infants and children. For instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see ”Child restraint” on page 182 . 163 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS The SRS front airbags are designed to deploy in severe (usually frontal) collisions where the magnitude and duration of the forward deceleration of the vehicle exceeds the designed threshold level. The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision in the U.S.A. and 30 km/h (18 mph) collision in Canada when the vehicle has the impact straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform. However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle ”underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.). It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together. Always wear your seat belts properly. 164 G16021  1 Collision from the side 3 Vehicle rollover 2 Collision from the rear The SRS front airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS G16022  1 Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface. 2 Falling into or jumping over a deep hole 3 Landing hard or vehicle falling The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration. G16023  1 Occupant detection sensor 2 Airbag module for front passenger (airbag and inflator) 3 Knee airbag module for front passenger (airbag and inflator) 4 Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch 5 SRS warning light 6 Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator) 7 Knee airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator) 8 Driver’s seat belt buckle switch 9 Driver’s seat position sensor 10 Airbag sensor assembly 11 Front airbag sensors The SRS front airbag system consists mainly of the above components, and their locations are shown in the illustration. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensors. 165 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS The front airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level, the system triggers the airbag inflators. At this time a chemical reaction in the inflators very quickly fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help restrain the forward motion of the occupants. The front airbags then quickly deflate, so that there is no obstruction of the driver’s vision should it be necessary to continue driving. When the airbags inflate, they produce a loud noise and release some smoke and residue along with non−toxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with soap and water. If you can safely exit from the vehicle, you should do so immediately. 166 Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second, so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant’s hands, arms, chest or head is in close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment. This is why it is important for the occupant to; avoid placing any object or part of the body between the occupant and the airbag module; sit straight and well back into the seat; wear the available seat belt properly; and sit as far as possible from the airbag module, while still maintaining control of the vehicle. Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, lower portion of instrument panel, dashboard and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after deployment, so do not touch! The airbags inflate only once. The windshield may be damaged by absorbing some of the force of the inflating airbag. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS CAUTION The driver or front passenger who is too close to the steering wheel, lower portion of instrument panel or dashboard during airbag deployment can be killed or seriously injured. Lexus strongly recommends that: G16024  The driver sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining control of the vehicle.  The front passenger sit as far back as possible from the dashboard.  All vehicle occupants be properly restrained using the available seat belts.  If the seat belt extender has been connected to the driver’s seat belt buckle but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the driver’s seat belt, the SRS driver’s airbag system will judge that the driver is wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the driver’s airbag may not activate correctly, causing death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender. Otherwise, there will also not be any effective protection in a sudden stop or a collision provided by the seat belt.  Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard when the vehicle is in use, since the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Anyone who is up against, or very close to, an airbag when it inflates, can be killed or seriously injured. Sit up straight and well back in the seat, and always use your seat belt properly. For instructions and precautions concerning the seating position, see “Front seat precautions” on page 142. 167 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS G16025  Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and be properly restrained.  Do not allow a child to stand up or kneel on the front passenger seat, since the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.  Do not hold a child on your lap or in your arms. Use a child restraint system in the rear seat. For instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see ”Child restraint” on page 182. 168 G16026a  Do not put anything or any part of your body on or in front of the dashboard, lower portion of instrument panel, steering wheel pad that houses the front airbag system or in the areas where the SRS knee airbags will inflate. They might restrict inflation or cause death or serious injury as they are projected rearward by the force of the deploying airbags. Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not hold objects in their arms or on their knees.  If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS  Do not attach any objects except Lexus genuine parts in the area where the SRS knee airbag for the front passenger will inflate. When using an ashtray or auxiliary box on the front passenger’s console box, be sure to keep it closed. The attached object, or opened ashtray or auxiliary box might restrict inflation of the airbag or be thrown away by the force of the deploying airbag, causing a danger.  Do not modify or remove any wiring. Do not modify, remove, strike or open any components, such as the steering wheel pad, steering wheel, column cover, dashboard near the front passenger airbag, front passenger airbag cover, knee airbags or airbag sensor assembly. Doing so may prevent the front airbag system from activating correctly, cause sudden activation of the system or disable the system, which could result in death or serious injury. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any repair and modification. NOTICE Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the SRS front airbag system in some cases.  Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile two−way radio, cassette tape player or CD player.  Modification of the suspension system.  Modification of the front end structure.  Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to the front end.  Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end structure, console, steering column, steering wheel, lower portion of instrument panel or dashboard near the front passenger airbag. 169 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. 16G017  When the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, the light does not come on or remains on for more than 6 seconds.  The light comes on while driving. This indicator comes on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the SRS front airbags are operating properly. This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, occupant detection sensor, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page 74.) 170 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS  The pad section of the steering wheel, dashboard or lower portion of instrument panel (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. NOTICE Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Lexus dealer. G16027a In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible:  The SRS front airbags have been inflated.  The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS front airbags to inflate. 171 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS SRS SIDE AIRBAGS AND CURTAIN SHIELD AIRBAGS G16028 In response to a severe side impact, the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags work with the seat belts to help reduce injury by inflating. The SRS front side airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s chest. The SRS curtain shield airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s, front passenger’s or rear outboard passenger’s head. The SRS front side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up, regardless of the presence of an occupant in the seat. The SRS curtain shield airbags may activate even when the side airbags are not activated.  1 Curtain shield airbag 2 Front side airbag 3 Rear side airbag (for some models) The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to provide further protection for the driver, front passenger and rear outboard passengers in addition to the primary safety protection provided by the seat belts. 172 Always wear your seat belt properly. Vehicles equipped with SRS rear side airbags— The SRS rear side airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the rear outboard passenger’s chest. The SRS rear side airbags will activate regardless of the presence of the occupant. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS CAUTION  The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system is designed only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver, front passenger and rear outboard passenger seat belt systems. To ensure maximum protection in an accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an accident reduces the chances of death or serious injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see “Seat belts” on page 151.  Do not allow anyone to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof side rail from which the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag deploy even if he/she is a child seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact of the deploying airbag could cause death or serious injury to the occupant.  Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by the deploying airbags. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children. For instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page 182 . 173 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS G16029  1 Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment 2 Collision from the side at an angle  1 Collision from the front 2 Collision from the rear 3 Vehicle rollover The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment as shown in the illustration. The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a front or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−speed side collision. The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment area suffers a severe impact from the side. Always wear your seat belts properly. 174 G16030 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS G16031  1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Curtain shield airbag modules (airbag and inflator) Front side airbag modules (airbag and inflator) Curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies Side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies Occupant detection sensor Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch SRS warning light Airbag sensor assembly Vehicles with rear side airbag only: Rear side airbag modules (airbag and inflator) In a severe side impact, the side and curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the side airbag inflators and/or the curtain shield airbag inflators. At this time a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help restrain the lateral motion of the occupants. When the airbags inflate, they produce a fairly loud noise and release some smoke and residue along with non−toxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with soap and water. If you can safely exit from the vehicle, you should do so immediately. Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second, so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious injuries, it may also cause minor burns or abrasions and swelling. Front (and outboard rear) seats as well as the parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rail may be hot for several minutes, but the airbags themselves will be hot. The airbags are designed to inflate only once. The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system consists mainly of the above components, and their locations are shown in the illustration. The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor. 175 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS CAUTION SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate with considerable force. To reduce the possibility of death or serious injury when they inflate, the driver, front passenger and rear outboard passengers must: G16137  Wear their seat belts properly.  Remain properly seated with their backs upright and against the seats at all times.  Do not allow anyone to lean against the door when the vehicle is in use, since the side airbag and curtain shield airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child in the vehicle.  Sit up straight and well back in the seat, distributing your weight evenly in the seat. Do not apply excessive weight to the outer side of the seats with a side airbag, and to the front pillar, rear pillar and roof side rail with a curtain shield airbag. 176 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS G16033  Do not allow anyone to get his/her head close to the area where the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, since these airbags could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child in the vehicle. G16034  Do not allow anyone to get his/her head or hands out of windows since the curtain shield airbags could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child in the vehicle.  Do not allow anyone to kneel on the front passenger (and outboard rear )seat, facing the front passenger’s side (and rear outboard passenger’s side) door, since the side airbag and curtain shield airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child in the vehicle. 177 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS G16035a  Do not attach a cupholder or any other device or object on or around the doors. When the side airbag inflate, the cupholder or any other device or object will be thrown with great force, or the side airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury. Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not hold objects in their arms or on their knees. G16036  Do not attach a microphone or any other device or object around the area where the curtain shield airbag activates such as on the windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear pillars, roof side rail and assist grips. When the curtain shield airbag inflates, the microphone or other device or object will be thrown away with great force or the curtain shield airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury.  Do not hook a hanger, heavy or sharp pointed objects on the coat hook. If the curtain shield airbag inflates, those items will be thrown away with great force or the curtain shield airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury. When you hang clothes, hang them on the coat hook directly. 178 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS  Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or serious injury.  Do not modify or replace the front (and outboard rear) seats or upholstery of the seats with front (and rear) side airbags. Such changes may prevent the side airbag system from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.  Do not disassemble or repair the front and rear pillars and roof side rail containing the curtain shield airbags. Such changes may disable the system or cause the curtain shield airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury. NOTICE Do not perform any of the following changes without consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system in some cases.  Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile two−way radio, cassette tape player or CD player.  Modification of the suspension system.  Modification of the structure of the passenger compartment.  Repairs made on or near the console, front (or outboard rear) seats. Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any repair and modification. 179 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. 16G017  When the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, the light does not come on or remains on for more than 6 seconds.  The light comes on while driving. The indicator comes on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This means the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are operating properly. This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, occupant detection sensor, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page 74.) 180 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS  The portion of the doors (shaded in the illustration) was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.  The surface of the seats with the side airbag (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.  The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. G16037 NOTICE Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Lexus dealer. In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible:  Any of the SRS front (and rear) side airbags and curtain shield airbags have been inflated. 181 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS CHILD RESTRAINT Child restraint precautions Lexus strongly urges the use of appropriate child restraint systems for children. The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of a child restraint system. Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819. If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s seat belt. See ”Seat belts” on page 151 for details. CAUTION  For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.  Lexus strongly urges use of a proper child restraint system which conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. 182  Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear−facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.  A forward−facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.  Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision.  Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front or rear pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS  Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident. Child restraint system A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must carefully consult the manufacturer ’s instructions which accompany the child restraint system. To provide proper restraint, use a child restraint system following the manufacturer ’s instructions about the appropriate age and size of the child for the child restraint system. Install the child restraint system correctly following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. General directions are also provided under the following illustrations. The child restraint system should be installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. When not using the child restraint system, keep it secured with the seat belt or place it in the trunk or somewhere other than the passenger compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident. 183 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Types of child restraint system (A) Infant seat Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types depending on the child’s age and size. (A) Infant seat (B) Convertible seat (C) Booster seat Install the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. G16038 Your vehicle has anchor brackets for securing the top strap of a child restraint system. For instructions about how to use the anchor bracket, see “Using a top strap” on page 197. (B) Convertible seat Child restraint lower anchorages approved for your vehicle may also be used. See “Installation with child restraint lower anchorages” on page 199. G16039 184 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (C) Booster seat INSTALLATION WITH 3−POINT TYPE SEAT BELT (A) Infant seat installation G16040 G16038 An infant seat must be used in rear−facing position only. 185 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS G16042 CAUTION  Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear−facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat. 186 G16043  If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right seat. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS G16044 1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the infant seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight. G16045 2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode. When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be extended. To hold the infant seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract. CAUTION  After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.  Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent your child from properly latching the tab and buckle.  If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed. 187 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS G16046 3. While pressing the infant seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the infant seat securely. G16047 CAUTION Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer. 188 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (B) Convertible seat installation G16048 4. To remove the infant seat, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child passenger. G16039 A convertible seat must be used in forward−facing or rear−facing position depending on the age and size of the child. When installing, follow the manufacturer ’s instructions about the appropriate age and size of the child as well as directions for installing the child restraint system. 189 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS G16050 G16051 Move seat fully back CAUTION  Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear−facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.  A forward−facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.  Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front or rear pillar or roof side rail from which the front (or rear) side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the front (and rear) side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. 190 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS G16052  If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient space for safe installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right seat. G16053 1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the convertible seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight. CAUTION  After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.  Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent your child from properly latching the tab and buckle.  If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed. 191 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS G16054 2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode. When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be extended. To hold the convertible seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock mode before letting the belt retract. 192 G16055 3. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS G16056 CAUTION Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer. G16057 4. To remove the convertible seat, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child passenger. 193 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (C) Booster seat installation G16040 G16059 Move seat fully back A booster seat must be used in forward−facing position only. CAUTION  A forward−facing child restraint system should be allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured. 194 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS  Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front or rear pillar or roof side rail from which the front (or rear) side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in a child restraint system. It is dangerous if the front (and rear) side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. G16060 1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the booster seat and across the child following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt. Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly across the child’s shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible on the child’s hips. See ”Seat belts” on page 151 for details. CAUTION  Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from child’s neck, but not falling off child’s shoulder. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision. 195 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS  Both high−positioned lap belts and loose−fitting belts could cause death or serious injuries due to sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as low on a child’s hips as possible.  For child’s safety, do not place the shoulder belt under child’s arm. G16061  After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of the belt are not twisted.  Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent your child from properly latching the tab and buckle.  If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot protect your child from death or serious injury. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Do not install the child restraint system on the seat until the seat belt is fixed. 196 2. To remove the booster seat, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Using a top strap G16063 G16062  1 Anchor bracket Follow the procedure below for a child restraint system that requires the use of a top strap. 2 Symbol Use the anchor bracket on the package tray behind the rear seat to attach the top strap. Anchor brackets are installed for each rear seating position. This symbol indicates the locations of the anchor brackets. 197 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS G16121 TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET 1. Lower the head restraint to the lowest position. 198 G16122 2. Push the lid of the anchor bracket to open it. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Installation with child restraint lower anchorages G16064 G16065 3. Fix the child restraint system with the seat belt. 4. Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top strap. For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Types of child restraint system” on page 184. Lower anchorages for the child restraint systems complying with the FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specifications are installed in the rear seat. CAUTION The anchorages are installed in the gap between the seat cushion and seatback of both outboard rear seats. Make sure the top strap is securely latched, and check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer. Child restraint system complying with the FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification can be fixed to these anchorages. In this case, it is not necessary to fix the child restraint system with a seat belt on the vehicle. 199 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLATION G16067a G16066a Canada only Canada only Type A 200 Type B OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 1. Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly and confirm the position of the lower anchorages near the button on the seatback. Type A— 2. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto the anchorages and tighten the lower straps. Type B— 2. Latch the buckles onto the anchorages For owners in Canada—The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system. CAUTION  When using the lower anchorages for the child restraint system, be sure that there are no irregular objects around the anchorages or that the seat belt is not caught.  Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the installation instructions provided by its manufacturer. If your child restraint system has a top strap, it should be anchored. (For the installation of the top strap, see “Using a top strap” on page 197.) For installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped with each product. 201 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS DRIVING POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM A microcomputer will memorize the position of the driver’s seat, and the positions of the tilt and telescopic steering, and outside rear view mirrors. Three different driving position profiles can be entered into the computer’s memory. Recording a driving position in the computer’s memory can only be done when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode and the selector lever is in the ”P” position. Setting the driving position G16068 1. Adjust the driver’s seat, tilt and telescopic steering and outside rear view mirrors to the desired position. 2. While pushing the ”SET” button, push button ”1”,”2” or “3” until the signal beeps. 202 The beep sound means that the positions are recorded in the computer’s memory. By repeating these two steps and pressing the remaining button, the driving position for another driver can be recorded. To set a new memorized position, select the desired position and perform step 2. The previous memory will be erased and the new position will be set. To make only slight changes to an already memorized position, the easiest way is to first activate the memorized position, then make the desired changes and perform step 2 above. Recalling the memorized position G16069 When you push button ”1”, ”2” or “3”, the driving position will be automatically adjusted to the position recorded for that button. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Conditions for memorized position activation MEMORY RECALL FUNCTION  Engine switch in “IG−ON” mode and selector lever in ”P” position, with the vehicle stopped. You can recall the memorized position using the entry function or wireless remote control.  Engine switch in “OFF” mode and within 30 seconds of opening driver’s door. The memorized position can be activated, except for the tilt and telescopic steering. If you unlock the door using the entry function or wireless remote control, the memorized seat position is recalled when the driver’s door is opened. The memorized steering wheel position will be recalled when you push the engine switch. If any driving position memory switch is pushed while one of the memorized driving position profiles is being activated, the operation will stop. This function can be used after setting by the following procedure. To activate the system, push the desired button (“1”, “2” or “3”) again. The driving position memory control system cannot be operated while the vehicle is moving. If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the computer’s memory will be erased and the memorized positions will have to be set again. CAUTION  Do not start the vehicle while the adjustments are being made.  Take care not to select the wrong button, or the seat could strike the rear passenger or hit your body against the steering wheel. If this happens, you can stop the movement by pressing another driving position memory switch. Setting the driving position onto the electronic key The driver’s door must be closed with the engine switch turned off. 1. Push and hold the previously memorized driving position button “1”, “2” or “3”. 2. While depressing the button above, push and hold the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” button on the electronic key until a beep sounds. If you wish to set other driving position, repeat the above procedure. The previous setting will be erased and the new position will be set. Resetting the driving position on the electronic key The driver’s door must be closed with the engine switch turned off. 1. Push and hold the “SET” button. 2. Push and hold the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” button on the electronic key until two beeps sound. 203 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS FRONT PASSENGER SEAT POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM A microcomputer can memorize the position of the front passenger seat. Three different seat position profiles can be entered into the computer’s memory. Recording a seat position in the computer’s memory can only be done when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode and the selector lever is in the ”P” position. Setting the front passenger seat position The beep sound means that the positions are recorded in the computer’s memory. By repeating these two steps and pressing the remaining button, the seat position for another passenger can be recorded. To set a new memorized position, select the desired position and perform step 2. The previous memory will be erased and the new position will be set. To make only slight changes to an already memorized position, the easiest way is to first activate the memorized position, then make the desired changes and perform step 2 above. Recalling the memorized position G16123 G16124 1. Adjust the front passenger seat to the desired position. 2. While pushing the ”SET” button, push button ”1”,”2” or “3” until the signal beeps. 204 When you push button ”1”, ”2” or “3”, the seat position will be automatically adjusted to the position recorded for that button. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Conditions for memorized position activation  Engine switch in “IG−ON” mode and selector lever in ”P” position, with the vehicle stopped.  Engine switch in “OFF” mode and within 30 seconds of opening front passenger’s door. If any seat position memory switch is pushed while one of the memorized seat position profiles is being activated, the operation will stop. To activate the system, push the desired button (“1”, “2” or “3”) again. The seat position memory control system cannot be operated while the vehicle is moving. If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the computer’s memory will be erased and the memorized positions will have to be set again. CAUTION  Do not start the vehicle while the adjustments are being made.  Take care not to select the wrong button, or the seat could strike the rear passenger . If this happens, you can stop the movement by pressing another driving position memory switch. 205 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 206 SECTION 1–7 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Steering wheel and mirrors Tilt and telescopic steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 209 213 218 207 STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS TILT AND TELESCOPIC STEERING COLUMN Adjustment of telescopic steering column Adjustment of steering column tilt G17002 G17001 To adjust the steering column length, push the control switch forward or backward to set the steering wheel to the desired position. To adjust the tilt of the steering column, push the control switch upward or downward to set it to the desired position. CAUTION Do not adjust the steering column while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries. 208 CAUTION Do not adjust the steering column while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries. STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS Automatic tilt away* G17003 When the engine switch is off, the steering column moves forward away from the driver and also tilts up for easy exit and entry. When you turn on the engine switch, the steering column returns to the previously set position. NOTE: *This feature can be deactivated. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRRORS G17004 Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the side of your vehicle in the mirror. Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the outside rear view mirror on the passenger’s side because it is a convex mirror. Any object seen in a convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than if seen in a normal flat mirror. When the inside rear view mirror darkens in ”AUTO” mode, the outside rear view mirrors also darken to reduce the reflection of the headlights of the following vehicle. For details, see ”Inside rear view mirror” on page 213. When you push the rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch, the heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear the mirror surface. (See “Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch” on page 58.) 209 STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS CAUTION  Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.  Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them when the rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch is on. Power rear view mirror control The power rear view mirror control switch is located in the switch box. G17013  1 Master switch 2 Control switch Push the button to use the switch box. Push “L” (left mirror) or “R” (right mirror) on the master switch and then push the control switch on the desired side. The indicator light of the switch you selected comes on when you push “L” or “R”. When you move the selector lever to “R” position with “L” or “R” switch on, the rear view mirrors will be automatically adjusted down to help backing up. While the indicator light is on, the mirror can be adjusted. When you push the same side again, the light goes out and the mirror cannot be adjusted. After adjustment, be sure to close the switch box to its original position. 210 STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS The power rear view mirrors can be adjusted when the engine switch is in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode. Folding rear view mirrors The power rear view mirror folding switch is located in the switch box. CAUTION To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when not in use while driving. NOTICE G17014 If ice should jam the mirror, do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de−icer to free the mirror. Push the button to use the switch box and then push the folding switch. The rear view mirrors are folded backward. When you push the switch again, the mirrors will be extended to their original position. After adjustment, be sure to close the switch box to its original position. The engine switch must be selected in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode. The rear view mirrors can be folded backward for parking in compact areas. 211 STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS CAUTION Outer foot lights  To avoid personal injury and any mirror malfunction, do not touch the mirror while it is moving.  Do not drive with the mirrors folded backward. Both the driver and passenger side rear view mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.  To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, keep the switch box closed when not in use while driving. G17015 The outer foot lights illuminate the ground near the doors for about 15 seconds to ensure safe footing for the driver and passengers who are about to get in the vehicle.* The outer foot lights come on in the following conditions:  You are getting closer to the vehicle carrying an electronic key and you enter the effective range of the entry function (about 1 m (3 ft) from each outside door handle).  The doors are unlocked with the wireless remote control.  The doors are unlocked with the power door lock switch on the driver’s side. 212 STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS The outer foot lights go off 15 seconds after the lights come on or when: INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR  Pushing the lock switch on the outside door handle with an electronic key in possession,  the doors are locked with the wireless remote control function,  the doors are locked by inserting a mechanical key into the door keyhole, G17007  the doors are locked with the power door lock switch on the driver’s side, or  the selector lever is moved out of “P” position when the engine switch is on. NOTE: * The outer foot lights illuminating time can be changed. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror. Pushing the “AUTO” button changes the mode between ”AUTO” and ”DAY”. The indicator comes on when the ”AUTO” mode is selected. ”DAY” mode: The mirror surface is normal. ”AUTO” mode: If the mirror detects light from the headlights of the vehicle behind you, the mirror surface darkens slightly to reduce the reflected light. When the inside rear view mirror surface changes, the outside rear view mirror surfaces will also become darker. When the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, the inside rear view mirror always turns on in the ”AUTO” mode. 213 STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS When the outside air temperature is low, it may take a little longer for the mirror to darken in response to the detection of headlights. Compass CAUTION Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries. G17008 To ensure correct functioning of anti−glare mirror sensors located on both sides of the mirror, do not touch or cover the sensors with your finger or a piece of cloth, etc. 214 G17009 The compass indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading. The illustration shown above indicates the vehicle is heading north. Displays Directions N North NE Northeast E East SE Southeast S South SW Southwest W West NW Northwest STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS Pushing the “AUTO” button for longer than 3 seconds turns on or off the compass display. The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:  The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning. The compass does not adjust while the vehicle is stopped.  The engine switch is turned off immediately after turning.  The vehicle is on an inclined surface.  The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.).  The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a magnet or a metal object near the inside rear view mirror.) NOTICE Do not put magnets or a metal object near the inside rear view mirror. Doing this may cause malfunction of the compass sensor. CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation calibration) The direction display on the compass deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle. To adjust for this deviation, stop the vehicle and push the “AUTO” button for longer than about 6 seconds until the zone number (1−15) appears on the display. Then push the button again, referring to the following map to select the number of the zone where the vehicle is.  The battery has been disconnected.  Any door is open. If the deviation is small, the compass works to calibrate the direction automatically while the vehicle is in motion. For obtaining additional precision or for complete calibrating, see “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS” below. 215 STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS CAUTION Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped. CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling calibration) G17016 G17011 “CAL” appears on the display in case the circling calibration is required due to a drastic change in the magnetic field. To rectify this, follow the calibration procedure below. Zone number If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is finished. 216 STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS CAUTION G17012  When doing the circling calibration, be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.  Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped. Drive the vehicle slowly (at 8 km/h (5 mph) or lower) in a circle until the direction is displayed. If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed. After driving in 1 to 3 circles in the above method, calibration is complete with the “CAL” off the display and the direction shown on the display. If calibration cannot be performed because of the vehicle is magnetized, take your vehicle to a Lexus dealer.  Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.).  During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration. 217 STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS VANITY MIRRORS G17017 To use the vanity mirror, swing the sun visor down and slide the cover. The vanity light comes on when you slide the cover. However if the sun visor is not hooked securely, the light may not come on. NOTICE To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the cover open for a long time while the engine is stopped. 218 SECTION 1–8 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Touch screen Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Information menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 219 TOUCH SCREEN OVERVIEW G18042 Vehicles with Navigation system G18043 Vehicles without Navigation system 220 1 Touch screen 2 “CLIMATE” button The air conditioning operation screen is shown. (See page 258 for details.) 3 “AUDIO” button The audio operation screen is shown. (See page 280 for details.) 4 “INFO”button The information menu screen is shown. (See page 222 for details.) 5 “DISP” button The display adjustment screen is shown. (See page 255 for details.) TOUCH SCREEN Initial screen Touch switch operation This system is operated mainly by the switches on the screen. To prevent damage to the screen, lightly touch switches on the screen with your finger. When you touch a switch on the screen, a beep sounds. G18001 Do not use objects other than your finger to touch the screen. INFORMATION  If the system does not respond to a touch of a switch, move your finger away from the screen and then touch it again. When you select the engine switch in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode, the initial screen appears and the system begins operating. After a few seconds, the initial screen disappears. CAUTION When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running, always apply the parking brake for safety.  You cannot operate dimmed switches.  Wipe off fingerprints on the surface of the display using a glass cleaning cloth.  The displayed image may become darker and moving images may be slightly distorted when the display is cold.  When you look at the screen through polarized material such as polarized sunglasses, the screen may be dark and hard to see. If so, change the angle of the screen or take off your sunglasses. 221 TOUCH SCREEN INFORMATION MENU For “LEXUS Park Assist”, see “Setting the intuitive parking assist” on page 391. For “Adjust clock”, see “Clock” on page 106. Trip information G18044a Trip information such as driving time, driving distance, average vehicle speed, fuel consumption, etc. can be displayed on the screen. 1. Push the “INFO” button to display the Information Menu screen. Vehicles with Navigation system* G18045a G18045a 2. Touch the “Trip Info.” switch. Vehicles without Navigation system *For other functions such as Maintenance and Calender, see “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. 222 TOUCH SCREEN Cruising Range How far you can drive with the remaining fuel is displayed. G18003 Even though the display indicates sufficient miles to run, if the fuel level on the fuel gauge approaches “E” or the low fuel level warning light comes on, fill the fuel tank as soon as possible. INFORMATION Consumption The consumption is calculated and displayed based on the driving distance and the fuel consumption for 2 seconds with engine running.  When you first start driving your new vehicle, the correct cruising range may not be shown. One or more refills of 10 gallons or more may be required for the system to set its calibration.  The cruising range displayed is calculated based on past fuel consumption and may vary according to your driving style and road condition. The value is updated every 0.5 seconds. If you are driving at low speeds just before stopping, the accurate figure may not be shown. After Refueling The consumption after refueling is calculated and displayed based on the total driving distance and the total fuel consumption after refueling. The value is updated every 10 seconds. When refueling, be sure to stop your vehicle and turn the engine switch off. 223 TOUCH SCREEN Average Speed Hands−free system The Average Speed is displayed. The average vehicle speed is calculated and displayed based on the total driving distance and the total driving time after the engine is started. Hands−free system allows you to make or receive a call without taking your hands off the steering wheel by connecting your cellular phone. The displayed value is updated every 10 seconds. To calculate from the beginning, touch the “Reset” switch. Distance The distance after engine starting is displayed. When refueling, be sure to stop your vehicle and turn the engine switch off. This system supports the Bluetooth. Bluetooth is a wireless data system by which you can call without your cellular phone connecting with a cable or placing on a cradle. If your cellular phone does not support the Bluetooth, this system can not function. CAUTION While you are driving, do not use a cellular phone or connect the Bluetooth phone. NOTICE Do not leave your cellular phone in the vehicle. The temperature indoor may be high and damage the phone. 224 TOUCH SCREEN INFORMATION In the following conditions, the system may not function.  The cellular phone is turned off.  The current position is outside the communication area. G18047  The cellular phone is not connected.  The cellular phone has a low battery. By pushing the telephone button above, you can receive a call or hang up without taking your hands off the steering wheel. 225 TOUCH SCREEN INFORMATION G18005a  Talk alternately with your party on the phone. If you talk at the same time, the voice may not reach each other. (It is not a malfunction.)  Keep the volume of receiving voice down. Otherwise, echo is coming up. When you talk on the phone, speak clearly towards the microphone.  In the following situations, your voice may not reach the party. 226 You can use the microphone above when talking on the phone.  Driving on unpaved road. (Making a traffic noise.)  Driving at the high speed. The party’s voice outputs from the driver’s speaker. When the received calls or received voice outputs, the audio from the audio system or voice guidance from the Navigation system will be muted.  The window is open.  Turning the air conditioning vents towards the microphone.  The sound of the air conditioning fan is loud. TOUCH SCREEN 3 Indicates the level of reception. Too bad G18006 Excellent The level of reception does not always correspond with the one of your cellular phone. 4 “A” is displayed when calling in analogue. “D” is displayed when calling in digital. Nothing is displayed when the system can get no information from your cellular phone. 1 Indicates a condition of Bluetooth connection. “Blue” indicates excellent condition of Bluetooth connection. INFORMATION “Yellow” indicates the condition easy to disconnect the Bluetooth, causing a deterioration in voice. This system supports the following service. Not displayed: no connection to the Bluetooth.  OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 2 Indicates the receiving area. “Rm” is displayed when receiving in Roaming area. “Hm” is displayed when receiving in Home area.  HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 If your cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth phone, and take OPP service individually. 227 TOUCH SCREEN An antenna for the Bluetooth connection is built in the display. The indication of the Bluetooth connection may turn yellow and the system may not function when you use the Bluetooth phone in the following conditions and places.  Your cellular phone is hiding behind the display (behind the seat or in the glove box and console box).  Your cellular phone touches (or is covered with) metal materials. Leave the Bluetooth phone on the place where “Blue” indication is displayed. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG. Inc. FCC ID: HYQBTA01A IC ID: 1551A−BTA01A MADE IN JAPAN This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS−210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 228 TOUCH SCREEN (a) Entering the Bluetooth phone To use a hands−free system, you need to enter your phone in the system. Once you registered it, you can make a hands−free call. 1. Push the “INFO” button to display the “Information Menu” screen. G18045a 2. Touch the “Telephone” switch to display “Telephone” screen. G18008 3. Touch the “Settings” switch to display “Settings” screen. G18009 of the telephone button to display this You can also push screen when the vehicle is stopped. 4. Touch the “Add Phone” switch to connect your cellular phone to the system. 229 TOUCH SCREEN G18010 5. When this screen is displayed, input the Passkey displayed on the screen into the phone. 6. When the connection is completed, device name and Bluetooth Device Address is displayed. For the operation of the phone, see the manual that comes with your cellular phone. You do not need to enter it in case of using the same phone. If you want to cancel it, touch “Cancel”. 230 G18011 TOUCH SCREEN (b) Selecting the Bluetooth phone In case of registering a number of Bluetooth phones, you need to select the usual phone. G18009 G18008 2. Touch the “Select” switch to display “Select Telephone” screen. You can select the Bluetooth phone from a maximum of 4 numbers. 1. Touch the “Settings” switch to display “Settings” screen. “Empty” is displayed when you do not register the Bluetooth phone yet. Bluetooth mark is displayed when you choose the Bluetooth phone. 231 TOUCH SCREEN  To connect the Bluetooth phone G18012 Although you can register up to 4 Bluetooth phones in the system, one Bluetooth phone can only function. G18013 When you select the engine switch in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode, the selected Bluetooth phone will be automatically connected and the connection result is displayed. Always leave the Bluetooth phone in a condition where connection can be established. This screen appears when the Bluetooth phone is first connected after you select the engine switch in “ACC” or “IG−ON”. 232 TOUCH SCREEN  To reconnect the Bluetooth phone  To confirm the Bluetooth information If the Bluetooth phone is disconnected with a poor reception from the Bluetooth network when the engine switch is selected in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode, the system automatically reconnects the Bluetooth phone. In this case, the connection result is not displayed. You can confirm or change the detailed setting of the Bluetooth phone. If the Bluetooth is disconnected on purpose such as you turned your cellular phone off, this does not happen. Reconnect it by the following methods.  Select the Bluetooth phone again. G18009  Enter the Bluetooth phone. Touch the “Settings” switch of Bluetooth to display “Bluetooth Information” screen. 233 TOUCH SCREEN To change the Device Name— You can change the Device Name to the desired one from the name already registered in the system. G18014 G18014 You can change the Device Name and Passkey. BD_ADDR is Bluetooth device address. Do not change the Device Name to the same name as the one of the other Bluetooth phones. They cannot be identified. BD_ADDR is different depending on the system. You can confirm the address when it cannot be identified. Touch the “Change” switch of Device Name to display the “Device Name List” screen. G18015 Select the desired name and touch “OK”. 234 TOUCH SCREEN To change the Passkey— The Passkey in the system is initially fixed. You can change the Passkey within 4−8 figures. G18016 G18014 Touch the desired key to input the Passkey. Each time you touch “ ”, an inputted number is deleted. Touch “Enter”. Touch the “Change” switch of Passkey to display “Enter Bluetooth Passkey” screen. 235 TOUCH SCREEN (c) Deleting the Bluetooth phone G18008 G18017 Select the desired phone from the list and touch “OK”. 1. Touch the “Settings” switch to display “Settings” screen. G18009 2. Touch the “Delete” switch to display “Delete Telephone” screen. You can delete the Bluetooth phone which you registered. 236 TOUCH SCREEN (d) Calling on the Bluetooth phone By phone book— After you enter the Bluetooth phone, you can call by using hands−free system. This system has 6 methods below by which you call. You can call by phone book data which is transferred from your cellular phone. By dial— The system has two phone books. You can register up to 500 numbers in each book. You can call by inputting the telephone number. This cannot be operated while you are driving. This cannot be operated while you are driving. G18008 G18008 Touch the desired key to input the telephone number. Touch the desired key to input the telephone number. Each time you touch “ ”, an inputted number is deleted. Touch “ ” or push 1. Touch the “Phone Book” switch to display “Phone Book” screen. of the telephone button. 237 TOUCH SCREEN By dialed numbers— You can call by dialed number. The system memorizes up to 5 dialed numbers. If it is over 5, the oldest number is deleted. G18018 2. Select the desired number from the list. G18019 Touch “ 238 ” or push of the telephone button. This cannot be operated while you are driving. G18008 1. Touch the “Log” switch to display “Outgoing Calls” screen. TOUCH SCREEN G18020  When you call by phone book, the name (if registered) is displayed. G18019 Touch “ ” or push of the telephone button.  When you call the same number continuously, the newest number is only registered. 2. Select the desired number from the list. 239 TOUCH SCREEN By received calls— You can call by received calls. When a call is received, the system memorizes up to 5 numbers. If it is over 5, the oldest number is deleted. This cannot be operated while you are driving. G18008 1. Touch the “Log” switch to display. 240 G18020 2. Touch the “Incoming Calls” switch to display “Incoming Calls” screen. TOUCH SCREEN G18021  When a telephone number registered in phone book is received, the name and the number is displayed.  Received calls which you did not answer are also memorized in the system and “Abs.” is displayed on the left side of the number. G18019 Touch “ ” or push of the telephone button.  An international phone call may not be made depending on the cellular phone which you have.  Unnotified telephone number such as a public telephone is not memorized in the system. 3. Select the desired number from the list. 241 TOUCH SCREEN By one touch call— You can call by registered telephone number which you selected from a phone book, dialed numbers and received calls. (See page 248 for registering the one touch dial.) G18022 G18008 2. Touch the desired number to call. You can change the page by touching “1−touch Dial 2” or “1−touch Dial 3”. 1. Touch the “1−touch Dial” switch to display “1−touch Dial” screen. When you push the telephone button while you are driving, the screen above appears. Touch the desired name to call. (The telephone number is not displayed.) By POI call— You can call by operating a switch when “Call” is displayed on the screen from Navigation system. (See the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.) 242 TOUCH SCREEN (e) Receiving on the Bluetooth phone G18023 When a call is received, this screen is displayed with a sound. Touch “ ” or push of the telephone button to talk on the phone. To hang up the phone: Touch “ ” or push of the telephone button again. To refuse to receive the call: ” and hold it. Touch “ To adjust the volume of received call: Touch “–” or “+”. On the international phone call, the party’s name may not be displayed correctly depending on the cellular phone which you have. (f) Talking on the Bluetooth phone G18024 While you are talking on the phone, this screen is displayed. You can do the operation below on the screen. To adjust the volume of the party’s voice: Touch “–” or “+” switch. To hang up the phone: Touch the “ ” switch or push button. of the telephone To mute your voice: Touch the “Mute ON” switch. To input the Key: Touch the “0−9” switch. 243 TOUCH SCREEN G18025 Touch the desired number to input the key. To hang up the phone: ” or push Touch “ of the telephone button. This cannot be operated while you are driving. G18026 If the continuous tone signal is registered in a phone book, this screen appears. (If not registered, “Send” and “Exit” is not displayed.) Confirm the number displayed on the screen and touch “Send” switch. The number to the marked sign will be sent. When you touch “Exit”, this function will be finished and normal tone screen appears. To hang up the phone: ” or push Touch “ of the telephone button. The continuous tone signal is the marked sign (p or w) and the number following telephone number. (ex. 056133p0123w#1 ) When you call the number registered in phone book and input a code number and the like to operate an answering machine or use a telephone service in bank, you can do this operation. 244 TOUCH SCREEN (g) Changing the settings of the Bluetooth phone G18008 G18009 You can change the settings of the phone. Touch the “Settings” switch to display “Settings” screen. 245 TOUCH SCREEN To change the phone book— To transfer the telephone number— The system has two phone books. You can select either phone book. You can transfer the telephone numbers in your Bluetooth phone to the system. Up to 500 numbers can be registered in one phone book. Transfer it while the engine is running. G18009 G18009 Touch the “Phone Book 1” or “Phone Book 2” switch. 1. Touch the “Start Transfer” switch to display “Data Transfer” screen. 246 TOUCH SCREEN G18027 2. Touch the “Overwrite” or “Add” switch. G18028 3. Transfer the phone book data to the system using the Bluetooth phone. This screen appears while transferring. To cancel it, touch the “Cancel” switch. If the transferring is interrupted on the way, the phone book data transferred until then can be memorized in the system. 247 TOUCH SCREEN To register the one touch dial— You can register the desired telephone number from phone books, dialed numbers and received calls. Up to 17 one touch dial numbers a phone book can be registered. G18030 G18029 2. Touch the desired telephone number. 1. Touch the “Set One Touch” switch in which you want to register the phone number. G18031 Select the new registration from 1−18 except 6 and touch the switch. A latest received number is registered in the 6th item. 248 TOUCH SCREEN To delete the memory—  To delete the telephone number in the phone book. G18033 G18029 Touch “YES” switch. When you touch “NO”, the previous screen returns. Touch the “Delete” switch of “Phone Book”. G18032 Select the desired number from the list. If you want to delete all the phone numbers in phone book, touch the “Delete All” switch. 249 TOUCH SCREEN  To delete the dialed number G18029 G18033 Touch “YES” switch. Touch the “Delete” switch of “Outgoing Calls”. G18034 Select the desired number from the list. If you want to delete all the dialed numbers, touch the “Delete All” switch. 250 When you touch “NO”, the previous screen returns. TOUCH SCREEN  To delete the received calls G18029 G18033 Touch “YES” switch. Touch the “Delete” switch of “Incoming Calls”. When you touch “NO”, the previous screen returns. G18034 Select the desired number from the list. If you want to delete all the received calls, touch the “Delete All” switch. 251 TOUCH SCREEN  To delete the one touch dial G18029 G18033 Touch “YES” switch. Touch the “Delete” switch of “1−touch Dial”. G18034 Select the desired number from the list. If you want to delete all the one touch dial numbers, touch the “Delete All” switch. 252 When you touch “NO”, the previous screen returns. TOUCH SCREEN Language You can select the language shown on the screen. 1. Push the “INFO” button on the bezel to display the “Information Menu” screen. G18045a G18041 3. Touch the desired switch to select the language. When you select the language, touch “OK”. 2. Touch the “Language” switch. 253 TOUCH SCREEN Setting screen (a) Automatic transition 1. Push the “INFO” button on the bezel to display the “Information Menu” screen. You can select a function that enables automatic return to the navigation screen from the audio screen. G18045a 2. Touch the “Screen Setting” switch. G18035 Select the “ON” or “OFF” and then touch the “OK”. ON: The navigation screen automatically returns from the audio or air conditioning screen 20 seconds after the end of audio or air conditioning screen operation. OFF: The audio or air conditioning screen remains on. 254 TOUCH SCREEN (b) Background color Screen adjustment You can select a background color. You can adjust the brightness or contrast of the screen depending on the brightness of your surroundings. You also can turn the display off. To display the “Display” screen, push the “DISPLAY” button. G18035 G18036 Select the desired background color and then touch the “OK”. Contrast and brightness adjustment CONTRAST “+”: Strengthens the contrast of the screen. CONTRAST “–”: Weakens the contrast of the screen. BRIGHTNESS “+”: Brightens the screen. BRIGHTNESS “–”: Darkens the screen. The screen turns off when you push the “SCREEN OFF”. To turn the display screen back on, push any bezel switch such as “INFO”, etc. The selected screen appears. 255 TOUCH SCREEN G18037 Depending on the position of the headlight switch, the screen changes to either day mode or night mode. To display the screen in the day mode even with the headlight switch on, touch “DAY MODE” on the adjustment screen for brightness and contrast control. However, if the instrument panel light control switch is turned fully to the right, mode switching cannot be done. It remains in the day mode. In this case, “DAY MODE” is not shown on the screen. If the screen is set in the day mode with the headlight switch turned on, this condition is memorized in the system even with the engine turned off. 256 G18038 Color and tone adjustment You can adjust the color and the tone while the DVD video and video CD are being played. COLOR “RED”: Strengthens the red color of the screen. COLOR “GREEN”: Strengthens the green color of the screen. TONE “+”: Strengthens the tone of the screen. TONE “–”: Weakens the tone of the screen. SECTION 2–1 AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO Air conditioning Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 257 AIR CONDITIONING AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING CONTROLS G21001  A Vehicles with Navigation system 258 B Vehicles without Navigation system AIR CONDITIONING 1 Driver side temperature display (in degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade) 2 Passenger side temperature display (in degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade) 3 “DUAL” (temperature setting mode change) switch 4 “A/C” switch 5 Air flow control switches 6 Fan speed control switches 7 Air conditioning operation screen display button 8 “TEMP” (driver side temperature control) buttons (At the independent mode that display shows “DUAL”; mainly for driver and secondarily for front passenger) (At the linked mode that display does not show “DUAL”; for driver) 9 “OFF” button 10 “AUTO” button 11 Micro dust and pollen filter button 12 Windshield air flow button 13 Air intake control button 14 “PASSENGER TEMP” (passenger side temperature control) buttons (Only for the independent mode that display shows “DUAL”; mainly for front passenger and secondarily for driver) The automatic air conditioning automatically maintains the set temperature. In the automatic operation mode, the air conditioning selects the most suitable fan speed, air flow, air intake and on−off of the air conditioning according to the temperature. The engine switch must be selected in “IG−ON” mode. “CLIMATE”: Push this button to display switches for automatic air conditioning control. NOTICE To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the air conditioning on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. 259 AIR CONDITIONING Vehicles with navigation system only: G21047a By pushing the button above, you can operate the speech command system. For the operation of the speech command system, see the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. 260 AIR CONDITIONING G21002a Air flow selection Automatic air flow mode only 261 AIR CONDITIONING (a) Climate control SETTING OPERATION − automatic control G21003 1. Push the “AUTO” button. An indicator light will illuminate to show that the automatic operation mode has been selected. Air flow quantity, switching of the diffusers, on−off of the air conditioning, and switching of the air intake between RECIRCULATED AIR and OUTSIDE AIR are automatically adjusted. The operation status is shown by each indicator. When one of the manual control buttons is depressed while operating in automatic mode, the mode relevant to the depressed button is set. Other conditions continue to be adjusted automatically. Push the ”OFF” button to turn the air conditioning off. 262 INFORMATION  This automatic control had additional functions as described below, when the “AUTO” button is pushed. The fan is stopped for a little while until warm air preparation, when outside temperature is low like a winter season in the “Floor”, “Bi−level” or “Floor/Windshield” air flow mode. If quick removal for exterior frost, fog and inside fog on the windshield is desired, use the high fan speed setting after the “Windshield” air flow mode has been selected. The fan is stopped few seconds until cool air preparation, when outside temperature is high like a summer season in the “Panel” or “Bi−level” air flow mode.  The internal circulation may be applied for maximum cooling in the automatic operation mode, when outside temperature is high like a summer season. If fresh outside air is desired into the vehicle, push the air intake control button to select the OUTSIDE AIR mode. AIR CONDITIONING  The “Floor/Windshield” air flow mode may be applied automatically, if the outside temperature is lowered down to below 0C (32F). This is not a malfunction. The “Floor/Windshield” air flow mode turns on the defogging and defrosting function with the purpose of clearing your front view for safe driving. If the “Floor” air flow mode is desired with the main purpose of heating, “Floor” air flow mode can be selected manually by touching the air flow control switch. G21004 2. Use the “TEMP” or ”PASSENGER TEMP” buttons to set the desired vehicle interior temperature. The “TEMP” or “PASSENGER TEMP” (“ ”, “ ”) buttons are used to set the desired interior temperature. The interior temperature will be controlled on the driver and passenger side simultaneously or individually. To increase the interior temperature, push the “ ” button, to decrease it, push the “ ” button. If quick heating or cooling is desired— “LO” appears when you hold “ ” until maximum cooling, and “HI” appears when you hold “ ” until maximum heating. “TEMP” buttons—Changes the temperature on the driver and passenger sides simultaneously or the driver side only. “PASSENGER TEMP” buttons—Changes the temperature settings separate from the driver side. 263 AIR CONDITIONING “DUAL” switch— This switch is used to set the temperatures independently for the driver’s seat and front passenger seat. Touching the switch changes from the independent mode to the linked mode.  Independent mode: Temperatures can be set independently for the driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat. The indicator light will come on to show that the independent mode has been selected.  Linked mode: The same temperature is set for the driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat. The indicator light will turn off to show that the simultaneous temperature setting mode has been selected. When the temperature for the front passenger’s seat is changed in linked mode, the mode is changed automatically to independent mode. 264 INFORMATION Knowledge for the two−temperature selector operation This air conditioning system has two independent temperature selectors: left and right (for the use of driver and front passenger respectively).  There are cases where the temperature of the air flow may not accurately correlate on the driver and front passenger side according to circumstances, even if the left and right temperature selectors are set at the same temperature. If this situation occurs, use the fine tune operation to adjust the air temperature on one side.  There are cases where one or both of the air flow temperatures may not accurately correlate with the set temperature according to circumstances, when the air flow temperature settings on the left and right are substantially different. For example, if the left controller is set at central or neutral temperature while the right one is set at maximum heating or maximum cooling, or vice versa. If this situation occurs, use the fine tune operation to adjust the air temperature on each side. AIR CONDITIONING SETTING OPERATION—manual control When one of the manual control switches is depressed while operating in automatic mode, the mode relevant to the depressed switch is set. Other conditions continue to be adjusted automatically. If manual air flow selection is desired— G21006 G21005a The outlets from which air is delivered can be selected manually by touching the switch. The function of each mode is as follows: 1 Panel—Air flows mainly from the instrument panel vents and rear vents. 2 Bi−level—Air flows from the floor vents, the instrument panel vents and rear vents. Driver side setting Passenger side setting Mixed setting When you set the temperature selector setting at about the middle in automatic operation, warm air flows out of the floor vents and relatively low−temperature air flows out of the instrument panel vents and rear vents. 265 AIR CONDITIONING 3 Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor vents and rear vents. 4 Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly from the floor vents, windshield vents and rear vents. If manual switching of air intake is desired— Take in the fresh air by selecting the OUTSIDE AIR mode with the air intake control button. G21008 If manual fan speed control is desired— G21007  1 Fan speed at low 2 Fan speed at high Each time you push the air intake control button, the mode changes in order from the RECIRCULATED AIR mode to AUTOMATIC mode to OUTSIDE AIR mode, then back to the RECIRCULATED AIR mode. Each indicator light shows which mode is now selected. 1 RECIRCULATED AIR mode—If quick circulation of cooled air is desired, select this mode. 2 EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode—If the outside air contains harmful substances like exhaust gas (i.e., when the vehicle running just in front of your vehicle accelerates rapidly), the system changes automatically from the OUTSIDE AIR mode (with indicators 2 and 3 on) to the RECIRCULATED AIR mode (with indicators 1 and 2 on). 3 OUTSIDE AIR mode—The system will take fresh outside air into the vehicle. The fan speed can be set to your desired speed by touching the appropriate air flow control switch. The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered. Pushing the ”OFF” button turns off the fan. To remove exterior windshield frost and interior windshield fog, use the high speed setting. 266 AIR CONDITIONING To prevent fogging up of the windshield, the air intake mode may change automatically to the OUTSIDE AIR mode depending on the condition of the air conditioning system. For example, when the ambient temperature is low, the air intake mode may change automatically to the OUTSIDE AIR mode. This is not a malfunction. When the air conditioning is on, if the engine coolant temperature becomes extremely high, the RECIRCULATED AIR mode is automatically selected. This is not a malfunction. When the engine coolant temperature is lowered, the previous mode resumes. Turning off the air conditioning manually will cancel the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode. If you select the “AUTO” mode during fan operating, the air conditioning turns on and the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode will operate. To change the sensitivity of the sensor switching between the RECIRCULATED AIR and OUTSIDE AIR in the AUTOMATIC mode, push the air intake control button and hold it for a few seconds. The display changes to the one illustrated below. The sensitivity of the sensor can be adjusted only while the vehicle has been stopped. G21023 For normal use, it is best to keep the air intake control button set to OUTSIDE AIR mode. If recirculated air is used during heating, the windows will fog up more easily. The sensitivity of the switches is set to be higher toward “HI” and lower toward “LO”. Touch the desired switch on the screen. When you push any button except the air intake control button, the above screen goes off. 267 AIR CONDITIONING If manual on−off of the air conditioning is desired— (b) Windshield defogging and defrosting Touch the ”A/C” switch to turn the air conditioning on and touch it again to turn the air conditioning off. If you turn off the air conditioning manually, the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode will be cancelled. If the outside temperature is lowered down to around 0C (32F), the air conditioning will turn off automatically. At this time, the indicator on the A/C switch is off and the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC indicator light remains on. However, the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode does not operate. When the air conditioning turns on as with the raised temperature, the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode resumes. 268 G21010 If the system is used for ventilation, heating in dry weather or removing frost or exterior fog on the windshield, turn the air conditioning off once it is no longer required. This will improve fuel economy. The air conditioning can be used for year−round automatic temperature control including cooling and dehumidifying operation. To remove interior fog on the windshield— If the air conditioning compressor does not operate, the indicator of the ”A/C” switch will blink. If the indicator of the ”A/C” switch blinks even when the ”A/C” switch is touched again, have the compressor checked by your nearest Lexus dealer. 2. Push the windshield air flow button. Push the windshield air flow button. To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield— 1. Push the “TEMP” (” ”) button to set the “HI”. 3. Touch fan speed control switch on the right side to obtain a maximum air flow. 4. Leave the “A/C” switch off. AIR CONDITIONING When the windshield air flow button is pushed while operating in automatic mode, the air conditioning is set to operate and the OUTSIDE AIR mode is set. This is to clean up the front view more quickly. If you want to return the setting to the RECIRCULATED AIR mode, push the air intake control button once again. Touch the “A/C” switch for dehumidified heating or cooling. This setting clears the front view more quickly. (c) Micro dust and pollen filter This vehicle is equipped with a micro dust and pollen filter mode. When this mode is activated, air from the vents will remove pollen on the driver and passengers. Use this mode to remove pollen quickly carried by the driver or passengers or through the window in the days with much pollen. If you push the windshield air flow button once again while in the windshield air flow mode, the mode then returns to the last mode used. CAUTION G21073 Do not use the windshield air flow button during cooled air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up blocking your vision. Push the micro dust and pollen filter button. The indicator light comes on and RECIRCULATED AIR mode is turned on. Air is delivered from the instrument panel vents to the areas near the driver and passengers to remove pollen on them. When the interior is purified sufficiently with fresh air after about 3 minutes, this mode will be turned off automatically and the indicator light will go out. 269 AIR CONDITIONING However, when the outside temperature is low, the indicator light comes on and the “A/C” switch turns on, but the air intake control remains the same. When the interior is purified sufficiently with fresh air after about 1 minute, this mode will be turned off automatically and the indicator light will go out, but the “A/C” switch remains on. When the micro dust and pollen filter is activated, this mode will be turned off by pushing any of the following buttons:  Micro dust and pollen filter button  “A/C” button  Windshield air flow button The indicator light will go out when the mode is turned off. INFORMATION  Use and push the windshield air flow button to remove the fog on the windshield in rainy days.  Fresh air is delivered even when the micro dust and pollen filter button is turned off. 270 (d) Operating tips  To help cool down the interior after parking in the hot sun, drive for the first few minutes with the windows open. After the excess heat has blown away, close the windows.  Make sure the air inlet grilles in front of the windshield are not blocked by leaves or other obstructions.  If air flow control is not satisfactory, check the dashboard vents and rear vents. (See (e) “Center vents, side vents and rear vents”.)  Only humid days, do not blow cold air on the windshield. The windshield could fog up because of the difference in air temperature on the inside and outside of the windshield.  Keep the area under the front seats clear to allow air to circulate throughout the vehicle.  On cold days, set the fan speed to high for a minute to help clear the intake ducts of snow or moisture. This can reduce the amount of fogging on the windows.  When driving on dusty roads, close all windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake control button be set to the OUTSIDE AIR mode to take in the fresh air and the fan speed selector to any setting except OFF. AIR CONDITIONING  If following another vehicle on a dusty road, or driving in windy and dusty conditions, it is recommended that the air intake control button be temporarily pressed in to the RECIRCULATED AIR mode, which will close off the outside passage and prevent outside air and dust from entering the vehicle interior. Heating For best results, set controls to: For automatic operation— Push in the “AUTO” button. Temperature—To the desired temperature Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR Air conditioning—OFF For manual operation— Fan speed—To the desired fan speed Temperature—Towards high temperature Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR Air flow—FLOOR Air conditioning—OFF  For quick heating, select RECIRCULATED AIR mode for a few minutes. To keep the windows from fogging, select OUTSIDE AIR mode after the vehicle interior has been warmed.  Touch the “A/C” switch on for dehumidified heating.  Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat the vehicle interior while defrosting or defogging the windshield. Air conditioning For best results, set controls to: For automatic operation— Push in the “AUTO” button. Temperature—To the desired temperature Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR Air conditioning—ON 271 AIR CONDITIONING For manual operation— Fan speed—To the desired fan speed Temperature—Towards low temperature Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR Air flow—PANEL Air conditioning—ON  For quick cooling, select RECIRCULATED AIR mode for a few minutes. Defogging and defrosting —The inside of the windshield For best results, set controls to: For automatic operation— Temperature— Towards high temperature to heat; low temperature to cool Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR Air flow—WINDSHIELD Ventilation For best results, set controls to: For automatic operation— Push in the “AUTO” button. Temperature—Towards low temperature Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR Air conditioning—OFF For manual operation— Fan speed—To the desired fan speed Temperature—Towards low temperature Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR Air flow—PANEL Air conditioning—OFF 272 For manual operation— Fan speed—To the desired fan speed Temperature— Towards high temperature to heat; low temperature to cool Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR Air flow—WINDSHIELD When the windshield air flow button is pushed, air flows mainly from the windshield vents and turns on the defogging function with the purpose of clearing the front view. Pushing this button once again returns the air flow mode to the last one used. This button allows the air intake to select OUTSIDE AIR mode automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly. If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATED AIR mode, push the air intake control button once again. AIR CONDITIONING Touch the “A/C” switch for dehumidified heating or cooling. This setting clears the front view more quickly.  Only humid days, do not blow cold air on the windshield—the difference between the outside and inside temperatures could make the fogging worse. —The outside of the windshield For best results, set controls to: This button allows the air intake to select OUTSIDE AIR mode automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly. If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATED AIR mode, push the air intake control button once again. Touch the “A/C” switch for dehumidified heating or cooling. This setting clears the front view more quickly.  To heat the vehicle interior while defrosting the windshield, choose floor/windshield air flow. For automatic operation— Temperature— Towards high temperature Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR Air flow—WINDSHIELD (e) Center vents, side vents and rear vents For manual operation— Fan speed—To the desired fan speed Temperature— Towards high temperature Air intake—OUTSIDE AIR Air flow—WINDSHIELD When the windshield air flow button is pushed, air flows mainly from the windshield vents and turns on the defogging function with the purpose of clearing the front view. G21015 Center vents Pushing this button once again returns the air flow mode to the last one used. 273 AIR CONDITIONING G21016 Side vents (driver’s side) G21017 Rear vents If air flow control is not satisfactory, check the center vents, side vents and rear vents. They may be opened or closed as shown. G21064 When outside temperature is low like a winter season, air flow temperature from the center vents, side vents and rear vents may not be warmed up enough for a while until the engine coolant temperature becomes high enough. If air flow from the center vents, side vents and rear vents is not satisfactory, air flow direction can be changed manually by adjusting the vents fin direction or the vents may be closed. Side vents (front passenger’s side) 274 AIR CONDITIONING (f) Replacing the air conditioning filter G21012 G21011 The air conditioning filter is behind the glove box. The air conditioning filter information label is placed in the glove box as shown and indicates that a filter has been installed. The air conditioning filter, in addition to removing odors, prevents dust and pollen from entering the vehicle through the air conditioning vent. The air conditioning filter may clog after long use. The filter may need to be replaced if the air flow of the air conditioning and heater experiences extreme reductions in operating efficiency, or if the windows fog up easily. If the symptoms of air conditioning efficiency problems occur, contact your nearest Lexus dealer to have the filter cleaned or replaced. To maintain the air conditioning efficiency, replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, such as inner city or desert areas, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, see the “Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”). 275 AIR CONDITIONING 1. Turn the air intake control to RECIRCULATED AIR mode. The filter case cannot be removed in the OUTSIDE AIR mode. 2. Turn off the engine switch. 3. When you replace the filter, be sure to turn off the fan. G21013 4. Open the glove box and remove the partition by pulling. G21019 5. Pull the filter cover toward you. G21020 6. Push the tabs and pull the filter case toward you. 276 AIR CONDITIONING 9. Inspect the filter on the surface. If it is dirty, it should be replaced. G21021 7. Take out the filter. NOTICE When setting the filter to the filter case, the UP marks shown on the filter and filter case should be noted and fitted as shown. INFORMATION The air conditioning filter should be installed properly in position. The use of air conditioning with the filter removed may cause deteriorated dustproof performance and then affect air conditioning performance. G21022 8. Remove the filter from the filter case. 277 AIR CONDITIONING 278 SECTION 2–2 AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO Audio Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 279 AUDIO AUDIO SYSTEM Quick reference for your audio system G22108  A Vehicles with Navigation system 280 B Vehicles without Navigation system AUDIO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Audio operation screen display button The audio operation screen is shown. Function switch display screen (See page 286 for details.) CD slot (See page 306 or details.) Mode selectors (See page 285 for details.) Frequency turning knob (See page 291 for details.) CD load button (See page 306 for details.) Radio mode: Preset tuning (See page 291 for details.) Tape mode: Side change of cassette tape (See page 304 for details.) CD mode: Disc selection (See page 309 for details.) Scan button (See page 292 for details.) Cassette tape slot (See page 302 for details.) Stopping and ejecting a cassette tape (See page 302 for details.) 11 12 13 Seek tuning (See page 292 for details.) Tape/CD mode: Direct access to a desired program (See page 305 or 310 for details.) Ejecting a CD (See page 307 or details.) Turning the system on and adjusting the volume (See page 285 for details.) Radio mode: 281 AUDIO Quick reference for your audio system G22109  A Vehicles with Navigation system B Vehicles without Navigation system For a Mark Levinson brand audio system 282 AUDIO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Audio operation screen display button The audio operation screen is shown. Touch screen (See page 286 for details.) Disc slot (See page 306 or details.) Mode selectors (See page 285 for details.) Frequency turning knob (See page 291 for details.) Disc load button (See page 306 for details.) Radio mode: Preset tuning (See page 291 for details.) Tape mode: Side change of cassette tape (See page 303 for details.) DISC mode: Disc selection (See page 309 for details.) Scan button (See page 292 for details.) Cassette tape slot (See page 302 for details.) Stopping and ejecting a cassette tape (See page 302 for details.) 11 Radio mode: Tape/DISC mode: 12 13 Seek tuning (See page 292 for details.) Direct access to a desired program (See page 305 or 310 for details.) Ejecting a disc (See page 307 or details.) Turning the system on and adjusting the volume (See page 285 for details.) 283 AUDIO Using your audio system: some basics Vehicles with navigation system only: This section describes some of the basic features of the Lexus audio system. Some information may not pertain to your system. Your audio system works when the engine switch is selected in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode. G21047a NOTICE To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine is not running. By pushing the button above, you can operate the speech command system. For the operation of the speech command system, see the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”. 284 AUDIO (a) Turning the system on, volume control and mode selection G22003 G22002 Push the “AM (AM·SAT)”, “FM”, “TAPE” or “DISC” button to turn on that mode. The selected mode turns on directly. POWER−VOL: Push this knob to turn the audio system on and off. Turn this knob to adjust the volume. The system turns on in the last mode used. Push these buttons if you want to switch from one mode to another. If the tape or disc is not set, the tape mode or disc mode does not turn on. You can turn off the cassette player by ejecting the cassette tape. If the audio system was previously off, then the entire audio system will be turned off when you eject the cassette tape. If another function was previously playing, it will come on again. 285 AUDIO G22004 Radio mode Disc mode G22067 Tape mode G22052 G22062 Disc mode (for a Mark Levinson audio system) The switches for radio, cassette tape and CD player or DVD player (if a Mark Levinson audio system is installed) operation are displayed on the liquid crystal display. Touch them lightly and directly on the screen. 286 AUDIO The selected switch is highlighted in green, or the bar on the upper side is highlighted in yellow. (b) Tone and balance How good an audio program sounds to you is largely determined by the mix of the treble, mid−range, and bass levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound better with different mixes of treble, mid−range, and bass. G22007 A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear sound levels is also important. Keep in mind that if you are listening to a stereo recording or broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another. BASS “+” or “–”: Adjusts low−pitched tones. MID “+” or “–”: Adjusts mid−pitched tones. TREB “+” or “–”: Adjusts high−pitched tones. “FRONT” or “REAR”: Adjusts sound balance between the front and rear speakers. “L” or “R”: Adjusts sound balance between the left and right speakers. G22004 “OK”: The previous screen returns. Touching the “SOUND” switch on the screen displays the sound adjustment screen. 287 AUDIO (c) DSP control Positioning selector: By selecting the listening position, the system controls the output timing of the speakers to allow sound to be heard evenly, creating the ideal music environment. Touching “CHANGE” the position switches in the following order; all seats, driver’s seat, front seats and rear seats. G22008 To display the DSP control mode, touch the “DSP” switch displayed on the audio control mode screen. You can turn on/off the automatic sound levelizer, or select the position on the DSP screen. Automatic sound levelizer (ASL): When the audio sound becomes difficult to be heard due to road noise, wind noise, etc. during driving, touch the “ASL” switch. The system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone quality according to the noise level. When the system is on, the sound adjustment level is displayed on the screen. 288 The POSITION currently selected is displayed on the screen. AUDIO  If a Mark Levinson brand audio system is installed: (d) Your radio antenna The wire antenna is mounted inside the rear window. NOTICE G22066 Automatic sound levelizer (ASL): When the audio sound becomes difficult to be heard due to road noise, wind noise, etc. during driving, touch the “ASL” switch. The system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone quality according to the noise level. When the system is on, the sound adjustment level is displayed on the screen. SURROUND: If you touch “SURROUND”, surround sound will be enabled.  When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the wire antenna.  Putting a film (especially a conductive or metallic film) on the rear window may affect the reception of radio or mobile telephone. For the installation of the film, consult with your Lexus dealer. (e) Your cassette player When you insert a cassette, the exposed tape should be to the right. NOTICE Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the cassette player. Do not insert anything other than cassette tapes into the slot. 289 AUDIO (f) Your automatic changer Radio operation (a) Listening to the radio G22046 This vehicle is equipped with an automatic changer which can store up to 6 discs, and play selected discs or continuously play all the discs set in the player. When you insert discs into the player, make sure their labels face upward. If the disc is inserted incorrectly, the player will display “CD CHECK” or “DISC CHECK”. NOTICE  Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the CD player or DVD player. Do not insert anything other than discs into the slot.  Do not insert a disc upon another one, or it will damage to the automatic changer. Insert only one disc into the slot at a time. Your CD player or DVD player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only. 290 G22009 Push “AM (AM·SAT)” or “FM” button to choose either an AM or FM band. The “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” screen appears on the display. If your vehicle is equipped with satellite radio broadcast system, when you push the “AM·SAT” button, “AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” station appears on the display. For details about satellite radio broadcast, see “Radio operation (XM satellite radio broadcast)” on page 295 AUDIO (b) Presetting a station G22010 G22004 Turn this knob to step up or down the frequency. Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio switches from stereo to mono reception. In this case, “ST” disappears from the display. 1. Tune in the desired station. 2. Touch one of the station selector switches (1−6) and hold it until a beep is heard. This sets the station to the switch and the frequency appears on the switch. Each switch can store AM, FM1 and FM2. To change the preset station to a different one, follow the same procedure. The preset station memory is cancelled when the power source is interrupted by battery disconnection or a blown fuse. 291 AUDIO (c) Selecting a station Your Lexus has an electronic tuning radio (ETR). Tune in the desired station using one of the following methods. G22021 G22073 Scan tuning:Push the “SCAN” button. “SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will find the next station up or down the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then scan again. To select a station, push the “SCAN” button a second time. Preset tuning: Touch the switch (1−6) or push the “CH DISC ” or “ ” button for the station you want. The switch (1−6) is highlighted in green and station frequency appears on the display. Manual tuning: Turn the “TUNE” knob briefly. When you turn the knob, the radio will step up or down to another frequency. Seek tuning: Push the “SEEK TRACK ” or “ ” button. The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station of the nearest frequency and will stop on reception. Each time you push the button, the stations will be searched out one after another. 292 Preset scan tuning: Push the “SCAN” button and hold it until you hear a beep. “P. SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will tune in the next preset station up or down the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To select a station, push the “SCAN” button a second time. AUDIO (d) RDS (Radio Data System)  MISC.  Program type  ALERT (Emergency message) G22053 G22012 When you touch the “TYPE ” or “TYPE ” switch on the screen, the current program type receiving from RDS station appears on the display. When a program is set, “TYPE SEEK” switch appears. Touch the switch and the system starts to seek the station in the relevant program type. If the system receives no RDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on the display. Traffic program: A station that regularly broadcasts traffic information is automatically located. When you touch the “TRAF” switch, “TRAF SEEK” appears on the display and the radio will start seeking any traffic program station. Each time you touch the “TYPE ” or “TYPE ” switch, the program type changes as in the following:  ROCK  EASY LIS (Easy listening)  CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)  R&B (Rhythm and Blues)  INFORM (Information) If any traffic program station is not found, “NOTHING” appears and the previous mode returns. If the traffic program station is found, the name for traffic program station is displayed and “TRAF” is lit for a while until traffic announcement is received.  RELIGION 293 AUDIO  Radio text G22004 If the system receives a radio text from RDS station, “MSG” appears on the display. Touch the “MSG” switch, and a text message is displayed on the screen. 294 G22013 In case a text message is not accepted in a screen, you can touch the “MSG” switch and hold it to display the rest of the message. When the system can show the station name, “RDS” appears on the display. Each time you touch the “MSG” switch, indication on the display changes from the band to the station name, a radio text in this order. After six seconds passes, indication returns to the band. AUDIO Radio operation (XM satellite radio broadcast) Customers should have their radio ID ready; the radio ID can be found by selecting the “channel 000” on the radio. For details, see the “Displaying the radio ID” that follows. To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in your vehicle, an additional genuine Lexus satellite receiver and antenna must be purchased and installed, and the subscription to the XM satellite radio is necessary. All fees and programming are the responsibility of the XM satellite radio and are subject to change. (a) How to subscribe to an XM satellite radio An XM satellite radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous states. How to subscribe: You must enter into a separate service agreement with the XM radio in order to receive satellite broadcast programming in the vehicle. Additional activation and service subscription fees apply that are not included in the purchase price of the vehicle and optional digital satellite tuner. For complete information on subscription rates and terms, or to subscribe to the XM radio, visit XM on the web at www.xmradio.com or call an XM’s Listener Care at (800) 967−2346. The XM radio is solely responsible for the quality, availability and content of the satellite radio services provided, which are subject to the terms and conditions of the XM radio customer service agreement. Satellite tuner technology notice: Lexus satellite radio tuners are awarded Type Approval Certificates from XM Satellite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibility with the services offered by the XM satellite radio. (b) Displaying the radio ID Each XM tuner is identified with a unique radio ID. You will need the radio ID when activating XM service or when reporting a problem. If you select the “CH 000” using the “TUNE” knob, the ID code of 8 alphanumeric characters appears. If you select another channel, display of the ID code is canceled. The channel (000) alternates the display between the radio ID and the specific radio ID code. 295 AUDIO (c) Listening to the satellite radio G22014 Push the “AM·SAT” button to choose a SAT channel. Besides “AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” appears on the display. 296 G22010 Turn this knob to select the next or previous channel. If you turn continuously, you can rapidly scroll forward or down through the channels. AUDIO (d) Presetting a channel (e) Selecting a channel Tune in the desired channel using one of the following methods. G22015 1. Tune in the desired channel. 2. Touch one of the channel selector switches (1−6) and hold it until a beep is heard. This sets the channel to the switch and the frequency appears on the switch. Each switch can store three SAT channels. To change the preset channel to a different one, follow the same procedure. Preset tuning: Touch the switch (1−6) or push the “CH DISC ” or “ ” button for the channel you want. The switch (1−6) is highlighted in green. Manual tuning within the channel category: Turn the “TUNE” knob. The radio will step up or down the channel. Manual tuning within the current channel category: Push ” or “ ” button. The radio will step up the “SEEK TRACK or down the channel within the current channel category. Touch the “TYPE SEEK” switch. The radio will step up the channel within the current channel category. The preset channel memory is cancelled when the power source is interrupted by battery disconnection or a blown fuse. 297 AUDIO (f) Channel category G22016 To scan the currently selected channel category: Touch the “TYPE SCAN” switch or push the “SCAN” button briefly. “SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will find the next channel in the same channel category, stay there for a few seconds, and then scan again. To select a channel, push the “SCAN” button a second time. To scan the preset channels: Touch the “TYPE SCAN” switch or push the “SCAN” button and hold it until you hear a beep. “P.SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will find the next preset channel, stay there for a few seconds, and then move to the next preset channel. To select a channel, push the “SCAN” button a second time. 298 G22017 Touch either “TYPE ” or “TYPE ” switch to switch to the next or previous category. AUDIO (g) Displaying the title and name G22018 When you touch the “TEXT” switch, the song/program title and the artist name/feature are displayed. Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can be displayed. (Some information will not be fully displayed.) 299 AUDIO (h) If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions When problems occur with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the display. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective action. The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antenna cable is attached securely. ANTENNA A short−circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer. You have not subscribed to the XM satellite radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact the XM satellite radio for subscription information. When a contact is canceled, you can choose the “CH000” and all free−to−air channels. UPDATING NO SIGNAL The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact the XM satellite radio. The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal. LOADING The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information. OFF AIR The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel. −−−−− There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action needed. −−− The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. The XM Listener Care Center is also available on the phone, please call (800) 852−9696 during the following hours: Monday – Saturday: 7 a.m. – 1 a.m. Sunday: 12 p.m – 12 a.m. 300 AUDIO NOTICE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: – Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Information to user Alternation or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s right to operate the equipment. 301 AUDIO NOTICE Cassette tape player operation (a) Playing a cassette tape This XM tuner supports “Audio Services” (Music and Talk) of only XM satellite radio and “Text Information”, linked to the respective “Audio Services”. *Text Information includes, Station Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and Category Name. G22019 When you insert a cassette tape, the exposed tape should face to the right. The player will automatically start when you insert a cassette tape. At this time, the “TAPE” screen appears on the display. If a metal or chrome equivalent cassette tape is put in the cassette player, the player will automatically recognize it and “MTL” appears on the display. To stop or eject the cassette tape, push the “ button. 302 ” (eject) AUDIO (b) Manual program selection G22068 G22069 If a cassette is already in the slot, push the “TAPE” button. Dolby Noise Reduction* feature: If you are listening to a tape that was recorded with Dolby Noise Reduction, touch ” switch. The bar on the upper side will be highlighted the “ in yellow. Touch the switch again to turn off Dolby NR. The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduction, play your tapes with this switch on or off according to the mode used for recording the tape. To play a tape recorded without Dolby NR, touch the switch again to turn off the Dolby NR. Reverse switch: You can reverse the tape by touching the  ” switch or pushing the “CH DISC “ ” or “ ” button. The display will show the opposite direction after reversing the tape. Also if the tape reaches the end of one side, it is automatically reversed to the other side. Fast forward and Rewind switches: You can fast forward or fast rewind by touching the “ ” or “” switch. To stop the tape while it is fast forwarding, touch “”, to stop the tape while it is rewinding, touch “ ”. * Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories double−D symbol Licensing Corporation. 303 AUDIO If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette player will stop and then play the same side. If a tape fast forwards completely, the cassette player will play the other side of the tape using the auto−reverse feature. Auto−reverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the end of a tape, it automatically reverses and begins to play the other side, regardless of whether the cassette was playing or fast forwarding. (c) Automatic program selection G22070 “RPT” switch: The repeat feature automatically replays the current program. Touch the “RPT” switch while the program is playing. When the program ends, it will automatically be rewound and replayed. Touch the switch again to turn off the repeat feature. There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between programs for the repeat feature to work correctly. “SKIP” switch: The skip feature allows you to fast forward past long stretches of blank tape. This is especially useful at the end of cassettes. Touch the “SKIP” switch. The player will automatically skip any blank portions of 15 seconds or more and play the next program. To cancel it, touch the switch once again. 304 AUDIO When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically reverses sides and resumes normal play. G22134 “Automatic program selection” button: The automatic program selection feature allows you to program your cassette player to skip forward or backward to locate the song you want to hear. You can skip up to 9 programs at a time. Push the “SEEK TRACK ”button to skip forward. “FF” and the number will appear on the display. Push the button until the number you want to skip appears on the display. After that, the player will automatically skip forward. ” button on the lower side to skip Push the “SEEK TRACK backward. Push the button until “REW” and the number you want to skip appear on the display.  If you set “REW 1”, the player will rewind to the beginning of the current program.  When counting the number of programs you want to rewind, remember to count the current program as well. For example, if you want to rewind to a song that is two before the song you are listening to, push this button until “REW 3” appears on the display. When the beginning of the tape is reached, the player automatically resumes normal play. There must be at least 5 seconds of blank space between programs for this feature to work correctly. “RPT”, “SKIP” or “Automatic program selection” features: These features may not work well with some spoken word, live or classical recordings. 305 AUDIO CD player operation 2. Insert only one disc while the CD door is open. (a) Inserting or ejecting CDs You can set a disc at the lowest empty disc number. The engine switch must be in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode. After insertion, the set disc is automatically loaded. Your automatic changer can store up to 6 discs. If the label faces downward, the disc cannot be played. In this case, “CD CHECK” appears on the display. If you need to insert the next disc, repeat the same procedure to insert another disc.  Setting all the discs: G22022 1. Push the “LOAD” button until you hear a beep. The green indicators at both ends of the slot start blinking and “WAIT” appears on the display. After the blinking indicators stay on and the “WAIT” changes to the “LOAD”, the CD door opens. 2. Insert only one disc while the CD door is open.  Setting a single CD: The CD door closes and “WAIT” appears again. 1. Push the “LOAD” button briefly. 3. Insert the next disc after the “WAIT” changes to the “LOAD” and the CD door opens. The green indicators at both ends of the slot start blinking and “WAIT” appears on the display. After the blinking indicators stay on and the “WAIT” changes to the “LOAD”, the CD door opens. 4. Repeat this procedure until you insert all the discs. To cancel the operation, push the “LOAD” or “DISC” button. If you do not insert the discs within 15 seconds after pushing the “LOAD” button and “LOAD” is displayed, the operation will be canceled automatically. 306 AUDIO NOTICE Do not insert one disc stacked on top of another one or feed them in continuously, to prevent discs from getting stuck in the player. G22023  Ejecting a single CD: 1. Push the “CH DISC ” or “ ” button to highlight the disc number you want to eject. 2. Push the “ ” (eject) button for the CD briefly. At this time, the green indicators of the slot start blinking.  Ejecting all the discs: Push the “ beep. ” (eject) button for the CD until you hear a 307 AUDIO (b) Playing a CD G22052 G22026 The numbers of the trays where the CD is not set are dimmed. Push the “DISC” button if CDs are already loaded in the player. The “CD CHANGER” screen appears on the display. The discs set in the player are played continuously, starting with the last disc you inserted. The disc number of the disc currently being played, the track number and the time from the beginning of the program are shown on the display. When play of one disc ends, the first track of the following disc starts. When play of the final disc ends, play of the first disc starts again. The player will skip any empty disc trays. 308 AUDIO (c) Selecting a desired disc (d) Searching for a desired disc G22118 G22056 On the screen: Touch the desired disc number. Touch the “DISC SCAN” switch. The selected disc number is highlighted in green. With the bar on the upper side highlighted in yellow, the program at the beginning of each disc will be played for 10 seconds. To continue listening to the program of your choice, touch the “DISC SCAN” switch a second time. The player will start playing the selected disc from the first track. On the audio panel: Push the “CH DISC ” or “ ” button. When you release the button, the player will start playing the selected disc from the first track. After all the tracks are scanned in one pass, normal play resumes. 309 AUDIO (e) Selecting a desired track G22115 “SEEK TRACK” button: Use for direct access to a desired track. Push the “SEEK TRACK ” or “ ”button and hold it until the desired track number appears on the display. As you release the button, the player will start playing the selected track from the beginning. Fast forward: Touch the “ ” switch and hold it to fast forward the disc. When you release the switch, the CD player will resume playing from that position. Reverse: Touch the “ ” switch and hold it to reverse the disc. When you release the switch, the CD player will resume playing. 310 (f) Searching for a desired track G22058 Touch the “SCAN” switch. The bar on the upper side is highlighted in yellow. The CD player will play the next track for 10 seconds, then scan again. To select a track, touch the “SCAN” switch a second time. If the player reaches the end of the disc, it will continue scanning at track 1. After all the tracks are scanned in one pass, normal play resumes. AUDIO (g) Other CD player functions “DISC RAND” switch: Use it for automatic track selection for all the discs and play by the system. When the switch is touched, the system selects a track in all the discs which are set and plays it. To cancel it, touch the switch once again. G22072 When a track is skipped or the system is inoperative, touch the switch to reset. “RAND” switch: Use it for automatic and random selection of the disc which you are currently listening to. “RPT” switch: Use it for automatic repeat of the track you are currently listening to. Touch the switch while the track is playing. When the track is finished, the player will automatically go back to the beginning of the track and play the track again. To cancel it, touch the switch once again. When the switch is touched, the system selects a track in the disc you are currently listening to. To cancel it, touch the switch once again. “TITLE” switch: Use it for displaying the disc title and track title while the CD−TEXT disc is playing. “DISC RPT” switch: Use it for automatic repeat of the disc you are currently listening to. Touch the switch while the disc is playing. When the disc is finished, the player will automatically go back to the beginning of the disc and play the disc again. To cancel it, touch the button once again. 311 AUDIO (h) If the player malfunctions If the player or another unit equipped with the player malfunctions, our audio system will display one of the following error messages. G22078 If “CD CHECK” appears on the display: It indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged or it was inserted up side down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly. If “CD ERROR” appears on the display: The following causes are possible. Up to 29 letters can be displayed. “NO TITLE” is displayed while the CD−TEXT disc is not playing. To cancel it, touch the “TITLE OFF” switch.  There is trouble inside the system. Eject the disc.  The inside of the player unit may be too hot due to the very high ambient temperature. Eject the disc and allow the player to cool down. If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. 312 AUDIO DVD player operation (For a Mark Levinson brand audio system) (a) Inserting or ejecting discs The DVD player can play audio CDs, DVD video discs and video CDs. Your automatic changer can store up to 6 discs. The engine switch must be in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode. For appropriate discs for this paper, see “Audio system operating hints” on page 339. For safety reasons, you can enjoy DVD video discs and video CDs only when the vehicle is completely stopped with the engine switch in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode and the parking brake applied. While you are driving, you can hear audio alone even in the DVD video or video CD mode. G22048 The DVD player can play the discs labeled as shown below.  Setting a single disc: 1. Push the “LOAD” button briefly. The green indicators at both ends of the slot start blinking and “WAIT” appears on the display. After the blinking indicators stay on and the “WAIT” changes to the “LOAD”, the DVD door opens. 313 AUDIO 2. Insert only one disc while the DVD door is open. You can set a disc at the lowest empty disc number. After insertion, the set disc is automatically loaded. If the label faces downward, the disc cannot be played. In this case, “DISC CHECK” appears on the display. If you need to insert the next disc, repeat the same procedure to insert another disc.  Setting all the discs: 1. Push the “LOAD” button until you hear a beep. The green indicators at both ends of the slot start blinking and “WAIT” appears on the display. After the blinking indicators stay on and the “WAIT” changes to the “LOAD”, the DVD door opens. 2. Insert only one disc while the DVD door is open. The DVD door closes and “WAIT” appears again. 3. Insert the next disc after the “WAIT” changes to the “LOAD” and the DVD door opens. 4. Repeat this procedure until you insert all the discs. To cancel the operation, push the “LOAD” or “DISC” button. If you do not insert the discs within 15 seconds after pushing the “LOAD” button and “LOAD” is displayed, the operation will be canceled automatically. 314 NOTICE Do not insert one disc stacked on top of another one or feed them in continuously, to prevent discs from getting stuck in the player. AUDIO G22049  Ejecting a single disc alone: G22062 The numbers of the trays where the disc is not set are dimmed. 1. Push the “CH DISC ” or “ ” button to highlight the disc number you want to eject. 2. Push the “ ” (eject) button for the disc briefly. At this time, the green indicators of the slot start blinking.  Ejecting all the discs: Push the “ a beep. ” (eject) button for the disc until you hear 315 AUDIO (b) Playing a disc G22050 Push the “DISC” button if discs are already loaded in the player. The “DVD CHANGER” screen appears on the display. The discs set in the player are played continuously, starting with the last disc you inserted. The disc number of the disc currently being played, the track number and the time from the beginning of the program are shown on the display. When play of one disc ends, the first track of the following disc starts. When play of the final disc ends, play of the first disc starts again. The player will skip any empty disc trays. 316 (c) Selecting a desired disc G22114 On the screen: Touch the desired disc number. The selected disc number is highlighted in green. The player will start playing the selected disc from the first track. On the audio panel: Push the “CH DISC ” or “ ” button. When you release the button, the player will start playing the selected disc from the first track. AUDIO (d) Operating an audio CD Selecting a desired track— Playing an audio CD— G22062 Push the “AUDIO” button to display this screen. You can operate the switches and choose the number of the disc you want to play. The selected disc is automatically played. G22112 “SEEK TRACK” button: Use for direct access to a desired track. Push the “SEEK TRACK ” or “ ” button and hold it until the desired track number appears on the display. As you release the button, the player will start playing the selected track from the beginning. Fast forward: Touch the “ ” switch and hold it to fast forward the disc. When you release the switch, the player will resume playing from that position. Reverse: Touch the “ ” switch and hold it to reverse the disc. When you release the switch, the player will resume playing. 317 AUDIO Searching for a desired track or a disc— G22061 Touch the “SCAN” switch. The bar on the upper side will be highlighted in yellow. The player will play the next track for 10 seconds, then scan again. To select a track, touch the “SCAN” switch a second time. If the player reaches the end of the disc, it will continue scanning at track 1. G22111 “RPT” switch: Use it for automatic repeat of the track you are currently listening to. Touch the switch while the track is playing. When the track is finished, the player will automatically go back to the beginning of the track and play the track again. To cancel it, touch the switch once again. After all the tracks are scanned in one pass, normal play resumes. “DISC RPT” switch: Use it for automatic repeat of the disc you are currently listening to. Touch the “DISK SCAN” switch. Touch the switch while the disc is playing. When the disc is finished, the player will automatically go back to the beginning of the disc and play the disc again. To cancel it, touch the switch once again. The bar on the upper side will be highlighted in yellow. The program at the beginning of each disc will be played for 10 seconds. To continue listening to the program of your choice, touch the “DISC SCAN” switch a second time. After all the audio disc are scanned in one pass, normal play resumes. 318 Other functions— “RAND” switch: Use it for automatic and random selection of the disc which you are currently listening to. AUDIO When the switch is touched, the system selects a track in the disc you are currently listening to. To cancel it, touch the switch once again. “DISC RAND” switch: Use it for automatic track selection for all the audio discs and play by the system. When the switch is touched, the system selects a track in all the audio discs which are set and plays it. To cancel it, touch the switch once again. G22079 “TITLE” switch: Use it for displaying the disc title and track title while the CD−TEXT disc is playing. Up to 29 letters can be displayed. “NO TITLE” is displayed while the CD−TEXT disc is not playing. To cancel it, touch the “TITLE OFF” switch. 319 AUDIO (e) Operating a DVD video disc NOTE: The playback condition of some DVD video discs may be determined by a DVD video software producer. This DVD player plays a disc as the software producer intended. So some functions may not work properly. Be sure to read the instruction manual for the DVD video disc separately provided. For the detailed information about DVD video discs, see “(h) DVD player and DVD video disc information” Precautions on DVD video disc When recording with a DVD video or video CD, audio tracks may not record in some cases while the menu is displayed. As audio will not play in this case, verify that the video tracks are playing and then activate playback. When playback of a disc is completed:  If an audio CD is playing, the next CD will be selected and playback will begin automatically.  If a DVD video or video CD is playing, playback will stop or the menu screen will be displayed. The next disc will not play back automatically. (Audio tracks cannot be heard while the disc is stopped) The title/chapter number and playback time display may not appear while playing back certain DVD video discs. 320 CAUTION Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source. The louder sounds may have a significant impact on the human body or pose a driving hazard. Keep this in mind when you adjust the volume. AUDIO Playing a DVD video disc— G22117 The “DVD Hint !” screen appears when the video screen is first displayed after you select the engine switch in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode. Touch the “OK” switch when you read the message. G22064 Push the “AUDIO” button to display this screen. You can operate the switches and choose the number of the disc you want to play. The selected disc is automatically played. When you touch the “WIDE MODE” switch, the screen mode can be changed. When you touch the “PICTURE” switch, the video screen returns. 321 AUDIO Displaying operation switches— “Page 2” switch: Use this switch to display the operation switches on the second page. “Page 1” switch: Use this switch to display the operation switches on the top page. G22033 G22034 If you touch a part of the screen, where switches are not located while you are watching video, DVD video operation switches will appear. 322 “Hide Buttons” switch: Use this switch to turn off the operation switches from the display. If “ ” appears on the display when you touch a switch, the operation relevant to the switch is not permitted. AUDIO Description of each switch—  Switches on top page “Menu” and “Top Menu” switches: If you touch any of the above switches, the menu screen for DVD video appears. (For the operation, see the manual that come with the DVD video disc provided separately.) ” switch: The menu control key appears on the screen. “ (See page 324.) ” switch: Use this switch to pause the video screen. “ When you touch this switch again, the video screen advances frame by frame. “ ” switch: Touch this switch to fast reverse during playback and reverse slowly during pause.  Switches on second page “Set Up” switch: The initial setup screen appears. (See page 326.) “Search” switch: The title search screen appears. (See page 324.) “Return” switch: Use this switch to display the predetermined scene and start playing from there. “Audio” switch: The audio changing screen appears. (See page 325.) “Sub Title” switch: The subtitle changing screen appears. (See page 325.) “Angle” switch: The angle selection screen appears. (See page 326.) “” switch: Use this switch to resume normal play after stop or pause. “” switch: Touch this switch to fast forward during playback and forward slowly during pause. 323 AUDIO Selecting a menu item— G22035 Enter the menu item using “ ”, “”, “ ” or “ ” switches and touch “Enter”. The player starts playing video for that menu item. (For details, see the manual that comes with the DVD video disc provided separately.) Each time you touch“Move Buttons” switch, the switches on the screen move upward and downward. When you touch “OFF” switch, the displayed switches are not displayed. To display them again, touch “ON” switch. Touch “Back”, and the previous screen returns. 324 Searching by title— G22036 Enter the title number using “–”, “+” and “+10” switches and touch “Enter”. The player starts playing video for that title number. When you push “SEEK TRACK select a chapter. ” or “ ” button, you can Touch “Back”, and the previous screen returns. AUDIO Changing the subtitle language— G22037 Changing the audio language— G22038 Each time you touch “Sub title”, the language is selected from the ones stored in the discs and changed. Each time you touch “Audio”, the language is selected from the ones stored in the discs and changed. To turn off the subtitle, touch “Hide”. Touch “Back”, and the previous screen returns. Touch “Back”, and the previous screen returns. 325 AUDIO Changing the angle— G22039 326 Setup menu— G22040 The angle can be selected for discs that are multi−angle compatible when the angle mark appears on the display. The initial setting can be changed. Each time you touch “Angle”, the angle changes. You can change the audio language. Touch “Back”, and the previous screen returns. 1. Touch “Audio Lang.”. 2. Touch the language you want to hear on the “Select Audio Lang.” screen and “Enter”. If you cannot find the language you want to hear on this screen, touch “Others” and enter a language code. For the entry of language code, see the following “Entry of language code—” on page 328.  Audio language AUDIO  Subtitle language You can change the subtitle language. 1. Touch “Subtitle Lang.”. 2. Touch a language you want to read on the “Select Subtitle Lang.” screen and “Enter”. If you cannot find the language you want to read on this screen, touch “Others” and enter a language code. For the entry of language code, see the following “Entry of language code—” on page 328.  DVD language You can change the language on the DVD video menu. 1. Touch “DVD Language”. 2. Touch the language you want to read on the “Select DVD Language” screen and “Enter”. If you cannot find the language you want to read on this screen, touch “Others” and enter a language code. For the entry of language code, see the following “Entry of language code—” on page 328.  Angle mark The multi−angle mark can be turned on or off on the screen while the disc which is multi−angle compatible is being played. Each time you touch “Angle Mark”, the angle mark on the display turns on or off alternately.  Parental The level of viewer restrictions can be changed. 1. Touch “Parental”. 2. Touch the numbers of your personal code on the “Enter personal code” screen and touch “Enter”. If you enter the wrong numbers, touch “Clear” to delete the numbers. 10 touches of “Clear” will initialize the personal code. 3. Touch a parental level (1−8) on the “Select Restriction Level” and “Enter”. When you touch “Default”, all the settings except “Parental”of this menu will be initialized. 327 AUDIO Entry of language code— G22041 If you touch “Others” on the “Select Audio Lang.” screen, “Select Subtitle Lang.” screen or “Select DVD language” screen, you can select the language you want to hear or read by entering a language code. 1. Touch the numbers of the language code. If you enter the wrong numbers, touch “Clear” to delete the numbers. 2. Touch “Enter”. 328 Code Language 1001 Japanese 0514 English 0618 French 0405 German 0920 Italian 0519 Spanish 2608 Chinese 1412 Dutch 1620 Portuguese 1922 Swedish 1821 Russian 1115 Korean 0512 Greek 0101 Afar 0102 Abkhazian 0106 Afrikaans 0113 Amharic 0118 Arabic 0119 Assamese 0125 Aymara 0126 Azerbaijani 0201 Bashkir 0205 Byelorussian 0207 Bulgarian 0208 Bihari AUDIO 0209 Bislama 0714 Guarani 0214 Bengali 0721 Gujarati 0215 Tibetan 0801 Hausa 0218 Breton 0809 Hindi 0301 Catalan 0818 Croatian 0315 Corsican 0821 Hungarian 0319 Czach 0825 Armenian 0325 Welsh 0901 Interlingua 0401 Danish 0905 Interlingue 0426 Bhutani 0911 Inupiak 0515 Esperanto 0914 Indonesian 0520 Estonian 0919 Icelandic 0521 Basque 0923 Hebrew 0601 Persian 1009 Yiddish 0609 Finnish 1023 Javanese 0610 Fiji 1101 Georgian 0615 Faroese 1111 Kazakh 0625 Frisian 1112 Greenlandic 0701 Irish 1113 Cambodian 0704 Scots−Gaelic 1114 Kannada 0712 Galician 1119 Kashmiri 329 AUDIO 330 1121 Kurdish 1513 (Afan)Oromo 1125 Kirghiz 1518 Oriya 1201 Latin 1601 Panjabi 1214 Lingala 1612 Polish 1215 Laothian 1619 “Pashto,Pushto” 1220 Lithuanian 1721 Quechua 1222 Latvian 1813 Rhaeto−Romance 1307 Malagasy 1814 Kirundi 1309 Maori 1815 Romanian 1311 Macedonian 1823 Kinyarwanda 1312 Malayalam 1901 Sanskrit 1314 Mongolian 1904 Sindhi 1315 Moldavian 1907 Sangho 1318 Marathi 1908 Serbo−Croatian 1319 Malay 1909 Sinhalese 1320 Maltese 1911 Slovak 1325 Burmese 1912 Slovenian 1401 Nauru 1913 Samoan 1405 Nepali 1914 Shona 1415 Norwegian 1915 Somali 1503 Occitan 1917 Albanian AUDIO 1918 Serbian 2209 Vietnamese 1919 Siswati 2215 Volapük 1920 Sesotho 2315 Wolof 1921 Sundanese 2408 Xhosa 1923 Swahili 2515 Yoruba 2001 Tamil 2621 Zulu 2005 Telugu 2007 Tajik 2008 Thai 2009 Tigrinya 2011 Turkmen 2012 Tagalog 2014 Setswana 2015 Tonga 2018 Turkish 2019 Tsonga 2020 Tatar 2023 Twi 2111 Ukrainian 2118 Urdu 2126 Uzbek 331 AUDIO (f) Operating a video CD Displaying operation switches— Playing a video CD— G22065 G22043 Push the “AUDIO” button to display this screen. You can operate the switches and choose the number of the disc you want to play. When you touch the “WIDE MODE” switch, the screen mode can be changed. When you touch the “PICTURE” switch, the video screen returns. G22044 If you touch the part where switches are not located while you are watching video on the video CD, video CD operation switches will appear. 332 AUDIO “Page 2” switch: Use this switch to display the operation switches on the second page. Description of each switch—  Switches on top page “Page 1” switch: Use this switch to display the operation switches on the top page. “Select Number” switch: The track or number search screen appears. (See “Searching by track” that follows.) “Hide Buttons” switch: Use this switch to turn off the operation switches from the display. “Prev. Menu” switch: When you touch this switch while the disc menu is displayed, the previous page appears on the screen. If you touch this switch while the player is playing video, the previous track is searched and played. If “ ” appears on the display when you touch the switch, the operation is not permitted. “Next Menu” switch: When you touch this switch while the disc menu is displayed, the next page appears on the display. If you touch this switch while the player is playing video, the next track is searched and played. “Main/Sub” switch: A multiplex transmission changing switch. The mode changes from Main/Sub to Main, to Sub and back to Main/Sub by touching this switch. 333 AUDIO  Switches on second page Searching by track— “ ” switch: Use this switch to pause the video screen. When you touch this switch again, the video screen advance frame by frame. “ ” switch: Touch this switch to fast reverse during playback. “” switch: Touch this switch during pause to resume playing. G22045 “” switch: Touch this switch to fast forward during the playback and start playing slowly during pause. Enter the track numbers using “–”, “+” and “+10” switches and touch “Enter”. The player starts playing video for that title number. You can select a track number by pushing “SEEK TRACK or “ ” button. Touch “Back”, and the previous screen returns. 334 ” AUDIO (g) If the player malfunctions (h) DVD player and DVD video disc information If the player or another unit equipped with the player malfunction, your audio system will display the following messages. DVD video discs— If “DISC CHECK” appears on the display: It indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or it was inserted upside down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly. If “NO DISC” appears on the display: It indicates that there is no disc in the DVD player. If “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on the display: It indicates that the DVD region code is not set properly. If “DVD ERROR” appears on the display: It indicates that the inside of the player unit may be too hot due to the very high ambient temperature. Eject a disc from the player and allow the player to cool down. If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. This DVD player conforms to NTSC color TV formats. The DVD video disc conforming to another formats such as PAL or SECAM cannot be used. Region codes: Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating a country where you can use the DVD video disc on this DVD player. If the DVD video disc is not labeled as “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it on this DVD player. If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc on this player, “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on the screen. Even if the DVD video disc does not have a region code, there is a case that you cannot use it. Marks shown on DVD video discs: Indicates NTSC format of color TV. Indicates the number of audio tracks. Indicates the number of language subtitles. Indicates the number of angles. 335 AUDIO Indicates the screen to be selected. Wide screen: 16 : 9 Standard: 4 : 3 Indicates a region code by which this video disc can be played. ALL: in all countries Number: region code DVD video disc glossary— DVD video discs: Digital versatile disc that holds video. DVD video discs have adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored. Variable rate encoded technology in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is changed depending on the picture format has also been adopted. Audio data is stored using PCM and Dolby digital, which enables higher quality of sound. Furthermore, multi−angle and multi−language features will also help you enjoy the more advanced technology of DVD video. Viewer restrictions: This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with a level of restrictions of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc. Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes. Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played. Level 2 − 7: DVD video discs for children and G−rated movie can be played. Level 8: All types of the DVD video discs can be played. Multi−angle feature: You can enjoy the same scene at different angles. Multi−language feature: You can select a language of the subtitle and audio. Region codes: The region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the DVD video disc does not have the same region code as the DVD player, you cannot play the disc on the DVD player. For region codes, see page 335. 336 AUDIO Audio: This DVD player can play liner PCM, Dolby digital and MPEG audio format DVD. Other decoded type cannot be played. Audio remote control (steering switches) Title and chapter: Video and audio programs stored in DVD video disc are divided in parts by title and chapter. Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs. Usually, one piece of movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title. G22051 Chapter: The unit smaller than that of title. A title comprises plural chapters. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double−D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. 1992−1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. The steering switches are installed on the left side of the steering wheel. “MODE” switch: Use this switch to change the mode. If a tape or disc is not inserted, the “TAPE” or “DISC” mode is skipped. When you push the switch with the audio system turned off, the audio system turns on. “VOL” switches: Use these switches to adjust the volume. Push “ +” to increase the volume and “ – ” to decrease the volume. The volume continues to increase or decrease while the switch is being pressed. “DTS” is a trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. 337 AUDIO (a) When the radio mode is selected ” or “ ”switch: Push this switch for seek tuning or to “ select a station. “ ” or “ ”switch: Use this switch to select a desired track, disc or chapter.  Push this switch briefly to select a station that you assigned to a switch on the audio system.  Push this switch briefly to select a desired track or chapter.  Push this switch and hold it until you hear a beep. The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station, and will stop on reception. (b) When the “TAPE” mode is selected ” or “ ”switch: Push this switch to fast forward, rewind “ the tape or for automatic program selection.  Push this switch until you hear a beep to fast forward or rewind the tape. To stop fast forwarding or rewinding, push the same side on the switch until you hear a beep.  Push this switch briefly for automatic program selection. When automatically selecting a program, you can skip up to 9 programs at a time. See page 305 for details. (c) When the “DISC” mode is selected “ ” or “ or disc. ”switch: Use this switch to select a desired track  Push this switch briefly to select a desired track.  Push and hold this switch until you hear a beep to select a desired disc. 338  Push and hold this switch until you hear a beep to select a desired disc. CAUTION Operate the steering switches with due care while you are driving to avoid accidents. AUDIO Audio system operating hints Caring for your cassette player and tapes For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes: NOTICE To ensure correct audio system operations:  Be careful not to spill beverages over the audio system.  Do not put anything other than a cassette tape or disc into the cassette tape slot or disc slot.  The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle may cause a noise from the speakers of the audio system which you are listening to. However, this does not indicate a malfunction. Radio reception FM broadcasts have a range of about 40 km or 25 miles. When driving away from a station, you may have to fine−tune your radio and turn up the volume as the station gets weaker. Because FM uses a line−of−sight signal, tall buildings or hills may sometimes block reception. These are all normal characteristics of FM reception and do not indicate any problem with the radio itself. Clean the tape head and other parts regularly.  A dirty tape head or tape path can decrease sound quality and tangle your cassette tapes. The easiest way to clean them is by using a cleaning tape. (A wet type is recommended.) Use high−quality cassettes:  Low−quality cassette tapes can cause many problems, including poor sound, inconsistent playing speed, and constant auto−reversing. They can also get stuck or tangled in the cassette player.  Do not use a cassette if it has been damaged or tangled or if its label is peeling off.  Do not leave a cassette in the player if you are not listening to it, especially if it is hot outside.  Store cassettes in their cases and out of direct sunlight.  Avoid using cassettes with a total playing time longer than 100 minutes (50 minutes per side). The tape used in these cassettes is thin and could get stuck or tangled in the cassette player. 339 AUDIO Caring for your CD player or DVD player, and discs  Your CD player or DVD player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.  Extremely high temperature can keep your CD player or DVD player from working. On hot days, use air conditioning to cool the vehicle interior before you listen to a disc. 20L037  Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make your CD player or DVD player skip.  If moisture gets into your CD player or DVD player, you may not hear any sound even though the player appears to be working. Eject all discs from the player and wait until the player dries. CAUTION CD players or DVD players use an invisible laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed outside the unit. Be sure to operate the player correctly. 340 CD player  Use only CDs marked as shown above. The following products may not be playable on your CD player. Copy−protected CD CD−R (CD−Recordable) CD−RW (CD−Re−writable) CD−ROM AUDIO Audio CDs DVD video discs 20L480 Video CDs DVD player Special shaped discs  Use only discs marked as shown above. The following products may not be playable on your DVD player. SACD dts−CD Copy−protected CD CD−R(CD−Recordable) CD−RW(CD−Re−writable) CD−ROM DVD−R DVD+R DVD−RW DVD+RW DVD−ROM DVD−RAM 21z017 Transparent/translucent discs 341 AUDIO 20L481 Low quality discs 20L482 Labeled discs NOTICE  Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent, low quality or labeled discs such as those shown in the illustrations. The use of such discs may damage the player or changer, or it may be impossible to eject the disc.  This system is not designed for use of dual discs. Do not use dual discs because it may cause damage to the player or changer. 342 AUDIO 20L038 Correct Wrong  Handle discs carefully, especially when you set them into the player. Hold them on the edge and do not bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny side. 20L039 To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint−free cloth that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line from the center to the edge of the disc (not in a circle). Do not use a conventional record cleaner or anti−static device.  Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or other disc damage could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.) 343 AUDIO 344 SECTION 3–1 STARTING AND DRIVING Starting and driving Three−way catalytic converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine exhaust caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating the engine switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic throttle control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intuitive parking assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear view monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic radar cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptive variable suspension system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle stability control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hill−start assist control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable gear ratio steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle dynamics integrated management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric power steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre−collision system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 347 348 358 359 371 372 395 398 401 424 424 427 429 431 432 433 438 438 440 449 345 STARTING AND DRIVING THREE−WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS Three−way catalytic converters are emission control devices installed in the exhaust system. The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the exhaust gas. CAUTION G31042 GS430  Keep people and combustible materials away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very hot.  Do not drive, idle or park your vehicle over anything that might burn easily such as grass, leaves, paper or rags. NOTICE A large amount of unburned gases flowing into the three−way catalytic converter may cause it to overheat and create a fire hazard. To prevent this and other damage, observe the following precautions: G31043 GS300 346  Use only unleaded gasoline.  Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level; running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, creating an excessive load on the three−way catalytic converter.  Do not allow the engine to run at idle speed for more than 20 minutes. STARTING AND DRIVING  Avoid racing the engine. ENGINE EXHAUST CAUTION  Do not push−start or pull−start your vehicle.  Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle is moving. CAUTION  Keep your engine in good running order. Malfunctions in the engine electrical system, electronic ignition system or fuel system could cause an extremely high three−way catalytic converter temperature.  Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust. It contains carbon monoxide, which is a colorless and odorless gas. It can cause unconsciousness or even death.  If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, take your vehicle in for a check−up as soon as possible. Remember, your Lexus dealer knows your vehicle and its three−way catalytic converter system best.  To ensure that the three−way catalytic converter and the entire emission control system operate properly, your vehicle must receive the periodic inspections required by the Lexus Maintenance Schedule. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.  Make sure the exhaust system has no holes or loose connections. The system should be checked from time to time. If you hit something, or notice a change in the sound of the exhaust, have the system checked immediately.  Do not run the engine in a garage or enclosed area except for the time needed to drive the vehicle in or out. The exhaust gases cannot escape, making this a particularly dangerous situation.  Do not remain for a long time in a parked vehicle with the engine running. If it is unavoidable, however, do so only in an unconfined area and adjust the heating or cooling system to force outside air into the vehicle.  Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. An open or unsealed trunk lid may cause exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. 347 STARTING AND DRIVING  To allow proper operation of your vehicle’s ventilation system, keep the inlet grilles in front of the windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other obstructions. OPERATING THE ENGINE SWITCH  If you smell exhaust fumes in the vehicle, open the windows and close the trunk lid to ensure plenty of fresh air enters the vehicle. If you can smell exhaust fumes even though there are no other vehicles in the surrounding area, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. Continued inhalation of exhaust fumes can lead to death by gas poisoning. G31030a  1 Electronic key 2 Engine switch 3 Automatic transmission selector lever 4 Brake pedal 348 STARTING AND DRIVING Engine switch In the following conditions, the system malfunctions. Contact your Lexus dealer.  If the engine switch is not illuminated when the clearance lights are turned on.  If the engine switch indicator light flashes amber. G31031a  If the switch movement seems unusual. If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, press the engine switch for more than 3 seconds. At this time, “ACC” mode is selected. CAUTION By pushing the engine switch with an electronic key in possession, you can select “ACC”, “IG−ON” or “OFF” mode and start or stop the engine. (For details, see “Selecting the mode” on page 350 and “Starting the engine” on page 356 and “Stopping the engine” on page 357.)  Do not press the engine switch during driving, except in an emergency situation.  If you leave your vehicle in hot weather, the switch surface may get hot. Take care not to get burned. When an electronic key is in the vehicle, it is automatically detected and checked if it corresponds to the registered ID code for the vehicle, thereby allowing engine operation and mode selection. Press the engine switch slowly and firmly. Quick operation may not activate the desired mode. 349 STARTING AND DRIVING NOTICE Observe the following instructions, or the engine switch may not work properly.  The switch should be operated with your clean finger. Do not use an oily or dirty finger.  Be careful not to spill water or other liquid on the switch. Do not modify the engine switch without consulting your Lexus dealer. Doing so may cause system problem. Selecting the mode “OFF” mode G31076 “ACC” mode “IG−ON” mode To select “ACC”, “IG−ON” or “OFF” mode, press the engine switch while carrying an electronic key with the selector lever in the “P” position, and the brake pedal not depressed. Each time you press the engine switch, the mode changes in order of “OFF”, “ACC”, “IG−ON” mode then back to “OFF” mode. To start the engine in each mode, push the engine switch while the brake pedal is depressed. For details, see “Starting the engine” on page 356. 350 STARTING AND DRIVING “ACC” mode “IG−ON” mode G31033 G31034 This mode allows some accessories to be operable such as the radio, even if the engine is not running. An amber indicator light turns on at the engine switch. “IG−ON” mode has two conditions: all gauges, meters and accessories on and the engine is not running, or engine running. To select the “ACC” mode from “OFF” mode, push the engine switch once without depressing the brake pedal. The engine immobilizer is disabled and the security indicator light goes out. (For details, see “Engine immobilizer” on page 12.) To select the “IG−ON” mode while the engine is not running: If you cycle once through all the modes (“OFF”, “ACC”, “IG−ON”) with the driver’s door closed, the second time you select the “ACC” mode, the above message will appear for a few seconds. If the vehicle is left in “ACC” mode for about an hour, the engine switch is automatically off.  From “OFF” mode—push the engine switch twice without depressing the brake pedal.  From “ACC” mode—push the engine switch once without depressing the brake pedal. The engine switch indicator light will be illuminated amber if the engine is not running, and will turn off when the engine is running. If the driver’s door is opened with the transmission in “P”, a buzzer will remind you in “ACC” mode. 351 STARTING AND DRIVING If you push the engine switch while the brake pedal is depressed with the transmission not in “P” or “N”, “IG−ON” mode is selected with the engine not running. “OFF” mode It is not a malfunction if the needles on all meters and gauges move slightly when selected in “IG−ON” mode. NOTICE G31032 Do not leave the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode while the engine is not running. The battery will be discharged. This mode turns the engine and all accessories off. To select the “OFF” mode, be sure that the selector lever is in “P” and then turn the engine switch to “OFF”. To select the “OFF” mode from “IG−ON” mode:  If the engine is not running, push the engine switch once while the brake pedal is not depressed.  If the engine is running, push the engine switch once regardless of brake pedal position while the vehicle is completely stopped. To select the “OFF” mode from “ACC” mode, push the engine switch twice while the brake pedal is not depressed. The engine immobilizer is automatically set, the security indicator light blinks and the engine switch indicator light is turned off. (For details, see “Engine immobilizer” on page 12.) 352 STARTING AND DRIVING Steering lock The steering wheel is locked when the engine switch is turned to “OFF” from “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode and any door is opened. When the steering lock is activated, you may hear a sound coming from the steering column, it is not a malfunction. If you select the “OFF” mode while any door is open, the steering wheel is not locked until it is closed. G31045 If you select the mode other than “OFF” or start the engine, the steering lock is disabled. If there is trouble somewhere in the steering lock system, either of the following warning messages will appear on the multi−information display.  S/T IS NOT UNLOCKED  CHECK S/T LOCK When pushing the engine switch while the brake pedal is depressed, the steering lock is not unlocked if load is applied to the steering wheel, and the above message appears. The engine will not start. At this time, the master warning light comes on and the engine switch indicator light blinks green. 353 STARTING AND DRIVING G31046 To start the engine in this condition, push the engine switch again while turning the steering wheel in either direction as shown in the above illustration. The steering wheel is unlocked, and the engine will start. 354 G31047 If the steering lock system is malfunctioning, the above message appears. At this time, the master warning light comes on and the engine switch indicator light blinks amber. The engine will not start. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer. STARTING AND DRIVING How to start the engine BEFORE CRANKING Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions. 1. Apply the parking brake firmly. CRANKING HOLD FUNCTION 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories. Once you push the engine switch while the brake pedal is depressed, the cranking hold function continues to crank the engine in “IG−ON” mode until it starts. 3. Put the selector lever in ”P”. If you need to restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, put the selector lever in ”N”. A starter safety device will prevent the starter from operating if the selector lever is in any drive position. The function stops cranking the engine after about 25 seconds at maximum if the engine has not started yet. When you crank the engine again, wait a few seconds and restart it. BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE 1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it. 2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle, seat cushion angle, seat cushion height, head restraint height and steering wheel angle. 4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to the floor until driving off. The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system in your engine automatically controls the proper air−fuel mixture for starting. You can start a cold or hot engine as follows: 3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors. 4. Lock all doors. 5. Fasten seat belts. Remember to check that the service reminder indicators function when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, and check the fuel gauge to see that you have sufficient fuel. 355 STARTING AND DRIVING Starting the engine If the engine stalls ... Normal starting procedure Simply restart it , using the correct procedure given in normal starting. If the engine will not start See ”If your vehicle will not start” on page 468. G31035 NOTICE  Do not race a cold engine.  If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately. When depressing the brake pedal while carrying an electronic key, make sure the green engine switch indicator light comes on. And then push the engine switch to start the engine. If you press the engine switch while the brake pedal is depressed and the transmission is in “P” or “N”, the engine will start even if initially in “OFF”, “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode. If you start the engine in “OFF” mode, the engine immobilizer is disabled, and the security indicator light goes off. If you push the engine switch while the brake pedal is depressed with the transmission not in “P” or “N”, “IG−ON” mode will be selected with the engine not running. 356 STARTING AND DRIVING STARTING THE ENGINE WHEN THE ELECTRONIC KEY BATTERY IS DISCHARGED In addition, we recommend that the electronic key battery be changed as soon as possible. If the electronic key battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the following procedure. Stopping the engine 5. Unlock the door with the mechanical key and bring the electronic key into the vehicle. G31036 G11038 If you press the engine switch while the selector lever is in “P” and the engine is running, regardless of brake pedal position, the engine will be turned off. 6. While the brake pedal is depressed, hold the ornament side of the electronic key about 10 mm (0.4 in.) over the engine switch as shown. With the transmission not in “P”, the engine switch is selected in “ACC” mode. 7. Within 5 seconds of the chime sounding, push the engine switch with the brake pedal depressed to start the engine. If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, press the engine switch for more than 3 seconds. At this time, “ACC” mode is selected. When you push the engine switch with the brake pedal not depressed at this time, the engine will not start, but it is possible to select “ACC”, “IG−ON” and “OFF” mode. If it is not possible to start the engine or change the mode using this procedure, contact your Lexus dealer. Several hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear a sound coming from underneath the luggage compartment for several minutes. This is normal operation and does not indicate a malfunction. (See page vi.) 357 STARTING AND DRIVING PARKING BRAKE CAUTION To avoid serious personal injury or an accident, observe the following precautions.  Turn off the engine, only when the vehicle is completely stopped. G31037  When you leave the vehicle, the selector lever must be in “P” and the parking brake must be applied, or the vehicle may suddenly move.  1 U.S.A. 2 Canada To set: Hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot. To release: Hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot and push the parking brake pedal with your left foot. When you lift your left foot, the parking brake pedal will follow it to the released position. Before leaving your vehicle, firmly apply the parking brake. To remind you that the parking brake is set, the parking brake reminder light in the instrument cluster remains on until you release the parking brake. 358 STARTING AND DRIVING The buzzer will remind you to release the parking brake when the vehicle speed rises above 5 km/h (3mph) with the parking brake is applied. At this time the master warning light blinks and the message “PARK BRAKE” appears on the multi−information display. CAUTION AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Your automatic transmission has a shift lock system to minimize the possibility of incorrect operation. This means you can only shift out of “P” position when the brake pedal is depressed with the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode. () Before driving, make sure the parking brake is fully released and that the parking brake reminder light is off. G31021 359 STARTING AND DRIVING  The shift position or shift range position is displayed on the instrument cluster. P: Parking and engine starting (a) Normal driving R: Reverse position (b) Driving in “S” mode N: Neutral position (c) Using engine braking D: Normal driving position (Shifting into overdrive possible) (d) Backing up S: “S” mode driving (f) Good driving practice +: Upshifting –: Downshifting 360 Correct use of the automatic transmission is explained in the following parts. (e) Parking (g) If you cannot shift the selector lever STARTING AND DRIVING (a) Normal driving G31023 G31022  1 “P” (Park) position  1 Power position 3 Snow position 2 “N” (Neutral) position 1. Start the engine as instructed in “Operating the engine switch” on page 348. The transmission must be in “P” or “N” position. The engine will not start in any drive position even if engine switch is pushed while the brake pedal is depressed. 2 Normal position 2. Set the driving pattern selector switch to the normal position. Your transmission has a driving pattern selector switch which allows you to select power, normal or snow mode to suit your driving condition. For ordinary driving, Lexus recommends that you use the normal mode to improve fuel economy. 3. For more powerful acceleration and sporty driving, use the power position. In the power mode, the “ECT PWR” light in the instrument cluster is on and the most suitable shift pattern is selected depending on the driver’s operation of accelerator and brake pedal and on the vehicle condition. See “Automatic shifting point change control” on page 363. For snow mode, see “Electronic Throttle Control System” on page 371. 361 STARTING AND DRIVING 5. Release the parking brake and brake pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal slowly for smooth starting. G31024  1 Brake pedal 2 “D” (Drive) position 4. With your foot holding down the brake pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”. Always use the “D” position to improve fuel economy and quiet driving. Shifting into the overdrive gear is possible when the transmission is in any position of “D”, “6” (six range), “5” (fifth range) of “S” position. However, while the engine coolant temperature is low, the transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear even in the above specified position. (See “(c) Using engine braking” and “(f) Good driving practice” for exceptions.) CAUTION Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting. 362 In normal cruising, the vehicle will start in first gear and automatically shift up to the most suitable gear. On inclines, declines or winding roads, etc., the vehicle shifts up and down automatically according to the running conditions to obtain the suitable driving power and engine braking. If you need to accelerate rapidly while driving, depress the accelerator pedal to the full throttle position. This provides more acceleration by automatically downshifting the transmission to the next lower gear or beyond, depending on the vehicle speed. If engine braking is needed, such as in descending a long hill, see “(c) Using engine braking”. STARTING AND DRIVING  AI (Artificial Intelligence) shifting control (b) Driving in “S” mode AI shifting control selects the most suitable shift range automatically according to the driver’s operation and driving condition. AI shifting control operates automatically with the selector lever in the “D” position. When the lever is moved to the “S” position, this function will be canceled. G31025 Shifting control on the slope: On inclines, you can drive smoothly with reduced shifting quantity. On declines, the vehicle will shift down automatically to obtain optimum engine braking and reduce the driver’s foot braking load. Automatic shifting point change control: The automatic shifting point control is controlled in the following way to respond to the driver’s operation.  When the accelerator is depressed quickly, the vehicle downshifts rapidly in order to improve acceleration.  When the accelerator is quickly released, the gear position is maintained in order to improve engine braking and reacceleration capabilities.  During hard deceleration the vehicle downshifts rapidly in order to improve engine braking and reacceleration capabilities.  1 2 3 4 “S” mode position Upshifting Downshifting Shift range position indicator You can change the shift range position in the “S” mode. The shift range position can be switched between “6” (sixth range) and “1” (first range) by moving the selector lever up to the “+” side or down to the “–” side. The first shift range position is “5” (fifth range) when the selector lever is shifted to the “S” position. However, if you move the lever to the “S” position in AI shifting control, “5” (fifth range), “4” (fourth range) or “3” (third range) will be the first shift range. This is because the suitable shift range is selected depending on the driving condition. 363 STARTING AND DRIVING G31026  Shift range position indicator The shift range position is displayed on the instrument cluster.  Shift range positions “6” (sixth range): The most suitable gear is automatically selected between first and overdrive (sixth) gears according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. Always use the “6” (sixth range) position to improve fuel economy and for quiet driving. “5” (fifth range): The most suitable gear is automatically selected between first and overdrive (fifth) gears according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. This range is suitable for acceleration such as when you want to pass a vehicle running ahead of you during high speed driving. 364 “4” (fourth range): The most suitable gear is automatically selected between first and fourth gears according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. In the “4” (fourth range) position, the automatic transmission system will select the most suitable gear to handle current running conditions such as hill climbing, hard towing, etc. “3” (third range): The most suitable gear is automatically selected between first and third gears according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. This range is best used when stronger engine braking is necessary. “2” (second range): First or second gear will automatically be selected according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. This range is to be used when engine braking stronger than that of the “3” (third range) position is necessary. “1” (first range): This gear is fixed in first regardless of vehicle speed or driving conditions. This range is to be used when maximum engine braking is necessary. If you attempt to downshift the transmission when it is not possible to downshift due to high vehicle speed, a warning tone sounds twice. STARTING AND DRIVING  Maximum allowable speeds To get on a highway or to pass slower traffic, maximum acceleration may be necessary. Make sure you observe the following maximum allowable speeds in each range: GS430: GS300 (2WD): GS300 (4WD): range 1 2 3 km/h (mph) 57 (35) 97 (60) 141 (88) range 1 2 3 km/h (mph) 54 (33) 93 (58) 137 (85) range 1 2 3 km/h (mph) 52 (32) 90 (56) 131 (81)  “S” mode indicator light “S” mode allows you to use the shift range positions. The “S” mode indicator light comes on when the selector lever is shifted into the “S” position. When the “S” mode indicator light does not come on even with the selector lever moved to the “S” position, there may be a problem somewhere in the system. Have your vehicle checked/repaired by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. In this case, you can drive in the same condition as in the “D” position. NOTICE Do not downshift if you are going faster than the maximum allowable speed for the next lower range. 365 STARTING AND DRIVING (c) Using engine braking G31027  “S” mode position To use the braking power of the engine, downshift the range in the “S” mode position as follows:  Shift into the “5” (fifth range) position. The transmission will downshift to fifth gear and engine braking will be enabled. If you drive in the “D” position: Shift the selector lever to the “S” position and “5” (fifth range) will automatically be selected. If you drive in the “S” position: Shift the selector lever down to the “–” position by selecting the “5” (fifth range). When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from “D” or “6” (sixth range) to “5” (fifth range), engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For vehicle speed reduction, see page 400. Vehicles with the dynamic radar cruise control — When the cruise control is being used in the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode or in the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode, even if you downshift from “D” or “6” (sixth range) to “5” (fifth range), engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For vehicle speed reduction, see pages 423 and 411.  Shift into the “4” (fourth range) position. The transmission will downshift to fourth gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower than the speed listed below and more powerful engine braking will be enabled. GS430 GS300 (2WD) GS300 (4WD) 193 km/h (120 mph) 187 km/h (116 mph) 178 km/h (111 mph) If you drive in the “D” position: Shift the selector lever to the “S” position and shift the lever down to the “–” position once to select “4” (fourth range). However, when you move the lever to the “S” position while the AI shifting control is operating, the first shift range will be “5” (fifth range), “4” (fourth range) or “3” (third range) because the suitable shift range is selected depending on the driving condition. If you drive in the “S” position: Shift the selector lever down to the “–” position to select the “4” (fourth range). 366 STARTING AND DRIVING When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from “D” or “5” (fifth range) to “4” (fourth range), engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For vehicle speed reduction, see page 400. Vehicles with the dynamic radar cruise control — When the cruise control is being used in the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode or in the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode, even if you downshift from “D” or “5” (fifth range) to “4” (fourth range), engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For vehicle speed reduction, see pages 423 and 411.  Shift into the “3” (third range) position. The transmission will downshift to third gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower than the speed listed below and more powerful engine braking will be enabled. GS430 GS300 (2WD) GS300 (4WD) 144 km/h 135 km/h 129 km/h (90 mph) (84 mph) (80 mph) If you drive in the “D” position: Shift the selector lever to the “S” position and shift the lever down to the “–” position twice to select the “3” (third range). However, when you move the lever to the “S” position while the AI shifting control is operating, the first shift range will be “5” (fifth range), “4” (fourth range) or “3” (third range) because the suitable shift range is selected depending on the driving condition.  Shift into the “2” (second range) position. The transmission will downshift to second gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower than the speed listed below and more powerful engine braking than that of the “3” (third range) position will be enabled. GS430 GS300 (2WD) GS300 (4WD) 98 km/h 93 km/h 89 km/h (61 mph) (58 mph) (55 mph) If you drive in the “D” position: Shift the selector lever to the “S” position and shift the lever down to the “–” position three times to select “2” (second range). If you drive in the “S” position: Shift the selector lever down to the “–” position to select “2” (second range).  Shift into the “1” (first range) position. The transmission will downshift to first gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower than the speed listed below and maximum engine braking will be enabled. GS430 GS300 (2WD) GS300 (4WD) 37 km/h 38 km/h 36 km/h (23 mph) (23 mph) (22 mph) If you drive in the “D” position: Shift the selector lever to the “S” position and shift the lever down to the “–” position four times to select “1” (first range). If you drive in the “S” position: Shift the selector lever down to the “–” position to select “1” (first range). If you drive in the “S” position: Shift the selector lever down to the “–” position to select “3” (third range). 367 STARTING AND DRIVING CAUTION (d) Backing up Be careful when downshifting on a slippery surface. The abrupt change in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid or spin. G31028  1 Brake pedal 2 “R” (Reverse) position 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the selector lever to the “R” position. NOTICE Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving. 368 STARTING AND DRIVING When the selector lever is shifted into the “R” position, the outside rear view mirrors automatically down to help backing up. For details, see “Power rear view mirror control” on page 210. Vehicles with rear view monitor system: When the selector lever is shifted into the “R” position with the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode, rear view monitor system will activate. For instructions, see “Rear view monitor system” on page 395. (e) Parking G31029  1 Parking brake pedal 3 “P” (Park) position 2 Brake pedal 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. Depress the parking brake pedal fully to securely apply the parking brake. 3. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the selector lever to the “P” position. CAUTION Never attempt to move the selector lever into “P” under any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious mechanical damage and loss of vehicle control may result. 369 STARTING AND DRIVING (f) Good driving practice (g) If you cannot shift the selector lever If the transmission repeatedly shifts up and down between fourth and overdrive gears when climbing a gentle slope, shift the selector lever to the “4” position. Be sure to shift the selector lever to the “D” position after climbing the slope. If you cannot shift the selector lever even though the brake pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button. For instructions, see “If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever” on page 496. CAUTION Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping. NOTICE Always use the brake pedal or the parking brake to hold the vehicle on an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold the vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause the transmission to overheat. 370 STARTING AND DRIVING ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM The electronic throttle control system always maintains appropriate engine output in relation to the accelerator opening in all driving conditions. In the power mode, the “ECT PWR” light in the instrument cluster is on and the most suitable shift pattern is selected depending on the driver’s operation of accelerator and brake pedal and on the vehicle condition. See “Automatic shifting point change control” on page 363. To return to the normal mode, push the driving pattern selector switch lightly on the “SNOW” side. Snow mode: For slippery road surfaces such as in snow. In this mode, the spinning of the rear wheels is controlled appropriately. G31023 When you push the driving pattern selector switch on the “SNOW” side, the snow mode is turned on and the ”ECT SNOW” light in the instrument cluster comes on. To return to the normal mode, push the driving pattern selector switch on the “SNOW” side again.  1 Power position 3 Snow position 2 Normal position When you turn the engine switch off in the snow mode, the electronic throttle control system automatically changes to the normal mode. The electronic throttle control system has 3 modes: normal, power and snow modes. Normal mode: For ordinary driving, Lexus recommends that you use this mode to improve fuel economy. Power mode: For more powerful acceleration and sporty driving. 371 STARTING AND DRIVING INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST 1 Dual sensors There are four of these steering guidance sensors installed in the front bumper. G31049 Steering guidance means that when an obstacle is inspected, not only is the distance estimated, this function judges whether collision with the obstacle within detection range is avoidable if the vehicle is steered in a certain direction, and informs the driver. There will be no warning if it judges that there is no possibility of collision with the obstacle within detection range. (See page 375.) 2 The intuitive parking assist is a warning system used when parking the vehicle at low speed (e.g. into a garage). It uses an ultrasonic sensor, which checks the approximate distance to an obstacle. It will inform you of the approximate distance to an obstacle by displaying information on the multi−information display and the screen, and with beeping sounds. 372 Rear corner sensors There is one of these installed on each corner of the rear bumper, they inspect obstacles and will sound a warning depending on the distance to the obstacle. (See page 380.) 3 Back sensors There are two of these installed near the center of the rear bumper, they inspect obstacles and will sound a warning depending on the distance to the obstacle. (See page 381.) STARTING AND DRIVING Where to display G31050 To use the intuitive parking assist, push the main switch in the switch box with the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode. Pushing the main switch again will turn the intuitive parking assist off. G31051 Multi−information display When you push the main switch, the indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on and a beep sounds for one second, indicating that the intuitive parking assist is turned on. The intuitive parking assist will remain on even after turning the engine switch to “OFF” and then to “IG−ON” mode with the main switch on. However, a beep does not sound at this time. If an error is detected in the intuitive parking assist while self−checking, beeps sound and a warning appears in the multi−information display and on the screen. For details, see “Intuitive parking assist failure warning” on page 385. 373 STARTING AND DRIVING Indicators and steering guide symbol G31052 G31053  1 Touch screen (full screen display) 2 Touch screen (vehicles with rear view monitor system) (For details, see page 388.) When an obstacle is detected, the indicator bars will come on or flash, accompanied by beeping. How many bars are lit or flashing depends on the distance to the obstacle. When the obstacle is not detected any longer, beeps will stop sounding and the multi−information display and the screen will return to the previous display. The volume of the beeps and the display on the screen can be changed. See “Setting the intuitive parking assist” on page 391. 374  1 2 3 4 Detection by dual sensors Detection by rear corner sensors Detection by back sensors Steering guide symbol (See page 377) The approximate distance to the obstacle is shown with up to 4 bars on the front, front corners and rear of the vehicle and up to 3 bars on the rear corners of the vehicle. STARTING AND DRIVING CAUTION Dual sensors To avoid an accident or injury, observe the following instructions, and then drive slowly using the brakes while confirming a safe distance around your vehicle with your eyes.  The sensor detection range is limited around the bumper. Be sure to confirm safety outside sensor detection with your eyes. For the sensor detection range, see page 383. G31054  It might take time for the sensors to detect the obstacle.  Depending on the shape of the obstacle, indicators or beeps may not warn you properly, and the detection range may also be shortened. (A) Collision will be unavoidable: Collision with the detected obstacle cannot be avoided even by changing the steering.  It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio or air flow noise of air conditioning. (B) Collision will be avoided by changing the steering: Collision with the obstacle can be avoided by changing the steering. (C) Collision will be avoided with the present steering angle: Even if you continue moving at the present steering angle, the distance to the obstacle within sensor detection range will not be less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.). The dual sensors detect an obstacle in front of the vehicle or at an angle to the front of the vehicle, and estimate the distance to the obstacle and also the steering angle required. They will evaluate which of the above 3 conditions is applicable. 375 STARTING AND DRIVING The selector lever must be in any position other than “P” or “R” for these sensors to operate, however the obstacle at an angle to the front of the vehicle will also be detected while the selector lever is in “R”. (A) Collision will be unavoidable CAUTION With long obstacles such as walls, the decision of the sensor may change as the obstacle gets closer; from certain avoidance to avoidance if steering is changed; from certain avoidance to unavoidable collision; and there are also times when the decision will be changed from avoidance if steering is changed, to certain collision. When you move your vehicle, be sure to confirm a safe distance around your vehicle with your eyes and drive slowly, or an accident or injury may result. G31055 The steering guidance may not operate properly in the following conditions:  Tires other than those of Lexus genuine size are installed.  The steering sensor information cannot be received properly. (See “Intuitive parking assist failure warning” on page 385.) 376  3 4 5 6 About 50 cm (1.5 ft.) to about 100 cm (3.0 ft.) About 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.) to about 50 cm (1.5 ft.) About 25 cm (0.8 ft.) to about 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.) Less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.) STARTING AND DRIVING 1 Multi−information display: The indicator bars will come on depending on the distance to the obstacle and will flash when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.). 2 Screen: The indicator bars will come on in yellow according to the distance to the obstacle. When the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.), the yellow indicator bars will turn red. In addition, the current direction of the tires is also indicated in 3 stages. Beeps: As distance to the obstacle gets closer, the interval of the intermittent sound gets shorter, and then finally to a continuous sound when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.). (B) Collision will be avoided by changing the steering G31056  3 About 50 cm (1.5 ft.) to about 100 cm (3.0 ft.) 4 About 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.) to about 50 cm (1.5 ft.) 5 About 25 cm (0.8 ft.) to about 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.) The steering guide symbol and the arrow indicating which direction should be steered appear along with the bar indicators and beeps. 377 STARTING AND DRIVING The above illustration indicates that the collision will be avoided by turning the steering wheel clockwise. When the possibility that the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.) is eliminated by turning the steering wheel more, the steering guide symbol will go out and the beeps will stop sounding. The steering guide symbol and arrow are not instructions you must observe. They are just a guide to avoid a collision. 1 Multi−information display: The indicator bars will come on depending on the distance to the obstacle . The steering guide symbol and arrow will also come on. 2 Screen: The indicator bars will come on in yellow depending on the distance to the obstacle. The steering guide symbol and arrow will also come on. In addition, the current direction of the tires is also indicated in 3 stages. Beeps: As distance to the obstacle gets closer, the interval of the intermittent sound gets shorter, and then finally to a continuous sound when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.). 378 CAUTION When an obstacle is detected within about 25 cm (0.8 ft.) from the vehicle, the dual sensors will change the determination to an unavoidable collision. To avoid an accident or injury, be sure to confirm a safe distance around your vehicle with your eyes and drive slowly. STARTING AND DRIVING (C) Collision will be avoided with the present steering angle 1 Multi−information display: The indicator bars will come on depending on the distance to the obstacle. 2 Screen: The indicator bars will come on in green depending on the distance to the obstacle. In addition, the current direction of the tires is also indicated in 3 stages. Beeps: Beeps will not sound. CAUTION G31057 To avoid an accident or injury, observe the following. When you move your vehicle, be sure to confirm a safe distance around your vehicle with your eyes and drive slowly.  With long obstacles such as walls, the decision of the sensor may change as the obstacle gets closer; from certain avoidance to avoidance if steering is changed; from certain avoidance to unavoidable collision; and there are also times when the decision will be changed from avoidance if steering is changed, to certain collision.  3 About 50 cm (1.5 ft.) to about 100 cm (3.0 ft.) 4 About 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.) to about 50 cm (1.5 ft.) 5 About 25 cm (0.8 ft.) to about 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.)  When an obstacle is detected within about 25 cm (0.8 ft.) from the vehicle, the dual sensors will change the determination to an unavoidable collision. 379 STARTING AND DRIVING Rear corner sensors G31058 The rear corner sensor only operates when the transmission is in “R”, it checks the approximate distance to obstacles at an angle to the rear of the vehicle, and sounds a warning depending on the distance. 1 Multi−information display: The indicator bars will come on depending on the distance to the obstacle and will flash when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.). 2 Screen: The indicator bars will come on in yellow depending on the distance to the obstacle. When the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.), the yellow indicator bars will turn red. Beeps: As distance to the obstacle gets closer, the interval of the intermittent sound gets shorter, and then finally to a continuous sound when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.). CAUTION  3 About 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.) to about 50 cm (1.5 ft.) 4 About 25 cm (0.8 ft.) to about 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.) 5 Less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.) 380 When backing up, be sure to confirm a safe distance around your vehicle with your eyes to avoid an accident. STARTING AND DRIVING Back sensors G31059 The back sensor only operates when the transmission is in “R”, it checks the approximate distance to obstacles close to the rear of the vehicle, and sounds a warning depending on the distance. 1 Multi−information display: The indicator bars will come on depending on the distance to the obstacle and will flash when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 35 cm (1.1 ft.). 2 Screen: The indicator bars will come on in yellow depending on the distance to the obstacle. When the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 35 cm (1.1 ft.), the yellow indicator bars will turn red. Beeps: As distance to the obstacle gets closer, the interval of the intermittent sound gets shorter, and then finally to a continuous sound when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 35 cm (1.1 ft.). CAUTION  3 4 5 6 About 60 cm (2.0 ft.) to about 150 cm (5.0 ft.) About 45 cm (1.4 ft.) to about 60.0 cm (2.0ft.) About 35 cm (1.1 ft.) to about 45.0 cm (1.4 ft.) Less than about 35 cm (1.1 ft.) When backing up, be sure to confirm a safe distance around your vehicle with your eyes to avoid an accident. 381 STARTING AND DRIVING Numerous obstacles are detected on the front and rear of the vehicle simultaneously The warning for the obstacle closer to the vehicle will be issued. The above illustration indicates the obstacle detected by the back sensors is closer to the vehicle. So, the warning for the obstacle detected by the back sensors will be given. 2 The obstacle detected on the front or rear of the vehicle is in an area where continuous beeping should sound: If the possibility of collision with the obstacle is high as shown, the system warns the driver by continuous beeping (repeating 6 intermittent beeps and one longer beep as one cycle). G31060 3 Both obstacles detected on the front and rear of the vehicle are in areas where continuous beeping should sound: If the possibility of collision with the obstacles is very high as shown, the system warns the driver by continuous beeping (repeating 2 quick beeps and one longer beep as one cycle). CAUTION When obstacles are detected on the front and rear of the vehicle at the same time; the multi−information display and screen illuminate their relevant indicator bars. And beeps are as follows: 1 382 Obstacles detected on the front and rear of the vehicle are not in areas where continuous beeping should sound: It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio or air flow noise of air conditioning. To avoid an accident or injury, drive slowly using the brakes while confirming a safe distance around your vehicle with your eyes. STARTING AND DRIVING Detection range of sensors* NOTE: * The detection range can be changed from about 50 cm (1.5 ft.) for dual sensors and about 60 cm (2 ft.) for back sensors. Ask your Lexus dealer for details. The intuitive parking assist may not work properly in the following cases:  When the bumper is damaged. G31061  When the part near the sensors is subjected to a strong impact.  When an accessory is installed within the sensor detection range.  When snowflakes or mud gets on the sensors. (If removed, the system will work properly.)  When water is splashed from a high pressure car wash or steam on the sensors.  When a sensor is covered with your hand.  When the vehicle is tilted.  1 About 3 m (10 ft.) 2 About 1 m (3 ft.) 3 About 1m 50 cm (5 ft.) 4 About 50 cm (1.5 ft.)  In extreme hot or cold weather (In extreme cold weather, the error display appears and the system becomes inoperative.) The sensor detection range is limited around the bumper. Be sure to confirm a safe distance around your vehicle and drive slowly.  When driving on bumpy roads, slopes, gravelled roads or grass. 383 STARTING AND DRIVING  Devices issuing ultrasonic waves are operated around your vehicle, such as a horn from another vehicle, motorcycle engine, air braking sound from heavy−duty vehicles.  When another vehicle equipped with ultrasonic sensors gets close to your vehicle.  When heavy rain or water is splashed over the vehicle. (Drive carefully as the braking distance may be affected.)  When a radio antenna or fender pole is mounted on your vehicle.  If towing eyelet is installed on your vehicle.  When you are driving towards a tall curb stone or curb stone having right angle.  The detection range for an object such as a traffic sign may be shortened.  An object just under the bumper cannot be detected. Although an object lower than the location of sensors is once detected, the detection might be stopped when your vehicle gets closer to the object.  When an obstacle is very close to the sensors. 384 The intuitive parking assist may not detect the following:  Thin objects such as wire or rope  Sound wave absorbing objects such as cotton or snow  Objects with a sharp edge  Tall objects with the upper part projected  Shorter objects STARTING AND DRIVING Intuitive parking assist failure warning When snowflakes or mud gets on the sensors If an error is detected when the intuitive parking assist is turned on, the vehicle symbol comes on or flashes with beeping sounds. At this time steering guidance is temporarily stopped. However, the sensors functioning properly continue their obstacle detection. For details, see “When the detection range of the sensors is shorter” on page 388. G31062a The intuitive parking assist failure warning display is not given in either of the following operations:  Changing to another screen  Turning off the main switch for the intuitive parking assist  1 Multi−information display 2 Screen If foreign matter gets on the sensors and the intuitive parking assist cannot detect the object properly, the above message appears. At this time, the vehicle symbol and the indicator bars corresponding to the faulty sensors flash for about 7 seconds and 2 beeps sound 5 times. After about 7 seconds, the sensor indicator bars will cease flashing, however will stay lit until the affected sensor is cleaned. Furthermore, the vehicle symbol will continue to flash until the affected sensor is cleaned. The above illustration shows the sensor on the left front of the vehicle malfunctioning. If the failure warning does not go off even after the foreign matter is removed, the intuitive parking assist may be malfunctioning. Have it checked by your Lexus dealer. 385 STARTING AND DRIVING When the sensor is malfunctioning G31063a  1 Multi−information display 2 Screen If the sensor cable is broken and the intuitive parking assist cannot detect the object properly, the above message appears. At this time, the indicator bars corresponding to the faulty sensor flash for about 7 seconds and 2 beeps sound 5 times. The indicator bars continue lighting after flashing. The above illustration shows the sensor on the right rear of the vehicle malfunctioning. If this message appears, have the sensor checked by your Lexus dealer. 386 When the steering sensor is malfunctioning G31064 If the steering sensor cable is broken and signals cannot be received, the vehicle symbol comes on and the steering guide symbol and arrows flash. If only the steering sensor is malfunctioning, the warning appears only on the multi−information display. If this warning appears, have the sensor checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. STARTING AND DRIVING When the neutral point of the steering sensor is unknown As the intuitive parking assist might be malfunctioning in the following cases, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.  The indicator in the instrument cluster does not come on and a beep does not sound even when the intuitive parking assist main switch is turned on. G31065  The warning comes on despite no obstacle around the vehicle. If the memorized neutral point of the steering is erased by replacing the battery, the vehicle symbol, steering guide symbol and arrows come on. If only the neutral point of the steering sensor is unknown, the warning appears only on the multi−information display. If this warning appears, calibrate the neutral point of the steering using either of the following:  Turn the steering wheel either way fully and then in the opposite direction fully and slowly, with the vehicle stopped.  Drive on roads (with as few curves as possible and without backing up) for more than about 5 minutes. If this warning goes out, the calibration of the steering neutral point is completed. If the warning still remains on, have the sensor checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. 387 STARTING AND DRIVING When the detection range of the sensors is shorter In the following cases, the sensors will detect an obstacle about 50 cm (1.5 ft.) from either front corner of the vehicle and the steering guidance will be stopped. Accordingly, the tire orientation symbol on the screen does not appear. And only the warning according to the distance up to the obstacle is given. a. Any one of the sensors is malfunctioning. Rear view monitor display (Vehicles with rear view monitor system) G31066 b. Any one of the steering sensors is malfunctioning. c. The steering sensor signal cannot be received properly. d. The correct vehicle information cannot be given due to extremely low battery voltage. e. Proper steering detection (going straight) cannot be detected On vehicles equipped with rear view monitor system, a warning appears on the right top of the rear view monitor in the following conditions. In case of a., when the intuitive parking assist returns to normal, the steering guidance also comes back automatically.  When the selector lever is put in “R” and the rear view monitor is turned on. In case of b. through e., the steering guidance also comes back automatically after the neutral point of the steering sensor calibration is completed. 388  When the intuitive parking assist main switch is turned on and any sensor detects an obstacle. Although “Display Off” is selected in the intuitive parking assist setting screen, the warning appears on the right top of the rear view monitor. STARTING AND DRIVING When the intuitive parking assist determines that the collision will be avoided with the present steering angle: Dual sensors The indicator will come on in green. G31067  1 2 3 4 However, if the sensors detect and determine an obstacle at an angle to the front of the vehicle, the indicator will not come on. Beeps (except for avoidable collisions at the present steering angle): As distance to the obstacle gets closer, the interval of the intermittent sound gets shorter, and then finally to a continuous sound when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.). About 50 cm (1.5 ft.) to about 100 cm (3.0 ft.) About 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.) to about 50 cm (1.5 ft.) About 25 cm (0.8 ft.) to about 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.) Less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.) When the intuitive parking assist determines that the collision will be unavoidable: The indicator will flash yellow depending on the distance to the obstacle. When the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.), the yellow indicator will turn red. When the intuitive parking assist determines that the collision will be avoided by changing the steering: The indicator will flash yellow depending on the distance to the vehicle. The steering guide symbol and arrow do not appear. CAUTION  When an obstacle is detected within about 25 cm (0.8 ft.) from the vehicle, the dual sensors will change the determination to an unavoidable collision.  With long obstacles such as walls, the decision of the sensor may change as the obstacle gets closer; from certain avoidance to avoidance if steering is changed; from certain avoidance to unavoidable collision; and there are also times when the decision will be changed from avoidance if steering is changed, to certain collision. When you move your vehicle, be sure to confirm a safe distance around your vehicle with your eyes and drive slowly, or an accident or injury may result. 389 STARTING AND DRIVING Rear corner sensors Back sensors G31068  1 About 35 cm (1.1ft.) to about 50 cm (1.5 ft.) 2 About 25 cm (0.8 ft.) to about 35 cm (1.1 ft.) 3 Less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.) Display: The indicator will flash yellow depending on the distance to the obstacle. When the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.), the yellow indicator will turn red. Beeps : As distance to the obstacle gets closer, the interval of the intermittent sound gets shorter, and then finally to a continuous sound when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.). 390 G31069  1 2 3 4 About 60.0 cm (2.0 ft.) to about 150 cm (5.0 ft.) About 45.0 cm (1.4 ft.) to about 60.0 cm (2.0 ft.) About 35.0 cm (1.1 ft.) to about 45.0 cm (1.4 ft.) Less than about 35 cm (1.1 ft.) Display: The indicator will flash in yellow depending on the distance to the obstacle. When the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 35 cm (1.1 ft.), the yellow indicator will turn red. Beeps : As distance to the obstacle gets closer, the interval of the intermittent sound gets shorter, and then finally to a continuous sound when the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle is less than about 35 cm (1.1 ft.). STARTING AND DRIVING CAUTION When backing up, be sure to confirm a safe distance around your vehicle with your eyes to avoid an accident. Setting the intuitive parking assist The volume of the beeps and turning on or off of the display can be set. G31070  1 With Navigation system 2 Without Navigation system 1. Push the “INFO” button to display the menu screen. 391 STARTING AND DRIVING G31071a With Navigation system G31123a Without Navigation system 2. Touch “LEXUS Park Assist”. 392 G31072a 3. Touch your desired item. STARTING AND DRIVING (A) Changing the volume of the beeps G31073a (B) Display setting G31074a Touch “Volume” to change the volume of the beeps. Touch “Display”. You have 3 settings. The volume has 5 levels, increasing with higher value. Select your desired volume and touch “Back” to return to the previous screen. Static: Warnings appear when obstacles are detected within the detection range. Dynamic: Warnings appear only when a collision is unavoidable. Display Off: Warnings are not given even if an obstacle is detected. Vehicles with rear view monitor system— Although “Display Off” is turned on, if the obstacle is detected during the rear view monitoring, the warning appears on the right top of the screen. After setting the display, touch “Back” to return to the previous screen. 393 STARTING AND DRIVING (C) Explanations of Parking Sonar Symbols For vehicles sold in Canada. This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES−001. Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB−001 du Canada. G31075a Touch “Explanation”. After reading the explanation, touch “Back” to return to the previous screen. For vehicles sold in U.S.A. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 394 STARTING AND DRIVING REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of the view behind the vehicle while backing up. The image is displayed in reverse on the screen. This allows the image to appear in the same manner as that of the rear view mirror. To display the rear view image on the screen, place the selector lever in the “R” position when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. If you move the selector lever out of the “R” position, the screen returns to the previous screen. Operating another function of the navigation system will display another screen. The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist back up. When backing up, be sure to check behind and all around the vehicle visually. Vehicles with intuitive parking assist— When the intuitive parking assist is turned on and an obstacle is detected in front or rear of your vehicle, a warning appears on the right top of the rear view monitor. For details, see “Intuitive parking assist” on page 372. CAUTION  Never depend on the rear view monitor system entirely when backing up. Always make sure your intended path is clear. Use caution just as you would when backing up any vehicle.  Never back up while looking only at the screen. The image on the screen is different from actual conditions. Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces will differ from actual distances. If you back up while looking only at the screen, you may hit a vehicle, a person or an object. When backing up, be sure to check behind and all around the vehicle visually and with mirrors before proceeding.  Do not use the system when the trunk is not completely closed.  If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera may change. Be sure to have the camera’s position and mounting angle checked at your Lexus dealer.  If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally. 395 STARTING AND DRIVING  If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. If water droplets, snow, or mud adhere to the lens, rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild cleanser and rinse. AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN Image is displayed approximately level on screen.  Use your own eyes to confirm the vehicle’s surroundings, as the displayed image may become faint or dark, and moving images will be distorted or not entirely visible when the outside temperature is low. When backing up, be sure to check behind and all around the vehicle visually and with mirror before proceeding. G31077a Check surroundings for safety.  Corners of bumper 396 STARTING AND DRIVING  The area covered by the camera is limited. Objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be seen on the screen. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM CAMERA  The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation or road conditions. G31078 The rear view monitor system camera is located on the trunk as shown in the illustration. The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance. In the following cases, it may become difficult to see the images on the screen, even when the system is functioning.  In the dark (for example, at night)  When the temperature near the lens is extremely high or low  When water droplets are adhering to the camera, or when humidity is high (for example, when it rains)  When foreign matter (for example, snow or mud) adheres to the camera lens  When the sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lens 397 STARTING AND DRIVING CRUISE CONTROL 31L357 Check surroundings for safety. If a bright light (for example, sunlight reflected off the vehicle body) is picked up by the camera, the smear effect* peculiar to the camera may occur. *: Smear effect — A phenomenon that occurs when a bright light (for example, sunlight reflected off the vehicle body) is picked up by the camera; when transmitted by the camera, the light source appears to have a vertical streak above and below it. The cruise control allows you to cruise the vehicle at a desired speed over 40 km/h (25 mph) with your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your cruising speed can be maintained although a slight speed change may occur when driving up or down a gradient, within the limits of engine performance. On steeper hills, a great speed change will occur so it is better to drive without the cruise control. When the cruise control is on, the driving pattern of the automatic transmission is fixed in the normal mode, regardless of the position of the selector switch. CAUTION  To help maintain maximum control of your vehicle, do not use the cruise control when driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) or winding roads.  Avoid vehicle speed increases when driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is too fast in relation to the cruise control set speed, cancel the cruise control then downshift the transmission to use engine braking to slow down. 398 STARTING AND DRIVING Turning the system on Setting operation G31163a To operate the cruise control, push the “ON−OFF” button. This turns the system on. The indicator light in the instrument cluster shows that you can now set your desired cruising speed. Another push on the button will turn the system completely off. When the engine switch is turned off, the “ON−OFF” button is also automatically turned off. To use the cruise control again, push the “ON−OFF” button again to turn it on. CAUTION To avoid accidental cruise control engagement, keep the “ON−OFF” button off when not using the cruise control. G31164a Each function is described below. 1 Setting at a desired speed. The transmission must be in the “D” position, or the shift range position must be “4” (fourth range), “5” (fifth range) or “6” (sixth range) in the “S” mode before you set the cruise control speed. Bring the vehicle to the desired speed, press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle at that speed. Now you may take your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you need acceleration − for example, when passing − depress the accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed the set speed. When you release the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the speed set prior to the acceleration. 399 STARTING AND DRIVING 2 Cancelling the preset speed You can cancel the preset speed by doing any of the following: a. Pulling the control lever in the ”CANCEL” direction. b. Depressing the brake pedal. c. Pushing the “ON−OFF” button. If the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will be automatically cancelled. If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 mph) below the preset speed, the preset speed will also automatically be cancelled. If the slip indicator light blinks and a warning tone sounds, the preset speed will be automatically cancelled. If the preset speed automatically cancels out for other than the above reasons, do not operate the cruise control. Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer at the earliest opportunity. 3 Resetting to a faster speed Press the control lever upward in the “+ RES” direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained. While the lever is held upward, the vehicle will gradually gain speed. When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control lever upward in the “+ RES” direction quickly within 0.6 seconds. 400 However, a quicker way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle and then press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction. 4 Resetting to a slower speed Press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained. While the lever is held downward, the vehicle speed will gradually decrease. When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be lowered 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction quickly within 0.6 seconds. However, a quicker way to reset is to depress the brake pedal and then press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction. With the cruise control on, even if you downshift the transmission from the “D” position or “6” (sixth range) to the “5” (fifth range), or from the “D” position or “5” (fifth range) to the “4” (fourth range), engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle speed, reset to a slower speed with the cruise control lever or depress the brake pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled. STARTING AND DRIVING 5 Resuming the preset speed If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling the control lever, by depressing the brake pedal or vehicle stability control activation, pushing the lever up in the “+ RES” direction will restore the speed set prior to cancellation. However, once the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will not be resumed. Cruise control failure warning If the “CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes when using the cruise control, push the “ON−OFF” button to turn the system off and then push it again to turn it on. If any of the following conditions then occurs, there is some trouble in the cruise control system.  The indicator light does not come on.  The indicator light flashes again.  The indicator light goes out after it comes on. If this is the case, contact your Lexus dealer and have your Lexus inspected. DYNAMIC RADAR CRUISE CONTROL The vehicles with pre−collision system are equipped with dynamic radar cruise control. Dynamic radar cruise control allows you to drive at a selected cruising speed over about 45 km/h (28 mph) with your foot off the accelerator pedal, maintaining an appropriate vehicle−to−vehicle distance. CAUTION Do not rely excessively on dynamic radar cruise control in order to avoid serious injury or death, or to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do not use cruise control except in appropriate road and traffic conditions. Always drive carefully and attentively. Before using dynamic radar cruise control, read and understand the following instructions. 401 STARTING AND DRIVING Changing the dynamic radar cruise control mode G31009 G31010  1 2 3 4 Multi−information display Master warning light “CRUISE” indicator light Distance switch (for changing vehicle−to−vehicle distance) 5 Cruise control switch  1 Vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode 2 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode The dynamic radar cruise control function has two cruise control modes.  Vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles  Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising at preset speeds You can change the mode by using the control lever. The two cruise control modes function differently. If you use dynamic radar cruise control, always confirm which mode is selected. 402 STARTING AND DRIVING Vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode The millimeter wave radar sensor in this system primarily detects the reflected wave from the rear end of the vehicle ahead of you to determine the presence of the vehicle ahead as well as measuring the vehicle−to−vehicle distance. The detection range of the sensor is about 120 m (400 ft.) ahead. When the dynamic radar cruise control is on, the driving pattern of the automatic transmission is fixed in the normal mode, regardless of the position of the selector switch. (a) Dynamic radar cruise control operations G31012 CAUTION The dynamic radar cruise control is not a collision−avoidance system and will not prevent accidents. The dynamic radar cruise control is a vehicle speed control device that is intended for use only on freeways or roads where the traffic is light or moderate. To avoid serious injury, you must use caution and be attentive to road and traffic conditions while using dynamic radar cruise control. The dynamic radar cruise control function operates automatically and depending on whether a vehicle is detected ahead may change the speed of your vehicle as follows: 403 STARTING AND DRIVING If no vehicle is running ahead of you: 1 Cruising at a fixed speed: If there is no vehicle detected ahead, your cruising speed is maintained at the preset speed from about 45 km/h (28 mph) to about 135 km/h (85 mph). The preset speed is displayed in the multi−information display. For the vehicle speed setting, see “Setting operation ” on page 408. If a vehicle is detected ahead of you: 404 2 Deceleration cruising function: If a slower moving vehicle is detected ahead of you, your vehicle cruising speed decreases within the range of about 40 km/h (25 mph) to about 135 km/h (85 mph). The multi−information display shows the preset speed, the detected vehicle ahead and selected vehicle−to−vehicle distance. If your vehicle gets closer to the vehicle ahead because of insufficient automatic deceleration, then the warning tone warns you to also manually apply brakes. 3 Follow−up cruising function: After deceleration, your vehicle cruising speed changes in proportion to the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain an appropriate distance from your vehicle to the vehicle ahead. The vehicle−to−vehicle distance can be changed. For details, see “Changing vehicle−to−vehicle distance setting” on page 412. 4 Acceleration cruising function: If the vehicle ahead changes lanes, your vehicle cruising speed will be gradually increased up to the preset speed, and your vehicle resumes fixed−speed cruising. CAUTION Under certain conditions where the vehicle in front slows drastically, or is stopped, the dynamic radar cruise control will neither warn you nor decelerate. The driver must depress the brake pedal to slow down, ensuring collision avoidance or that sufficient vehicle−to−vehicle distance is maintained. When vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode is activated, you must still be attentive to road and traffic conditions. Should your vehicle speed decrease below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the dynamic radar cruise control will shut off, requiring you to apply the brakes to slow. When a vehicle ahead slows suddenly, stops or a vehicle cuts in front, the system may slow your vehicle abruptly, but the automatic braking will cease if the speed decreases below about 40 km/h (25 mph) requiring the driver’s manual application of brakes. STARTING AND DRIVING CAUTION Dynamic radar cruise control should not be used in the following conditions, to avoid death or serious injury. Certain conditions make vehicle detection difficult or impossible.  In bad weather (such as rain, fog, snow, sandstorms, or when raindrops or snowflakes get in the millimeter wave radar sensor or the cover), the vehicle−to−vehicle distance will not be measured accurately.  As this system operates by detecting primarily the reflected wave from the rear end of the vehicle ahead, the distance cannot be accurately detected in the following cases, resulting in improper vehicle−to−vehicle distance. ♦ The rear section of the vehicle ahead is extremely small such as an unloaded trailer. ♦ The vehicle ahead or other vehicles around you are flinging up water or snow. ♦ Heavy luggage which is loaded in your trunk or on top of your rear seats is raising up the nose of your vehicle.  The millimeter wave radar sensor automatically detects dirt if it is sticking to the front of the sensor or cover of your vehicle, and if detected, a message appears on the multi−information display. However, if the sensor or cover is covered with a metallic vinyl bag, icicle, snowflakes, etc., dirt may not be detected, resulting in improper vehicle−to−vehicle distance. Continue driving with due care to the vehicle ahead. If dirt is detected, the dynamic radar cruise control function is automatically cancelled. Always keep the sensor and cover clean. If the wipers are operated at high speed (including the high speed operation with the wiper lever in the “AUTO” position), dynamic radar cruise control is automatically cancelled. (In the case of the low speed operation and intermittent wiper operation, it is not cancelled.) Dynamic radar cruise control is automatically cancelled when the measurement is extremely unstable due to bad weather.  On the roads in heavy traffic or at sharp bends: As an appropriate speed cannot be maintained, death or serious injury could result.  On slippery road surfaces (icy or snow−covered road surfaces): The tires will race and you will be unable to control. 405 STARTING AND DRIVING  On steep downhill slopes: If there is no vehicle detected ahead, the preset speed will be easily exceeded because of inefficient engine braking, resulting in death or serious injury. (In this case, automatic braking will not work.) If there is a vehicle detected ahead, the delay in deceleration timing could cause death or serious injury.  When the warning tone sounds frequently (because acceleration or deceleration was repeated or sufficient vehicle−to−vehicle distance was not maintained), an appropriate vehicle speed cannot be attained, resulting in death or serious injury.  On roads with steep and short inclines and declines, failure to detect the vehicle ahead will shorten the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead, resulting in death or serious injury. G31013 Dynamic radar cruise control should not be used in circumstances which are inappropriate for any cruise control such as entering freeway on−ramps or off−ramps. CAUTION The dynamic radar cruise control should not be used when exiting from, or when entering or merging onto a freeway. When you are following a slower moving vehicle and exiting, the sensor does not detect the vehicle and will accelerate to preset speed. 406 STARTING AND DRIVING (b) Turning the system on G31015 CAUTION  If other vehicles are driving outside of the millimeter wave radar detection range, a delay in the detection of the vehicle cutting in at short range or detection failure of the motorcycle running on the side of the same lane will occur. In this case, the dynamic radar cruise control system will not function properly.  When a slower vehicle in front of you leaves the lane, the dynamic radar cruise control will no longer detect a vehicle ahead and will attempt to accelerate the vehicle to the faster preset speed. G31011 To operate the dynamic radar cruise control, push the “ON−OFF” button. This turns the system on. When the “CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on and “RADAR READY” appears on the multi−information display, you can now set your desired cruising speed and vehicle−to−vehicle distance. Pushing the “ON−OFF” button again will turn the system completely off and “CRUISE OFF” will appear on the multi−information display. When the engine switch is turned off, the system is also automatically turned off. To use the dynamic radar cruise control again, push the “ON−OFF” button again to turn it on. When the engine switch is turned off, all the preset data is cleared. When you use the dynamic radar cruise control again, you need to reset the data. 407 STARTING AND DRIVING The multi−information display will return to the vehicle−to−vehicle distance screen about 6 seconds after the vehicle−to−vehicle distance screen has been changed to another screen. (c) Setting operation CAUTION G31014 To avoid accidentally engaging the cruise control, keep the “ON−OFF” button off when not using the dynamic radar cruise control. Each function is described below. 1 Setting the desired speed The transmission must be in “D”, “6” (sixth range), “5” (fifth range) or “4”(fourth range) before you set the cruise control speed. 408 STARTING AND DRIVING After bringing the vehicle to the desired speed, press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle at that speed. At this time, the multi−information display indicates settings such as the preset vehicle speed, whether a vehicle is present ahead and selected vehicle−to−vehicle distance. If there is no vehicle detected ahead, the dynamic radar cruise control screen does not display the vehicle ahead. At this time, you may take your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you need to accelerate − for example, when passing − depress the accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed the preset speed. When you release the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the control prior to acceleration. You cannot set a desired speed if the master warning light comes on, the warning tone sounds and the multi−information display indicates a warning message such as “CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE”, “CLEAN RADAR SENSOR” or “CHECK CRUISE SYSTEM”. If any of the above messages appears on the display, see “Vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode failure warning” on page 417. If you turn off the “ON−OFF” button while the warning message is displayed, the warning message turns off and the multi−information display switches to another screen. If no warning message appears on the display, when you turn the “ON−OFF” button on again, the setting can be made. You can change the dynamic radar cruise control screen to another screen even while the warning message is displayed. 2 Cancelling the preset speed You can cancel the preset speed by doing any of the following: a. Pulling the control lever, in the ”CANCEL” direction. b. Depressing the brake pedal. c. Pushing the “ON−OFF” button. If cancelled by a. or b., the multi−information display shows “RADAR READY” and the dynamic radar cruise control enters the ready mode. If cancelled by c., the “CRUISE” indicator light goes off in the instrument cluster and the multi−information display shows “CRUISE OFF”. In this case, the preset speed data is cleared, and you must set the speed from the beginning. In the following case, the preset speed automatically cancels out. At this time, the multi−information display shows “RADAR READY” and the dynamic radar cruise control enters the ready mode. The vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph). (40 km/h (25 mph) is designated as a cancel speed.) CAUTION In this case, the warning tone reminds you that the dynamic radar cruise control is cancelled and you must apply the brakes to slow the vehicle. 409 STARTING AND DRIVING In the following cases, the warning messages appear and the preset speed automatically cancels out. When dynamic radar cruise control is restored, the warning messages turn off and dynamic radar cruise control enters “RADAR READY” mode. a. The slip indicator light blinks and a warning tone sounds. (This occurs when the vehicle is about to skid.) b. The driving pattern selector switch is set to snow mode. c. The anti−lock brake system is activated by automatic braking. (The warning tone sounds.) d. The sensor does not operate properly because a foreign matter sticks to the sensor. e. The wipers are operated at high speed (including high speed operation with the wiper lever in the “AUTO” position.) NOTICE If the preset speed automatically cancels out for other than the above reasons, do not operate the dynamic radar cruise control. Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer at the earliest opportunity. 410 3 Resetting to a faster speed Press the control lever upward in the ”+ RES” direction and hold it. The displayed speed will increase in increments of 5 mph (for the U.S.A.) or 5 km/h (for Canada). Release the lever when the desired speed is attained. The vehicle will gradually increase to the displayed speed. Depressing the accelerator pedal and pressing the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction will not reset to a faster speed. At this time the set speed falls by 5 mph (for the U.S.A.) or 5 km/h (for Canada). CAUTION When the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control is on (on follow−up cruising), your cruising speed is regulated in proportion to the speed of the vehicle ahead, so increasing the preset vehicle speed using the control lever does not accelerate the vehicle. However, if the vehicle ahead leaves the lane, your cruising speed will increase up to the preset speed because the preset speed has been set higher using the control lever. Confirm the setting on the multi−information display. STARTING AND DRIVING 4 Resetting to a slower speed 5 Resuming the preset speed Press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction and hold it. The displayed speed will decrease in increments of 5 mph (for the U.S.A.) or 5 km/h (for Canada). Release the lever when the desired speed is attained. The vehicle will gradually decrease to the displayed speed. If the preset speed has been cancelled, when you push the lever up in the “+ RES” direction while “RADAR READY” shows up on the multi−information display and at a vehicle speed of about more than 40 km/h (25 mph), the speed set prior to cancellation will be restored. A quicker way to reset the preset speed is to depress the brake pedal and then press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction. During follow−up cruising, if there are no vehicles running ahead because they have changed lanes, your vehicle will accelerate gradually up to the preset speed. If the control lever is released when the vehicle speed exceeds the upper limit of the preset speed traveling downhill while you are pressing the control lever downward, the system will memorize the upper limit of the preset speed as a preset speed. Even if you downshift the transmission from “D” or “6” (sixth range) to “5” (fifth range), or from “D” or “5” (fifth range) to “4” (fourth range) in the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode, engine braking will not be enabled because this mode is not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle speed, reset to a slower speed with the cruise control lever or depress the brake pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled. 411 STARTING AND DRIVING CAUTION (d) Changing vehicle−to−vehicle distance  Deceleration cruising function and approach warning do not operate when the vehicle ahead is at a stop or driving very slowly.  While vehicle−to−vehicle distance control is on (on follow−up cruising), acceleration and deceleration are automatically performed in proportion to the speed of the vehicle ahead detected. However, if the vehicle ahead of you decelerates abruptly or if another vehicle cuts in ahead of you, your vehicle may collide with the vehicle ahead unless you manually depress the brake pedal to slow down your vehicle. If you need to accelerate because the vehicle ahead or you changes lanes, then depress the acceleration pedal.  Depending on the road configuration (curved roads, left and right continuous curved roads, driving at the start or end of the curve, narrow driving lanes due to road construction) or your vehicle condition (steering wheel maneuvering, position in the lane or unstable driving because of an accident or breakdown), vehicles in other lanes or surrounding objects will be detected, resulting in a control failure or the activated approach warning. This may also result in a very close distance between vehicles due to a failure to detect the vehicle ahead. Maneuvering the steering wheel in response to a violent lateral wind will cause similar conditions. 412 G31016  1 Long 2 Middle 3 Short You can select one of the following vehicle−to−vehicle distances: “Long”, “Middle” or “Short”. Each time you pull the distance switch briefly toward you, the setting changes from “Long” to “Middle” to “Short” and then back to “Long”. You can confirm the setting on the multi−information display. It should be noted that pushing the “DISP” switch will change to another screen. Your vehicle speed changes in proportion to the speed of the vehicle ahead, maintaining the selected distance. However, if the vehicle speed is slower, the selected distance will be shorter than the designated distance. When the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode is activated or the multi−information display indicates “RADAR READY”, the vehicle−to−vehicle distance setting can be changed. STARTING AND DRIVING The vehicle−to−vehicle distance is always set to “Long” when the engine switch is turned on. CAUTION (e) Braking control Dynamic radar cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. If an approach warning is activated, depress the brake pedal to decelerate to ensure an appropriate vehicle−to−vehicle distance.  Select the vehicle−to−vehicle distance considering traffic conditions. The approximate vehicle−to−vehicle distance based on time interval when driving at 80 km/h (50 mph) is shown below : “Long” . . . . . . . . about 50 m (about 164 ft.) “Middle” . . . . . . about 40 m (about 132 ft.) G31017 “Short” . . . . . . . about 30 m (about 100 ft.) If the vehicle speed is slower than 80 km/h (50 mph), the distance will be shorter than the above.  During long downhill driving, the vehicle−to−vehicle distance will be shorter than the selected distance.  1 Under the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control 2 Braking activated Braking control is operating only when the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode is selected and your vehicle speed exceeds about 40 km/h (25 mph). If you are getting closer to the vehicle ahead at relatively higher speed than those of the vehicle ahead or if engine braking cannot be applied properly, braking control is automatically activated. At this time, “BRAKE” flashes on the multi−information display, indicating that the brakes are being used. 413 STARTING AND DRIVING CAUTION (f) Approach warning Braking control will not ensure that your vehicle will reduce speed appropriately. Do not rely on dynamic radar cruise control to prevent collision. G31018 CAUTION While you are cruising in the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode, if the vehicle ahead decelerates abruptly or if another vehicle cuts in ahead of you, inadequate braking will make your vehicle closer to the vehicle ahead of you and the multi−information display flashes and beeps. The driver must depress the brake pedal to slow down, ensuring collision avoidance or that sufficient vehicle−to−vehicle distance is maintained. 414 STARTING AND DRIVING  The approach warning may not turn on even if the vehicle drives closer to the vehicle ahead in the following conditions: (g) Millimeter wave radar sensor ♦ Your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are cruising at almost the same speed. ♦ The vehicle ahead is cruising at a faster speed than yours. (The distance between the vehicles will become longer.) G31019a ♦ Pay special attention to the very slow vehicle at the end of the line in heavy traffic or at the tollgate. ♦ Immediately after the speed setting. ♦ The accelerator pedal is depressed or immediately after the release of the accelerator pedal.  1 Millimeter wave grille cover 2 Millimeter wave radar sensor The millimeter wave radar sensor is used for vehicle−to−vehicle distance control cruising. When the millimeter wave radar sensor is disabled for some reason, the warning message appears on the multi−information display. For details, see “Vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode failure warning” on page 417. 415 STARTING AND DRIVING CAUTION To ensure that the dynamic radar cruise control system will function properly while driving, observe the following:  Always keep the millimeter wave radar sensor and grille cover clean. When cleaning, use a soft cloth and be careful not to damage the sensor and grille cover.  Avoid strong impacts around the millimeter wave radar sensor. An incorrect millimeter wave radar sensor alignment will result in system malfunction. A special device is required to adjust the millimeter wave radar sensor alignment. Be sure to have the sensor adjusted by your Lexus dealer.  Do not disassemble the millimeter wave radar sensor.  Do not affix a sticker (including a transparent sticker) or attach an accessory around the millimeter radar sensor or the grille cover.  Do not modify or paint the grille cover. When replacing the grille cover, be sure to use a genuine grille cover. 416 For vehicles sold in U.S.A. FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. FCC RF exposure information This device complies with the FCC RF exposure requirements. For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. STARTING AND DRIVING (h) Vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode failure warning G31020 If there is trouble somewhere in the dynamic radar cruise control while the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode is on, the ”CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes, the master warning light comes on and the warning tone sounds, and one or more of the following warning messages will appear on the multi−information display. G13073 If the system cannot easily measure the vehicle−to−vehicle distance because of a dirty millimeter wave radar sensor or grille cover while the dynamic radar cruise control is on, the above message appears. If this message appears, clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth and try setting the preset speed again. If the dirt is removed without cleaning, the system will automatically enter the “RADAR READY” mode. If the system does not enter the “RADAR READY” mode even after cleaning or the message remains on the display, the system might be malfunctioning. Although it is no problem to continue driving, contact your Lexus dealer.  “CLEAN RADAR SENSOR”  “CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE”  “CHECK CRUISE SYSTEM” If any warning message shown above appears, the preset speed automatically cancels out. 417 STARTING AND DRIVING G13074 If the system cannot easily measure the vehicle−to−vehicle distance because of the following conditions while the dynamic radar cruise control is on, the above message appears.  The driving pattern selector switch is set to the snow position.  It is determined that it is difficult to make a measurement because of bad weather (such as extremely hot weather).  The wipers are operated at high speed with the wiper lever in the “AUTO” position. In the following cases, the dynamic radar cruise control switches to the “RADAR READY” mode:  The driving pattern selector switch is changed to the normal or power position.  The wipers are stopped or are switched to low speed or intermittent operation. (Including intermittent and stopped wipers in the “AUTO” position.) In the above conditions, press the control lever upward in the “+ RES” direction and release it. The dynamic radar cruise control will be restored, however, even after the weather clears, if the setting operation cannot be performed or if the warning message still appears, the system might have malfunctioned. Although it is no problem to continue driving, contact your Lexus dealer. 418 G13075 If the system malfunction is detected when dynamic radar cruise control is in the “RADAR READY” mode or operating, the above message appears. If this message appears, stop your vehicle in a safe place, turn the engine switch off, and then restart it to reset the system. If the setting still cannot be made or the same message appears again, the system might have malfunctioned. Although it is no problem to continue driving, contact your Lexus dealer. NOTICE While you are cruising with the dynamic radar cruise control on, if the master warning light comes on, the “CRUISE” indicator light flashes, “CHECK CRUISE SYSTEM” appears on the multi−information display and the warning tone sounds, turn the engine switch off and then on again. If the function is cancelled again after setting or if settings cannot be made, the dynamic radar cruise control system may be malfunctioning. Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. STARTING AND DRIVING Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode This mode allows you to cruise at a desired speed over about 45 km/h (28 mph) with your foot off the accelerator pedal. Cruising speed can be maintained, although a slight speed change may occur when driving up or down a gradient, within the limits of engine performance. On steeper hills, the speed will change more radically so it is better to drive without cruise control. When cruise control is on, the driving pattern of the automatic transmission is fixed in the normal mode, regardless of the position of the selector switch. CAUTION  In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, an approach warning does not activate even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle−to−vehicle distance is detected. Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always confirm the setting in the multi−information display.  The conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode of the dynamic radar cruise control should not be used in the following conditions, which could result in death or serious injury. ♦ To help maintain maximum control of your vehicle, do not use fixed speed control mode when using dynamic radar cruise control while driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) or winding roads. ♦ Avoid vehicle speed increasing when driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is too fast in relation to the preset speed in the fixed speed control mode, cancel the fixed control mode and then downshift the transmission to use engine braking to slow down. 419 STARTING AND DRIVING (a) Turning the system on When the engine switch is turned off, the system is also automatically turned off. To use the dynamic radar cruise control again, push the “ON−OFF” button again to turn it on. CAUTION g31001 To operate conventional cruise control mode, push the “ON−OFF” button. This turns the system on. The “CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on and “RADAR READY” appears on the multi−information display. Push the control lever in the “MODE” direction for longer than 1 second to change to conventional cruise control mode. The message “RADAR READY” on the multi−information display will turn off. You can now set your desired cruising speed. Pushing the “ON−OFF” button again will turn the system completely off and “CRUISE OFF” will appear on the multi−information display. However, once the vehicle−to−vehicle distance control mode activates and is used, it cannot be changed to the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode using the above operation. To change the mode, push the “ON−OFF” button to turn the system off and then push it again to turn it on. Next push the lever in the “MODE” direction for longer than about 1 second. 420 To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control , keep the “ON−OFF” button off when not using dynamic radar cruise control. STARTING AND DRIVING (b) Setting operation g31002 Each function is described below. 1 Setting the desired speed You cannot set a desired speed if the master warning light comes on, the warning tone sounds and the multi−information display indicates a warning message such as “CHECK CRUISE SYSTEM”. If this messages appears on the display, see “Conventional cruise control mode failure warning” on page 423. If you turn off the “ON−OFF” button while the warning message is displayed, the warning message turns off and the multi−information display switches to another screen. When you turn the “ON−OFF” button on again, the warning message comes back on the display. If no warning message appears on the display, the setting can be made. You can change the dynamic radar cruise control screen to another screen even while the warning message is displayed. 2 Cancelling the preset speed The transmission must be in “D”, “6” (sixth range), “5” (fifth range) or “4” (fourth range) before you set the cruise control speed in the conventional cruise control mode of the dynamic radar cruise control. You can cancel the preset speed by doing any of the following: After bringing the vehicle to the desired speed, press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle at that speed and the multi−information display shows the preset speed. At this time, you may take your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you need to accelerate − for example, when passing − depress the accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed the preset speed. When you release the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the speed set prior to acceleration. c. Pushing the “ON−OFF” button. a. Pulling the control lever in the ”CANCEL” direction. b. Depressing the brake pedal. If cancelled by a. or b., the multi−information displays shows nothing and the conventional cruise control enters the ready mode. If cancelled by c., the “CRUISE” indicator light goes off in the instrument cluster and the multi−information display shows “CRUISE OFF”. In this case, the preset speed data is cleared, and you must set the speed from the beginning. 421 STARTING AND DRIVING In the following cases, the preset speed automatically cancels out: a. The vehicle speed falls below about 40km/h (25 mph). b. If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 mph) below the preset speed, the preset speed will also automatically be cancelled. c. The control lever is pressed downward in the “– SET” direction and held at less than about 45 km/h (28 mph). (45 km/h (28 mph) is designated as a lower preset speed limit .) If the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset speed data is cleared and you must set the speed from the beginning. If cancelled by the above cases, the multi−information display shows nothing and the conventional cruise control enters the ready mode. If the preset speed automatically cancels out for other than the above reasons, do not operate the cruise control. Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer at the earliest opportunity. 422 3 Resetting to a faster speed Press the control lever upward in the “+ RES” direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained. While the lever is held upward, the vehicle will gradually gain speed. When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control lever upward in the “+ RES” direction quickly within 0.6 seconds. A quicker way to reset the speed is to accelerate and then press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction. STARTING AND DRIVING 4 Resetting to a slower speed Press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained. While the lever is held downward, the vehicle speed will gradually decrease. When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be lowered 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction quickly within 0.6 seconds. A quicker way to reset the preset speed is to depress the brake pedal and then press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction. Even if you downshift the transmission from the “D” or “6” (sixth range) to “5” (fifth range), or from “D” or “5” (fifth range) to “4” (fourth range) in the conventional cruise control mode, engine braking will not be applied because this mode is not cancelled. To slow down, reset the cruise control to a slower speed with the cruise control lever or depress the brake pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled. 5 Resuming the preset speed If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling the control lever, by depressing the brake pedal or vehicle stability control activation, pushing the lever up in the “+ RES” direction will restore the speed set prior to cancellation. However, once the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will not be resumed. (c) Conventional cruise control mode failure warning G13075 If the system malfunction is detected when the conventional cruise control mode is in the ready mode or operating, the master warning light comes on, a warning tone sounds and the above message appears. If this message appears, push the “ON−OFF” button to turn the system off and then push it again to turn it on. If the setting still cannot be made or the same message appears again, the system might have malfunctioned. Although it is no problem to continue driving, contact your Lexus dealer. 423 STARTING AND DRIVING ADAPTIVE VARIABLE SUSPENSION SYSTEM (GS430 only) TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM The traction control system automatically helps prevent the spinning of drive wheels when the vehicle is started or accelerated on slippery road surfaces. When the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, the system automatically turns on. G31041  1 Sport position 2 Normal position The adaptive variable suspension system controls the suspension according to the road and driving conditions. Selecting an optimum driving mode allows good vehicle posture and steering wheel operation in conjunction with variable gear ratio steering system and electric power steering system. Sport mode: Suitable for sporty type driving, such as on winding mountain roads and high speed driving. Normal mode: Suitable for ordinary driving. To turn on the sport mode, push the selector switch on the “SPORT” side. The indicator comes on in the instrument cluster. To change to the normal mode, push the switch to the “NORM” side. 424 CAUTION Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of the vehicle and power against drive wheels cannot be maintained, even though the traction control system is in operation. Do not drive the vehicle under any speed or maneuvering conditions which may cause the vehicle to lose traction control. In situations where the road surface is covered with ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow tires or tire chains. Always drive at an appropriate and cautious speed for the present road conditions. STARTING AND DRIVING GS300—The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. If the indicator light does not come on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, contact your Lexus dealer. G31038 Traction control off mode (two−wheel drive models only) Slip indicator light Leave the system on during the ordinary driving so that it can operate when needed. G31008 You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the traction control system is in the self−check mode, but does not indicate a malfunction. When the traction control system is operating, the following conditions occur:  The system controls the spinning of the drive wheels. At this time, the slip indicator light blinks.  You may feel vibration or noise in your vehicle, caused by operation of the brakes. This indicates the system is functioning properly. GS430—The slip indicator light comes on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. The light goes off when the engine is started. If your wheels get stuck in a ditch when you are driving on a severe off road and sand, turn off the traction control system. This system that controls engine performance interferes with the process of freeing your wheels. To turn off: Push “TRAC OFF” switch. The slip indicator light will come on. The vehicle stability control system is always activated even if the traction control system is turned off. 425 STARTING AND DRIVING GS430 only—When the vehicle speed exceeds about 50 km/h (30 mph) even if the traction control system is turned off, the system turns on automatically. Traction control system failure warning To turn on: Push “TRAC OFF” switch once again. The slip indicator light will go off. In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer: G31039  The slip indicator light does not come on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode.  The slip indicator light remains on after the engine is started (GS430), or remains on a few seconds after the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode (GS300).  The slip indicator light comes on in the normal driving mode while driving.  1 GS430 2 GS300 If the traction control system malfunctions, the slip indicator light (two−wheel drive models only) and brake system warning light (yellow) come on. At this time, the above message appears. (GS430 only—In some cases, the multi−information display shows either “CHECK VSC” or “CHECK ECB*” only.) *: Electronically Controlled Brake System If the message appears, the traction control system, vehicle stability control system and hill−start assist control system do not work. Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. 426 STARTING AND DRIVING VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM The vehicle stability control system helps provide comprehensive control of the systems such as anti−lock brake system, traction control, engine control, etc. This system automatically controls the brakes and engine to help prevent the vehicle from skidding when cornering on a slippery road surface or operating steering wheel abruptly. The vehicle stability control system is activated when the vehicle speed is about more than 15 km/h (9 mph). You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the system is in the self−check mode, but does not indicate a malfunction. CAUTION  Do not rely excessively on the vehicle stability control system. Even if the vehicle stability control system is operating, you must always drive carefully and attentively to avoid serious injury. Reckless driving will result in an accident. If the slip indicator light blinks, sounding an alarm, special care should be taken while driving.  Only use tires of specified size. The size, manufacturer, brand and tread pattern for all 4 tires should be the same. If you use the tires other than specified, or different type or size, the vehicle stability control system may not function correctly. When replacing the tires or wheels, contact your Lexus dealer.  In situations where the road surface is covered with ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow tires or tire chains. 427 STARTING AND DRIVING Vehicle stability control failure warning G31038 G31039 Slip indicator light If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator light blinks and an alarm sounds intermittently. Special care should be taken while driving. GS430—The slip indicator light comes on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. The light goes off when the engine is started. GS300—The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. If the indicator light does not come on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, contact your Lexus dealer. 428  1 GS430 2 GS300 If the vehicle stability control system malfunctions, the slip indicator light (two−wheel drive models only) and brake system warning light (yellow) come on. At this time, the above message appears. (GS430 only—In some cases, the multi−information display shows either “CHECK VSC” or “CHECK ECB*” only.) *: Electronically Controlled Brake System If the message appears, the vehicle stability control system, traction control system and hill−start assist control system do not work. Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. STARTING AND DRIVING HILL−START ASSIST CONTROL SYSTEM The hill−start assist control system assists you in starting to move up a steep or slippery hill. When you start to move up the hill slope, the system helps to reduce the vehicle’s rolling backward distance while you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. CAUTION  Do not rely excessively on the hill−start assist control system. The vehicle may not be able to start smoothly on road surfaces or off−road surfaces such as extremely steep slopes or icy roads, on which sliding can occur very easily.  Do not use the hill−start assist control system to stop the vehicle. This system is not designed for stopping the vehicle on an uphill slope. The hill−start assist control system will operate for 5 seconds maximally when all of the following conditions apply.  When the selector lever is in “D” or “S” position  When the brake pedal is not depressed The system is designed to operate when the vehicle is starting on an uphill slope; therefore, if the selector lever is in “P” or “N”, it will not operate. It will not operate either if the vehicle starts to move in reverse on a slope with the selector lever in “R”. When the hill−start assist control system is operating, you may hear a sound. This indicates the hill−start assist control is operating normally and does not indicate a malfunction. G31038 Slip indicator light When the hill−start assist control system is operating, the slip indicator light flashes. At the same time, the stop lights and high mounted stoplight are lit. 429 STARTING AND DRIVING GS430—The slip indicator light comes on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. The light goes off when the engine is started. Hill−start assist control system failure warning GS300—The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. If the indicator light does not come on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, contact your Lexus dealer. G31039 Keep the following in mind when driving:  The hill−start assist control system operates for 5 seconds maximally. If both the brake and accelerator pedals remain undepressed for longer than 5 seconds, the system will gradually stop operating.  The hill−start assist control system is not designed for stopping the vehicle on an uphill slope. When stopping the vehicle, be sure to depress the brake pedal.  1 GS430 2 GS300 If the hill−start assist control system malfunctions, the slip indicator light (two−wheel drive models only) and brake system warning light (yellow) come on. At this time, the above message appears. (GS430 only—In some cases, the multi−information display shows either “CHECK VSC” or “CHECK ECB*” only.) *: Electronically Controlled Brake System If the message appears, the hill−start assist control system, vehicle stability control system and traction control system do not work. Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. 430 STARTING AND DRIVING VARIABLE GEAR RATIO STEERING SYSTEM (GS430 only) While the system is not functioning, a larger degree of wheel maneuvering is needed during driving at low speed. If the center position of the steering wheel is changed frequently, have your vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer. The variable gear ratio steering system adjusts the wheel turning angle depending on the vehicle speed and how much you turn the steering wheel. CAUTION The vehicle wheel turning angle will be changed with a smaller degree of wheel maneuvering when you are driving at very low speed such as when putting your vehicle into a garage. When you start or stop the engine, you may hear a small noise and the steering wheel may move slightly. This is caused when the system starts or stops, and does not indicate a malfunction. In the following cases, to prevent the system from overheating, the system could be temporarily deactivated with the change in the center position of the steering wheel. This is not a malfunction. After the cause of the problem is eliminated, the system will return to normal automatically after a few minutes.  If you continue maneuvering the steering wheel when the vehicle is stopped or running at very low speed  If you continue driving holding the steering wheel to the extreme right or left Take due care especially when driving at low speed as the vehicle changes direction in greater proportion to the steering wheel maneuvering. NOTICE Do not disconnect the battery with the steering wheel turned, or the center position of the steering wheel could be slightly and temporarily changed. However, after driving for a short while, the system will return to normal and the center position of the steering wheel will be in the appropriate position. If you disconnect and reconnect the battery terminal, the system is reset temporarily. However, it is no problem to drive. Drive for a short while, the system will be set automatically and return to normal.  If you maneuver the steering wheel immediately after starting the engine at less than about −30C (−22F) 431 STARTING AND DRIVING Variable gear ratio steering system failure warning G31044 If there is any malfunction in the system, the above message appears and the master warning light comes on. If the warning message and light come on while driving, the system is not working. Although conventional steering operates when maneuvered, a larger degree of wheel maneuvering (than at the time when the system is functioning properly) is needed when driving at low speed. At this time, the center position of the steering wheel could be changed. Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle repaired at your Lexus dealer. VEHICLE DYNAMICS INTEGRATED MANAGEMENT (GS430 only) Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management (VDIM) helps manage control for vehicle stability control system, anti−lock brake system, brake assist system, traction control system, engine output control, hill−start assist control system and also manages variable gear ratio steering system and electric power steering system. In order to control sudden steering wheel operation and the sideslip on slippery road surfaces, this system provides excellent vehicle stability by automatically controlling the brake, engine output and front wheel angle. The state of the tires will affect the performance of the vehicle dynamics integrated management system. Be sure to check the following:  Are tires of specified size installed?  Are tires of identical type installed?  Do the tires have stipulated tire pressure?  Are the tires worn? A problem with the tires or modified suspension systems will have an adverse effect on the system and may cause a malfunction, so be careful. 432 STARTING AND DRIVING When the slip indicator light comes on, and the message “CHECK ECB*” appears on the multi−information display, the vehicle dynamics integrated management does not operate. Have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. *: Electronically Controlled Brake System In addition, when the master warning light comes on, and the message “CHECK VGRS” or “CHECK P/S” appears on the multi−information display, the system will not be temporarily functioning. Although it is no problem in driving as usual, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. CAUTION Do not overestimate the vehicle dynamics integrated management. Even when this management is functional, there is a limit to vehicle stability, and irresponsible driving may lead to an accident. When driving, you should always pay attention to your speed and keep a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. BRAKE SYSTEM GS430: This brake system has 3 independent hydraulic circuits. If any circuits should fail, the other will still work. However, the pedal will be harder to press, and your stopping distance will increase. Also, the brake system warning light (red) may come on. GS300: The tandem master cylinder brake system is a hydraulic system with two separate sub−systems. If either sub−system should fail, the other will still work. However, the pedal will be harder to press, and your stopping distance will increase. Also, the brake system warning light (red) may come on. CAUTION Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately. Brake actuator (GS430) The brake actuator uses brake fluid pressurized by the pump to power−assist the brakes. If the brake actuator fails during driving, the brake system warning light (red) comes on and the buzzer sounds continuously. In this case, the brakes may not work properly. If the brake system warning light comes on, immediately stop your vehicle and contact your Lexus dealer. 433 STARTING AND DRIVING Any of the following conditions may occur, but does not indicate a malfunction: Brake booster (GS300)  The brake system warning light (red) may stay on for about 60 seconds after the engine is started. It is normal if the light turns off after a while. The brake booster uses engine vacuum to power−assist the brakes. If the engine should quit while you are driving, you can bring the vehicle to a stop with normal pedal pressure. There is enough reserved vacuum for one or two stops but no more!  Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the brake system warning light (red). It is normal if the light goes out after a few seconds. CAUTION  You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment after the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake system. CAUTION  Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls. Each push on the pedal uses up your reserved brake fluid pressure.  Even if the power assist is completely lost, the brakes will still work. But you will have to push the pedal hard, much harder than normal. And your braking distance will increase.  Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls. Each push on the pedal uses up your reserved vacuum.  Even if the power assist is completely lost, the brakes will still work. But you will have to push the pedal hard, much harder than normal. And your braking distance will increase. Anti−lock brake system The anti−lock brake system is designed to automatically help prevent lock−up of the wheels during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This assists in providing directional stability and steering performance of the vehicle under these circumstances. Effective way to press the ABS brake pedal: When the anti−lock brake system function is in action, you may feel the brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise. In this situation, to let the anti−lock brake system work for you, just hold the brake pedal down more firmly. Do not pump the brake in a panic stop. This will result in reduced braking performance. 434 STARTING AND DRIVING The anti−lock brake system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph). Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces such as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day tends to activate the anti−lock brake system. You may hear a click or motor sound in the engine compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the anti−lock brake system is in the self−check mode, and does not indicate a malfunction. When the anti−lock brake system is activated, the following conditions may occur. They do not indicate a malfunction of the system:  You may hear the anti−lock brake system operating and feel the brake pedal pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle body and steering wheel. You may also hear the motor sound in the engine compartment even after the vehicle is stopped.  At the end of the anti−lock brake system activation, the brake pedal may move a little forward. CAUTION Do not overestimate the anti−lock brake system: Although the anti−lock brake system assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, because there are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of steering wheel operation even with the anti−lock brake system on. If tire grip performance exceeds its capability, or if hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the rain, the anti−lock brake system does not provide vehicle control. Anti−lock brake system is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Compared with vehicles without an anti−lock brake system, your vehicle may require a longer stopping distance in the following cases:  Driving on rough, gravel or snow−covered roads.  Driving with tire chains installed.  Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road.  Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or has other differences in surface height. 435 STARTING AND DRIVING Install all 4 tires of specified size at appropriate pressure: The anti−lock brake system detects vehicle speeds using the speed sensors for respective wheels’ turning speeds. The use of tires other than specified may fail to detect the accurate turning speed resulting in a longer stopping distance. “ABS” warning light G31080  1 U.S.A. 2 Canada GS430—The light comes on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. If the anti−lock brake system and the brake assist system work properly, the light turns off in a few seconds after the engine is started. GS300—The light comes on for a few seconds when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. It indicates the anti−lock brake system and the brake assist system work properly. If either system malfunctions, the light comes on again. When the “ABS” warning light is on, the anti−lock brake system and the brake assist system do not operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally. 436 STARTING AND DRIVING If any of the following conditions occur, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.  The light does not come on when engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode.  The light remains on after the engine is started (GS430), or remains on a few seconds after the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode (GS300).  The light comes on while you are driving. A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not indicate a problem. CAUTION If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the brake system warning light (red), immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. In this case, not only the anti−lock brake system will fail but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking. GS430 only—Either of the following conditions may occur, but does not indicate a malfunction:  The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the engine is started. It is normal if it turns off after a while. Drum−in−disc type parking brake system Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding−down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding−down. Brake assist system When you slam the brakes on, the brake assist system judges as an emergency stop and provides more powerful braking for a driver who cannot hold down the brake pedal firmly. When you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be applied. At this time, you may hear a sound in the engine compartment and feel the vibrations of the brake pedal. This does not indicate a malfunction. The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph). The brake assist system may not work for about 60 seconds after the engine is started. For an explanation of this system’s warning light, see “ABS” warning light on page 80 or 436.  Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light. It is normal if it turns off after a few seconds. 437 STARTING AND DRIVING BRAKE PAD WEAR LIMIT INDICATORS ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM The electric power steering system, using an electric motor, assists the turning of the steering wheel. G31006 In the following cases, you may feel the steering becomes heavy. However, the electric power steering system warning light does not come on. (Because it is not a malfunction.) When maneuvering or turning frequently over a long time, the power steering effect will be reduced to prevent the system from overheating. Avoid turning the steering wheel, or stop the vehicle. The system will become cool in about 10 minutes. The brake pad wear limit indicators on your disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn to the extent that replacement is required. If you hear a squealing or scraping noise while driving, have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Expensive rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed. GS430 front brake only— The high brake performance is achieved by proper wear of brake pads and discs. As a result, the brake discs may wear earlier than the ones on the conventional brake system. When brake pads are replaced, brake disc thickness is required to be measured. It is dangerous to continue driving when brake pads and discs have exceeded the wear limit. 438 NOTICE Frequent maneuvering and turning over a long time may cause damage to the system in which the mechanism prevents overheating of the electric power steering system. When the battery is discharged, check the battery’s condition. If necessary, recharge or replace the battery. For details, see “Checking battery condition” on page 581. STARTING AND DRIVING CAUTION G31040 If the electric power steering system warning light comes on, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. In this case, more effort is required for the steering wheel to turn than usual. Drive your vehicle while firmly gripping the steering wheel. Electric power steering system warning light The light comes on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. If the electric power steering system works properly, the light turns off after a few seconds. If the system has malfunctions, the light comes on again. If the following conditions occur, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.  The light does not come on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode or remains on.  The light stays on while you are driving. 439 STARTING AND DRIVING TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM The tire pressure warning system warns you that the tire inflation pressure is low. The tire pressure warning system is not a substitute for checking normal tire inflation pressure. Check the tire inflation pressure with a tire pressure gauge regularly. CAUTION The warning system may not activate immediately if bursts or sudden air leakage should occur. G31003 Tire pressure warning light The tire pressure warning light comes on when the engine switch “IG−ON” mode is selected, and goes off after a few seconds. This means the tire pressure warning light is operating properly. If the tire inflation pressure becomes low, the light comes on again. At this time, the master warning light comes on and the message “LOW TIRE” appears on the multi−information display. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the light after a few minutes. If the light blinks, the tire pressure warning system is not working properly. At this time, the master warning light comes on and the message “CHECK SYSTEM” appears on the multi−information display. 440 STARTING AND DRIVING Display Indicator status Tire pressure warning light ON Multi− information display LOW TIRE (PRESSURE) Tire pressure warning light Blinking Multi− information display CHECK (TIRE PRESSURE) SYSTEM Meanings Do this CAUTION Tire inflation pressure is low Adjust the tire inflation pressure Tire pressure warning system malfunction Have the system checked at your Lexus dealer If the tire pressure warning light comes on, be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury. Vehicles with run−flat tires:  Decelerate to the lowest appropriate speed as soon as possible. Do not drive over 90 km/h (55 mph).  Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.  If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Have the tire replaced by the nearest Lexus dealer.  Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes. Vehicles with standard tires:  Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.  If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer.  Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes. 441 STARTING AND DRIVING The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the light after a few minutes. Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch should not turn off the tire pressure warning light. Adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the light. The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few minutes. 442 CAUTION Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label), you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS–tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under−inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under−inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under−inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. STARTING AND DRIVING Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under−inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). NOTICE  Do not use liquid sealants for a flat tire as tire pressure warning valve and transmitter will be damaged.  When the tires must be repaired or replaced, have them repaired or replaced by your Lexus dealer or an authorized tire dealer. The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters will be affected by the installation or removal of tires. 443 STARTING AND DRIVING If the tire pressure warning light blinks...  If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.  If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to a different tire setting. G31048  If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or wheel housings.  If non−genuine Lexus wheels are used.  If tire chains are used.  If the tire inflation pressure is more than 500 kPa (5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar, 73 psi). If the tire pressure warning light blinks when the engine switch “IG−ON” mode is selected, the tire pressure warning system is not working properly. The system will be disabled in the following conditions: (When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)  If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.  If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered.  If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.  If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle. 444 If the tire pressure warning light blinks frequently when the engine switch “IG−ON” mode is selected, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. Even if you use genuine wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires. Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch should not turn off the tire pressure warning light. STARTING AND DRIVING For vehicles sold in U.S.A. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTICE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.  Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 445 STARTING AND DRIVING Replacing tires and wheels When replacing the tires and wheels, be sure to install tire pressure warning valves and transmitters. ID codes on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are registered on the tire pressure warning ECU. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. Have the ID code registered by your Lexus dealer. Tire pressure warning reset switch G31004a If the ID code is not registered, the system will not work properly. After about 1 hour, the tire pressure warning light blinks to indicate a system malfunction. NOTICE When the tires or tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be replaced, have them replaced by your Lexus dealer. The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters will be affected by the installation or removal of tires. When initializing the system, the present tire inflation pressure is stored as standard. The tire pressure warning system determines decreased air pressure by comparing the present and the standard tire inflation pressures. When you change the set tire inflation pressure, it is necessary to initialize the tire pressure warning system.  When rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and rear tire inflation pressures.  When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc.  When changing the tire size. 446 STARTING AND DRIVING To initialize the system, perform the following: 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place and select the engine switch in “OFF” mode. 2. Adjust the pressure of all the installed tires to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (See “Tire and wheels” on pages 542 and 546.) G31007 3. Select the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode. 4. Push and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly three times and the message “PRESSURE INITIAL” appears on the multi−information display. 5. Wait for a few minutes with the engine switch in “IG−ON” mode, and then select the engine switch in “OFF” position. If you push the tire pressure reset switch while the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed. If you push the tire pressure reset switch accidentally and initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the system again. If the tire pressure warning light does not blink slowly three times and the message “PRESSURE INITIAL” does not appear on the multi−information display when you push and hold the reset switch, initialization has failed and the tire pressure warning system may not work properly. In this case, initialize the system again. If initialization cannot be performed, have the system checked at your Lexus dealer. 447 STARTING AND DRIVING CAUTION Do not push the reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal. Tire pressure warning select switch G31005a  1 Main position 2 2nd position 2 sets of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes can be registered. Once a second set of tires is registered at “2nd”, you can switch between tire set settings simply by pressing the tire pressure warning select switch. There are 2 settings “MAIN” position: The ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter on the tires originally installed on the vehicle is registered. “ 2nd ” position: The code is not registered. When you replace a new set of tires, purchase tire pressure warning valves and transmitters from your Lexus dealer and have the new ID code registered by your Lexus dealer. 448 STARTING AND DRIVING If the tire pressure select switch is set to the wrong tire setting, the system will not work properly. After about 1 hour, the tire pressure warning light blinks to indicate a system malfunction. PRE−COLLISION SYSTEM (Vehicles with dynamic radar cruise control) When the pre−collision system detects what it perceives to be an unavoidable collision, the front seat belts are quickly drawn back by the retractors (pre−collision seat belts) and more powerful braking is applied according to the amount of pedal depression to help reduce injury to the occupants and damage to the vehicle body. In addition, the adaptive variable suspension works to help regulate the vehicle not to pitch forward so much. The pre−collision system will operate when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. 449 STARTING AND DRIVING Pre−collision sensor The millimeter wave radar sensor detects vehicles or objects near or on the road your vehicle is traveling and determines the possibility of a collision based on the object position, vehicle speeds and the course you are traveling. The pre−collision sensor will operate when the vehicle speed is about 5 km/h (3 mph) or over. G31019a CAUTION To ensure that pre−collision system will function properly while driving, observe the following. Failure to follow these instructions could reduce the effectiveness of the pre−collision system in case of vehicle accident:  Always keep the millimeter wave radar sensor and grille cover clean. When cleaning, use a soft cloth and be careful not to damage the sensor and grille cover.  Avoid strong impacts around the millimeter wave radar sensor. An incorrect millimeter wave radar sensor alignment will result in system malfunction. A special device is required to adjust the millimeter wave radar sensor alignment. Be sure to have the sensor adjusted by your Lexus dealer.  Do not disassemble the millimeter wave radar sensor.  1 Millimeter wave grille cover 2 Millimeter wave radar sensor  Do not affix a sticker (including a transparent sticker) or attach an accessory around the millimeter radar sensor or the grille cover. The millimeter wave radar sensor is installed in the front grille of the hood.  Do not modify or paint the grille cover. When replacing the grille cover, be sure to use a genuine grille cover. The millimeter wave radar sensor cannot detect plastic objects such as pylons, and may not detect people, animals, bicycles, motor cycles, trees, snowbanks, etc. as objects with which your vehicle may collide. 450 STARTING AND DRIVING Pre−collision seat belts (Front seat belts only) Pre−collision brake assist system When the pre−collision sensor detects an object or vehicle with which your vehicle might collide and determines that a collision may be unavoidable, the seat belts are quickly drawn back by the retractors to enhance the effects of the seat belt pretensioners. The pre−collision seat belts also work as well when hard braking. When the pre−collision sensor detects an object or vehicle with which your vehicle might collide, and determines that a collision may be unavoidable, depressing the brake pedal provides more powerful braking according to the amount of pedal depression. The pre−collision seat belts will operate in the following conditions:  When the vehicle speed is about 30 km/h (18 mph) or over.  When the approaching speed in regard to the object or the vehicle exceeds about 30 km/h (18 mph).  When the front seat occupants wear the seat belts. In the following conditions, the seat belts are quickly drawn back by the retractors regardless of the possibility of the collision:  When the vehicle is spinning or cannot take a turn properly at more than about 15 km/h (10 mph). The pre−collision brake assist system will operate when the following all conditions are met.  When the brake pedal is depressed.  When the approaching speed in regard to the object or the vehicle exceeds about 30 km/h (18 mph). If the brake pedal is kept depressed before the sensor’s determination of unavoidable collision, the pre−collision brake assist system will operate soon after the sensor ’s determination. 451 STARTING AND DRIVING Adaptive variable suspension control (GS430 only) Pre−collision system failure warning When the pre−collision sensor detects an object or vehicle with which your vehicle may collide, and determines that a collision may be unavoidable, the adaptive variable suspension adjusts the damping effect on the shock absorbers and regulates the vehicle not to pitch forward so much. G31079 The adaptive variable suspension will operate when the following all conditions are met.  When the vehicle speed is about 5 km/h (3 mph) or over.  When the approaching speed in regard to the object or the vehicle exceeds about 30 km/h (18 mph). Pre−collision system warning light The light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the pre−collision system. The light comes on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode. If the system works properly, the light goes off after a few seconds. If the light does not come on when the engine switch is selected in “IG−ON” mode, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. If the system has a problem, the pre−collision system warning light comes on or blinks. At this time, the master warning light comes on, a warning tone sounds, and either of the following messages appears on the multi−information display.  PCS DISABLED NOW  CHECK PCS 452 STARTING AND DRIVING Precaution for pre−collision system G13030 The pre−collision system warning light blinks, and the above message appears in the following conditions:  The millimeter wave radar sensor or the grille cover is dirty. Clean the grille or sensor with a soft cloth to remove the dirt.  The pre−collision seat belts are activated repeatedly for a short time. The system turns off temporarily for overheating protection. The above conditions do not indicate a malfunction. If the problem is removed, the warning lights and message go out and the system returns to normal. G13031 It should be noted that the pre−collision sensor may detect the following as the objects with which your vehicle might collide, and the pre−collision system may operate, even though there is no possibility of collision.  When traveling through a curve, there is an object on the edge of the road.  When traveling through a curve, another vehicle is passing from the opposite direction.  When traveling across a narrow iron bridge.  When there is a metallic object on the road.  When there is a steel plate on the road at a construction site.  When there is a bump on the road.  When waiting to turn to the left in an intersection, and another vehicle is passing from the opposite direction.  If your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead very quickly. If the pre−collision system warning light remains on, and the above message appears, the pre−collision system may not operate. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle. 453 STARTING AND DRIVING CAUTION NOTICE  Do not rely solely on the pre−collision system to avoid accidents. Your safe and attentive driving practices are still the best way to avoid accidents and you are always responsible for the operation of the vehicle and the safety of your passengers. When driving, always pay attention to the surrounding conditions and the course you are driving. Even if there is no object with which your vehicle may collide, the pre−collision system may be activated as follows:  The pre−collision sensor’s collision detection performance is limited. The sensor is able to detect a forward object within 10 degrees on either left or right side. If it is out of the range, or if there is no or weak millimeter wave reflection, the sensor could not detect the object and the system does not work properly.  Even if the pre−collision system is operative in an unavoidable collision, unless the seat belts are worn and the brake pedal is depressed, the pre−collision seat belts and pre−collision brake assist system will not work. 454  The pre−collision seat belts work to quickly draw back the front seat belts by the retractors (pre−collision seat belts).  The pre−collision brake assist system works to apply more powerful braking than normal braking. SECTION 3–2 STARTING AND DRIVING Driving tips Break−in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo and luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 456 456 458 459 460 460 462 463 455 DRIVING TIPS BREAK−IN PERIOD Drive gently and avoid high speeds. You need not follow a break−in schedule with your new Lexus. But following a few simple tips for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add to the future economy and long life of your vehicle:  Avoid full throttle acceleration when starting and driving.  Avoid racing the engine.  Try to avoid hard stops during the first 300 km (200 miles).  Do not drive for a long time at any single speed, either fast or slow. OPERATION IN FOREIGN COUNTRIES If you plan to drive your Lexus in another country ... First, comply with the vehicle registration laws. Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded and minimum octane rating). 456 TIPS FOR DRIVING IN VARIOUS CONDITIONS  Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. This will allow you much better control.  Drive slowly onto curbs and, if possible, at a right angle. Avoid driving onto high, sharp−edged objects and other road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire damage such as a tire burst. Drive slowly when passing over bumps or travelling on a bumpy road. Otherwise, the impact could cause severe damage to the tires and/or wheels.  When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels until they touch the curb so that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the parking brake, and place the transmission in ”P”. If necessary, block the wheels.  Washing your vehicle or driving through deep water may get the brakes wet. To see whether they are wet, check that there is no traffic near you and then press the pedal lightly. If you do not feel a normal braking force, the brakes are probably wet. To dry them, drive the vehicle cautiously while lightly pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake applied. If they still do not work safely, pull to the side of the road and call a Lexus dealer for assistance. DRIVING TIPS CAUTION  Before driving off, make sure the parking brake is fully released and that the parking brake reminder light is off.  Do not continue normal driving when the brakes are wet. If they are wet, your vehicle will require a longer stopping distance, and it may pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Also, the parking brake will not hold the vehicle securely.  Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the engine is running.  Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. It can cause dangerous overheating, needless wear, and poor fuel economy.  To drive down a long or steep hill, reduce your speed and downshift. Remember, if you ride the brakes excessively, they may overheat and not work properly. See page 366.  Be careful when accelerating, upshifting, downshifting or braking on a slippery surface. The abrupt change in engine speed, such as sudden acceleration or engine braking, could cause the vehicle to skid or spin.  Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 140 km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle has high−speed capability tires. Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high−speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds. 457 DRIVING TIPS WINTER DRIVING TIPS Make sure your coolant is properly protected against freezing. Only use ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.) Make sure the engine oil viscosity is suitable for the cold weather. See page 533 for recommended viscosity. Leaving a heavy summer oil in your vehicle during winter months may cause harder starting. If you are not sure about which oil to use, call your Lexus dealer − they will be pleased to help. Check the electronic ignition system for loose connections or obvious damage. Keep the door locks from freezing. See “Checking the engine coolant level” on page 534 for details of coolant type selection. Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into the locks to keep them from freezing. For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −35C (−31F). Use a washer fluid containing an antifreeze solution. For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −42C (−44F). NOTICE This product is available at your Lexus dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix with water. NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint. Do not use plain water alone. 458 Check the condition of the battery and cables. Do not use your parking brake when there is a possibility it could freeze. Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of any battery, so it must be in top shape to provide enough power for winter starting. Page 581 tells you how to visually inspect the battery. Your Lexus dealer and most service stations will be pleased to check the battery charge level. When parking, put the transmission into ”P” and block the front wheels. Do not use the parking brake, or snow or water accumulated in and around the parking brake mechanism may freeze the parking brake, making it hard to release. DRIVING TIPS Keep ice and snow from accumulating under the fenders. DINGHY TOWING Ice and snow built up under your fenders can make steering difficult. During bad winter driving, stop and check under the fenders occasionally. Depending on where you are driving, we recommend you carry some emergency equipment. Some of the things you might put in the vehicle are tire chains, window scraper, bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel, jumper cables, etc. G32001 Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with four wheels on the ground) behind a motorhome. NOTICE Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to your vehicle. 459 DRIVING TIPS TRAILER TOWING HOW TO SAVE FUEL AND MAKE YOUR VEHICLE LAST LONGER Improving fuel economy is easy − just take it easy. It will help make your vehicle last longer, too. Here are some specific tips on how to save money on both fuel and repairs: G32002  Keep your tires inflated at the correct pressure. Check the inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Underinflation causes tire wear and wastes fuel.  Do not carry unneeded weight in your vehicle. Excess weight puts a heavier load on the engine, causing greater fuel consumption. Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your Lexus is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.  Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Once the engine is running smoothly, begin driving − but gently. Remember, however, that on cold winter days this may take a little longer.  Always keep the automatic transmission selector lever in the “D” position when engine braking is not required. Driving with the overdrive off will reduce the fuel economy. (For details, see “Automatic transmission” on page 359.)  Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Avoid jackrabbit starts.  Avoid long engine idling. If you have a long wait and you are not in traffic, it is better to turn off the engine and start again later.  Avoid engine over−revving. Use a gear position suitable for the road on which you are traveling. 460 DRIVING TIPS  Avoid continuous speeding up and slowing down. Stop−and−go driving wastes fuel.  Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams whenever possible.  Keep your vehicle tuned−up and in top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improper valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil and grease, brakes not adjusted, etc. all lower engine performance and contribute to poor fuel economy. For longer life of all parts and lower operating costs, keep all maintenance work on schedule, and if you often drive under severe conditions, see that your vehicle receives more frequent maintenance (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.)  Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal. This causes premature wear, overheating and poor fuel economy. CAUTION  Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try to time the traffic signals so you only need to stop as little as possible or take advantage of through streets to avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also reduce wear on your brakes.  Maintain a moderate speed on highways. The faster you drive, the greater the fuel consumption. By reducing your speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption.  Keep the front wheels in proper alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and slow down on rough roads. Improper alignment not only causes faster tire wear but also puts an extra load on the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel. Never turn off the engine to coast down hills. Your power steering and brake booster will not function without the engine running. Also, the emission control system operates properly only when the engine is running.  Keep the bottom of your vehicle free from mud, etc. This not only lessens weight but also helps prevent corrosion. 461 DRIVING TIPS VEHICLE LOAD LIMITS Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. Follow the load limits shown below. Total load capacity and seating capacity are also described on the tire and loading information label. For location of the tire and loading information label, see “Checking tire inflation pressure” on page 548. Total load capacity: 370 kg (815 lb.) Total load capacity means combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage. Seating capacity: Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3) Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 68 kg (150 lb.) per person. Depending on the weight of each person, the seating capacity given may exceed the total load capacity. NOTICE Even if the number of occupants are within the seating capacity, do not exceed the total load capacity. 462 Towing capacity Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing. Cargo capacity Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the size (weight) and the number of occupants. For details, see “Capacity and distribution” that follows. CAUTION Do not apply the load more than each load limit. That may cause not only damage to the tires, but also deterioration to the steering ability and braking ability, which may cause an accident. DRIVING TIPS CARGO AND LUGGAGE Stowage precautions When stowing cargo and luggage in the vehicle, observe the following: NOTICE Do not load the vehicle beyond the vehicle capacity weight specified on the tire and loading information label.  Put cargo and luggage in the trunk when at all possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.  Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.  For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight. CAUTION  Do not place anything on the package tray behind the rear seatback. Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or an accident.  Do not drive with objects left on top of the instrument panel. They may interfere with the driver’s field of view. Or they may move during sharp vehicle acceleration or turning, and impair the driver’s control of the vehicle. In an accident they may injure the vehicle occupants. 463 DRIVING TIPS Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants. (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) – (Total weight of occupants) Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing. Capacity and distribution Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit— (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 464 DRIVING TIPS Example on Your Vehicle 32SA03 As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of occupants who got on later must be reduced. In other words, if the increase in the number of occupants causes the excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you have to reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle. For details about total load capacity, see “Vehicle load limits” on page 462.  1 Cargo capacity 2 Total load capacity In case that 2 people with the combined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) are riding in your vehicle with the total load capacity of 370 kg (815 lb.), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows: 370 kg – 166 kg = 204 kg. (815 lb. – 366 lb. = 449 lb.) CAUTION Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. That may cause not only damage to the tire but also deterioration to the steering ability due to unbalance of the vehicle, causing an accident. From this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 176 kg (388 lb.) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows: 204 kg – 176 kg = 28 kg. (449 lb. – 388 lb. = 61 lb.) 465 DRIVING TIPS 466 SECTION 4 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY In case of an emergency If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot increase engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire (vehicles with run−flat tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire (vehicles with standard tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your keys or lock yourself out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 468 473 473 474 476 487 488 496 497 467 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY IF YOUR ENGINE STALLS WHILE DRIVING If your engine stalls while driving . . . 1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place. 2. Turn on your emergency flashers. 3. Turn the engine switch off, and try starting the engine again. If the engine will not start, see ”If your vehicle will not start”. CAUTION If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not work, so steering and braking will be much harder than usual. IF YOUR VEHICLE WILL NOT START (a) Simple checks Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the correct starting procedure instructions in ”Operating the engine switch” on page 348 and that you have sufficient fuel. Since your vehicle is equipped with the engine immobilizer, also check whether the other keys will start the engine. If they work, your electronic key may be broken. Have the key checked at your Lexus dealer. If none of your keys work, there may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer. Call your Lexus dealer. See ”Keys” on page 8. If the engine is not turning over or is turning over too slowly − 1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean. 2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch on the interior light. 3. If the light is out, dim or goes out when the starter is cranked, the battery is discharged. You may try jump starting. See ”(c) Jump starting” for further instruction. 4. If the engine does not start even after the battery has been recharged or replaced, see “(d) Starting the engine after a battery discharge” on page 472. If the light is O.K., but the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance. (See ”Foreword”.) 468 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY NOTICE Do not pull− or push−start the vehicle. It may damage the vehicle or cause a collision when the engine starts. Also the three−way catalytic converter may overheat and become a fire hazard. If the engine turns over at its normal speed but will not start − 1. The engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking. See ”(b) Starting a flooded engine” for further instructions. 2. If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance. (See ”Foreword”.) (b) Starting a flooded engine If the engine will not start, your engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking. If this happens, push the engine switch while the brake pedal is depressed with your left foot and the accelerator pedal is depressed with your right foot. Then the cranking hold function stops automatically, and you can try starting the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal. If the engine does not start, wait a few minutes and try again. If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair. Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance. (See ”Foreword”.) (c) Jump starting To avoid serious personal injury and damage to your vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid burns, electrical burns, or damaged electronic components, these instructions must be followed precisely. If you are unsure about how to follow this procedure, we strongly recommend that you seek help from your Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance. (See ”Foreword”.) CAUTION  Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is poisonous and corrosive. Wear protective safety glasses when jump starting, and avoid spilling acid on your skin, clothing, or vehicle.  If you should accidentally get acid on yourself or in your eyes, remove any contaminated clothing and flush the affected area with water immediately. Then get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while en route to the medical office.  The gas normally produced by a battery will explode if a flame or spark is brought near. Use only standardized jumper cables and do not smoke or light a match while jump starting. 469 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY NOTICE The battery used for boosting must be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you are sure that the booster battery is correct. G40026 GS430 470 5 Discharged battery 6 Booster battery IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY When boosting, use the battery of matching or higher quality. Any other battery may be difficult to jump start with. If jump starting is difficult, charge the battery for several minutes. 2. If required, remove all the vent plugs from the booster battery. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the booster battery. (This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and burns.) If the booster battery is an extended maintenance interval battery, it is not necessary to remove the vent plugs. G40027 3. If the engine in the vehicle with the booster battery is not running, start it and let it run for about 5 minutes. During jump starting, run the engine at about 2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed. 4. Locate positive (+) and negative (−) terminals of each battery. Connect the jumper cables in the exact order ( 1 2 3 4 ) shown in the illustration. GS300 5 Discharged battery 6 Booster battery GS300 only—Before carrying out the following procedure, remove the engine compartment cover. (See page 512.) JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE 1. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle, make sure the vehicles are not touching. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories. 1 Connect a positive (red) jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. 2 Connect the clamp at the other end of the positive (red) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery. 3 Connect a negative (black) cable clamp to the negative (−) terminal of the booster battery. 4 Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative (black) cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point (such as shown in the illustration) away from the battery. Do not connect it to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked. 471 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY CAUTION When making the connections, to avoid serious injury, do not lean over the battery or accidentally let the jumper cables or clamps touch anything except the correct battery terminals or the ground. 5. Charge the discharged battery with the jumper cables connected for approximately 5 minutes. At this time, run the engine in the vehicle with the booster battery at about 2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed. 6. Start your engine in the normal way. After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm for several minutes with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed. 7. Carefully disconnect the cables in the exact reverse order: the negative cable and then the positive cable. Check that the clamp on the jumper cables are tight. Recharge the discharged battery with the jumper cables connected for several minutes and restart your engine in the normal way. If another attempt is not successful, the battery may be depleted. Have it checked at your Lexus dealer. (d) Starting the engine after a battery discharge In the event that the battery is discharged, the engine may not restart even after the battery is recharged or replaced. For safety reasons, the engine may be disabled when battery voltage is extremely low. If the engine is disabled, the start system must be normalized. To normalized the start system: 8. Carefully dispose of the battery cover cloths which may now contain sulfuric acid. 1. Shift the transmission to the “P” position and set the engine switch off. 9. If removed, replace all the battery vent plugs. 2. Open and close any of the doors. The engine may not restart even after battery charging or replacement. If this happens, see “(d) Starting the engine after a battery discharge”. 3. Start the engine. If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent (for example, lights left on), you should have it checked at your Lexus dealer. 472 If the first start attempt is not successful... IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY IF YOU CANNOT INCREASE ENGINE SPEED If engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal is depressed, there may be a problem somewhere in the electronic throttle control system. Move the vehicle to a safe place by means of creeping and call a Lexus dealer for assistance: 1. Depress the brake pedal and shift to the “D” position. 2. Gradually release the brake pedal, and the vehicle starts to move by creeping. After arriving at a safe place, stop the vehicle and call a Lexus dealer for assistance. CAUTION IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS If your engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine has probably overheated. When the engine overheats Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your emergency flashers. Put the transmission in ”P” and apply the parking brake. A: If steam is coming from your engine: Turn off the engine. Leave the hood closed until there is no sign of steam or coolant. Your engine could have been seriously damaged already. Call your Lexus dealer for assistance.  The above method of moving the vehicle is for emergency. Use it only for moving minimum distances to a safe place. CAUTION  Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation. To help avoid personal injury, keep the hood closed until there is no steam. Escaping steam or coolant is sign of very high pressure. 473 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY B: If no steam is coming from your engine: Leave the engine running and turn off the air conditioning. Check the following. IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (Vehicles with run−flat tires)  Is the cooling fan operating?  Is the coolant in the acceptable range?  Is the engine drive belt O.K.? CAUTION G63004  When the engine is running, keep hands and clothing away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.  Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury could result from scalding hot fluid and steam blown out under pressure. If the cooling fan is not operating or the coolant is not in the acceptable range, turn off the engine and call your Lexus dealer. If both conditions are O.K., after the engine coolant temperature has cooled to normal, continue driving your vehicle. If the engine coolant temperature does not cool down, or your vehicle overheats again, have it checked as soon as possible by your Lexus dealer. 474 You may continue driving a vehicle with run−flat tires even if any tire goes flat. It may be able to run for a maximum of 160 km (100 miles) at a speed below 90 km/h (55 mph) after the tire pressure warning light comes on. When you drive your vehicle after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the tire must be replaced. Do not use the repaired tire. Observe the following precautions and take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY CAUTION NOTICE If the tire pressure warning light comes on, take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer as soon as possible, observing the following instructions:  Decelerate as soon as possible to the most appropriate speed that conditions permit. Do not drive for longer than 160 km (100 miles) or over 90 km/h (55 mph).  Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes, causing death or serious injury.  The warning system may not activate immediately if bursts or sudden air leakage should occur.  Do not use liquid sealants for a flat tire as tire pressure warning valves and transmitters will be damaged.  Take due care not to go over a curb stone and be careful of the holes in the road because deflated tire pressure affects tire cushion performance. The wheels, tires, body, suspension and other components could be damaged.  Your ground clearance is reduced if the run−flat tire goes flat so avoid driving over obstacles and drive slowly on rough, unpaved roads and speed bumps. Also, do not attempt to go through an automatic car wash as the vehicle may get caught, resulting in damage.  When the tires must be repaired and replaced, have them repaired and replaced by your Lexus dealer or an authorized tire dealer. The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters will be affected by the installation or removal of tires.  When the tires must be replaced, replace the grommets for tire pressure warning valves and transmitters as well. 475 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (Vehicles with standard tires) CAUTION If the tire pressure warning light comes on, observe the following instructions:  Decelerate as soon as possible to the most appropriate speed that conditions permit.  Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes, causing death or serious injury.  The warning system may not activate immediately if bursts or sudden air leakage should occur. 1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place − well away from the traffic. Avoid stopping on the center divider of a highway. Park on a level spot with firm ground. 2. Stop the engine and turn on your emergency flashers. 3. Firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in ”P”. 4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic. 476 5. Read the following instructions thoroughly. CAUTION When jacking, be sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of personal injury:  Follow jacking instructions.  Do not put any part of your body under a vehicle supported by a jack. Otherwise, personal injury may occur.  Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.  Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in ”P”. Block the wheel diagonally opposite to the one being changed if necessary.  Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point. Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury.  Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY  Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel changing.  Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle.  When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.  Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change the tire. Compact spare tire G40025 NOTICE  Do not use liquid sealants for a flat tire as tire pressure sensors will be damaged.  Do not continue driving with a deflated tire. Driving even a short distance can damage a tire beyond repair.  When the tires must be repaired and replaced, have them repaired and replaced by your Lexus dealer or an authorized tire dealer. The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters will be affected by the installation or removal of tires.  When the tires must be replaced, replace the grommets for tire pressure warning vales and transmitters as well. The compact spare tire is designed for temporary emergency use only. The compact spare tire is identified by the distinctive wording “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded into the side wall of the tire. To keep the compact spare tire noticeable, do not hide the wheel by a wheel cover or such. The compact spare tire saves space in your luggage compartment, and its lighter weight helps to improve fuel economy and permits easier installation in case of a flat tire. 477 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few minutes. The compact spare tire can be used many times, if necessary. It has tread life of up to 4800 km (3000 miles) depending on road conditions and your driving habits. When tread wear indicators appear on the tire, replace the tire. (See “Checking and replacing tires” on page 563.) 478 CAUTION  The compact spare tire was designed especially for your Lexus. Do not use it on any other vehicle.  Do not use more than one compact spare tire at the same time.  The pressure for the compact spare tire must be 420 kPa (4.3 kgf/cm2, 4.2 bar, 60 psi).  Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph) when driving with the compact spare tire.  Replace the compact spare tire with the standard tire as soon as possible.  Avoid sudden acceleration, sudden deceleration and sharp turns with the compact spare tire. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY NOTICE Your ground clearance is reduced when the compact spare tire is installed so avoid driving over obstacles and drive slowly on rough, unpaved roads and speed bumps. Also, do not attempt to go through an automatic car wash as the vehicle may get caught, resulting in damage. Access to spare tire G40003 1. Pull up the deck board. 479 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY G40004 G40005 2. Lift up the back side of the board and secure the board by hooking the lever at the top of the trunk lid opening as shown. When closing the board, replace the hook also in its original position as shown. Make sure the board is secured and does not fall down. NOTICE If you close the trunk lid with the board hooked, the hook may be damaged. 480 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY G40023  1 Wrench 2 Towing eyelet (for emergency towing) 3 Jack handle 4 Screwdriver 5 Spare tire 6 Wrenches 7 Pliers 8 Jack G40006  1 Joint 2 When removing the jack, turn the joint by hand in the ”contract” direction until the jack is free. 3 When storing, turn the joint by hand in the ”expand” direction until the jack is firmly secured to prevent it from flying forward during a collision or sudden braking. 3. Get the jack, wrench and spare tire. To prepare yourself for an emergency, you should familiarize yourself with the use of the jack and each tool, and their storage locations. 481 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY G40024 To remove the spare tire: 1 Remove the luggage tray. 2 Loosen the bolt and remove it. When storing the spare tire, place it with the outer side of the wheel facing up. Then bolt the tire in place and install the luggage tool box to prevent the tire from flying forward during a collision or sudden braking. 482 G40007 4. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up. When blocking the wheel, place a wheel block in front of one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY G40008 G40009 5. Loosen all the wheel nuts. 6. Position the jack at the jack points as shown. Always loosen the wheel nuts before raising the vehicle. Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid surface. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to loosen them. To get maximum leverage, fit the wrench to the nut so that the handle is on the right side, as shown above. Grab the wrench near the end of the handle and pull up on the handle. Be careful that the wrench does not slip off the nut. Do not remove the nuts yet − just unscrew them about one−half turn. CAUTION Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. The nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. 483 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY G40010 7. After making sure no one is in the vehicle, raise it high enough so that the spare tire can be installed. Allow for the fact that you need more ground clearance when putting on the spare tire than when removing the flat tire. To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle into the jack (it is a loose fit) and turn it clockwise. As the jack touches the vehicle and begins to lift, double−check that it is properly positioned. CAUTION Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone. 484 G40011 8. Remove the wheel nuts and remove the flat tire. Lift the flat tire straight off and put it aside. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY G40012 Before putting on the wheel, remove any corrosion on the mounting surfaces with a wire brush or such. Installation of wheels without good metal−to−metal contact at the mounting surface can cause wheel nuts to loosen and eventually cause a wheel to come off while driving. G40013 9. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger tight. Align the holes in the wheel with the bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get at least the top bolt started through its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it back over the other bolts. Reinstall the wheel nuts and tighten them as much as you can by hand. Press the tire back and see if you can tighten them more. CAUTION Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead to overtightening the nuts and damaging the bolts. The nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt or nut, clean it. 485 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY CAUTION G40014 10. Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the wheel nuts. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle. Use only the wheel nut wrench to tighten the nuts. Do not use other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot. Make sure the wrench is securely engaged over the nut. Tighten each nut a little at a time in the order shown. Repeat the process until all the nuts are tight. 486  When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of your body and all other persons around will not be injured as the vehicle is lowered to the ground.  Have the wheel nuts tightened with torque wrench to 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.), as soon as possible after changing wheels. Otherwise, the nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident.  Do not attach a heavily damaged plastic wheel ornament. It may fly off the wheel and cause accidents while the vehicle is moving. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY 11. After changing the wheel, check the air pressure of the replaced tire. Stow all the tools, jack and flat tire securely. IF YOUR VEHICLE BECOMES STUCK If the inflation pressure of the replaced tire is low, drive slowly to the nearest service station and fill to the correct pressure. If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc. then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward. Do not forget to reinstall the tire valve cap as dirt and moisture could get into the valve core and possibly cause air leakage. If the cap is missing, put a new one on as soon as possible. This is the same procedure for changing or rotating your tires. CAUTION Before driving, make sure all the tools, jack and flat tire are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking. Two−wheel drive models—Turn off the traction control system to become unstuck to allow the tires to spin enough to remove the vehicle from the obstruction. (For details, see “Traction control system” on page 424.) CAUTION Do not attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby people or objects. 487 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY NOTICE If you rock your vehicle, observe the following precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and other parts.  Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting the selector lever or before the transmission is completely shifted to forward or reverse gear.  Do not race the engine and avoid spinning the wheels.  If your vehicle remains stuck after rocking the vehicle several times, consider other ways such as towing. IF YOUR VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE TOWED If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service. In consultation with them, have your vehicle towed using either (a) or (b). (a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck (b) Using a flat bed truck (c) Never tow with a sling type truck Only when you cannot receive a towing service from a Lexus dealer or commercial tow truck service, tow your vehicle carefully in accordance with the instructions given in ”(d) Emergency towing” on page 492. Proper equipment will help ensure that your vehicle is not damaged while being towed. Commercial operators are generally aware of the state/provincial and local laws pertaining to towing. Your vehicle can be damaged if it is towed incorrectly. Although most operators know the correct procedure, it is possible to make a mistake. To avoid damage to your vehicle, make sure the following precautions are observed. If necessary, show this page to the tow truck driver. TOWING PRECAUTIONS: Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by the state/provincial and local laws. The wheels and axle on the ground must be in good condition. If they are damaged, use a towing dolly. 488 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY (a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck  From rear  From front G40015 G40016 Two−wheel drive models Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels. Select the engine switch in “ACC” mode. NOTICE NOTICE Never tow a vehicle with an automatic transmission from the front with rear wheels on the ground, as this may cause serious damage to the transmission.  Do not tow in “OFF” mode, as the steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.  When lifting wheels, take care to ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumper and/or underbody of the towed vehicle will be damaged during towing. 489 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY (b) Using a flat bed truck G40017 G40055 Four−wheel drive models Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.  Tie down points NOTICE Never tow a vehicle with an automatic transmission from the rear with front wheels on the ground, as this may cause serious damage to the transmission. 490 G40056 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY NOTICE Do not use the rear emergency towing eyelets. G40057  A Front B Rear  Tie down angle G40058 If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed, it should be tied down at locations A and B as shown above. If you use chains or wires to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded black must be at 45. G40028 Rear emergency towing eyelets 491 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY (c) Towing with a sling type truck G40018 NOTICE Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front or rear. This may cause body damage. (d) Emergency towing G40019 If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service. If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. To install the front towing eyelet, see “Installing towing eyelet” on page 495. NOTICE  Only use specified towing eyelet; otherwise your vehicle may be damaged.  Never tow a vehicle from the rear with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission. 492 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes. Towing in this manner may be done only on hard−surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, drive train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition. CAUTION Before towing, release the parking brake and put the transmission in ”N”. The engine switch must be selected in “ACC” or “IG−ON” mode. CAUTION If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not work so steering and braking will be much harder than usual. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and towing cable or chain. The eyelet and towing cable or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage. NOTICE Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing eyelet provided. 493 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY Emergency towing eyelet precautions: Tips for towing a stuck vehicle:  Before emergency towing, check that the eyelet is not broken or damaged and that the installation bolts are not loose.  Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady and even force. The following methods are effective to use when your vehicle is stuck in the mud, sand or other condition from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. In addition, keep away from the vehicles and towing cable or chain when towing.  To avoid damaging the eyelet, do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.  Remove the sand and soil in the front and the back of the tires.  Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the eyelet.  Place stones or wood under the tires. CAUTION If the emergency towing eyelet is used to get out when your vehicle becomes stuck in the mud, sand or other condition from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power, make sure to observe the precautions mentioned below. Otherwise, excessive stress will be put on the eyelet and the towing cable or chain may break, causing serious injury or damage.  If the towing vehicle can hardly move, do not forcibly continue the towing. Contact your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service for assistance.  Tow the vehicle as straight ahead as possible.  Keep away from the vehicle during towing. 494 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY (e) Installing towing eyelet G40022 G40020 3. Tighten the towing eyelet securely by a wheel nut wrench. 1. Remove the front towing eyelet cover on the front bumper by using a flathead screwdriver. To protect the bodywork, place a piece of rag over the cover. CAUTION When installing the eyelet on the vehicle, be sure to tighten the eyelet securely. If the eyelet is loose, it may come off when being towed and result in death or serious injury. G40021 2. Use the towing eyelet in the trunk. Secure it to the hole on the bumper by turning clockwise. (For the eyelet location, see page 481.) 495 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY IF YOU CANNOT SHIFT AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SELECTOR LEVER G40002 G40001a 2 Insert your finger, the screwdriver or equivalent into the hole to push down the shift lock override button. You can shift the selector lever while pushing the button. For your safety, keep the brake pedal depressed. If you cannot shift the selector lever, use the shift lock override button as follows: 1 496 Turn the engine switch off. Make sure the parking brake is applied. Pry up the cover with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent. Be sure to have the system checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS OR LOCK YOURSELF OUT You can purchase a new key at your Lexus dealer if you can give them the key number and electronic key. Even if you lose only one key, contact your Lexus dealer to make a new key. If you lose all your electronic keys, you cannot make new keys; the whole engine immobilizer must be replaced. See the suggestion given in “Keys” on page 8. You can use the smart access system with push−button start with the new key. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information. If your keys are locked in the vehicle and you cannot get a duplicate, many Lexus dealers can still open the door for you, using their special tools. If you must break a window to get in, we suggest breaking the smallest side window because it is the least expensive to replace. Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from the glass. 497 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY 498 SECTION 5 MAINTENANCE Maintenance Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . . 500 501 504 505 For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”. 499 MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Your Lexus vehicle has been designed for fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time and money. However, each regular maintenance as well as day−to−day care is more important than ever before to ensure smooth, trouble−free, safe, and economical driving. The scheduled maintenance items listed in the “Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance” are those required to be serviced at regular intervals. It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified maintenance, including general maintenance services, is performed. Note that both the new vehicle and emission control system warranties specify that proper maintenance and care must be performed. See “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for complete warranty information. It is recommended that only genuine Lexus parts be used for maintenance or for the repair of the emission control system. General maintenance General maintenance items are those day−to−day care practices that are important to your vehicle for proper operation. It is the owner’s responsibility to ensure that the general maintenance items are performed regularly. These checks or inspections can be done either by yourself or your Lexus dealer. 500 Scheduled maintenance For details of your maintenance schedule, read the “Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”. The owner may elect to use non−Lexus supplied parts for replacement purposes without invalidating the emission control system warranty. However, use of replacement parts which are not of equivalent quality may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems. You may also elect to have maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and system performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual without invalidating this warranty. See “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for complete warranty information. MAINTENANCE Where to go for service? GENERAL MAINTENANCE Lexus technicians are well−trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in−dealership training programs. They are well informed about the operation of all the systems on your vehicle. Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified. It is recommended that any problem you notice be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for their advice. You can be confident that your Lexus dealer’s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements of your vehicle. CAUTION Your copy of the repair order is proof that all required maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. If any problems should arise with your vehicle while under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it. Again, be sure to keep a copy of the repair order for any service performed on your Lexus. What about do−it−yourself maintenance? Many of the maintenance items are easy to do yourself, if you have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are presented in Section 6. If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechanic, the Lexus service manuals are recommended. Please be aware that do−it−yourself maintenance can affect your warranty coverage. See “Owner ’s Guide”, “Owner ’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for the details. Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you run the engine. Engine compartment Items listed below should be checked from time to time, e.g. each time when refueling. Washer fluid Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the tank. See page 589 for additional information. Engine coolant level Make sure the coolant level is between the Upper and Lower lines on the see−through reservoir when the engine is cold. See page 534 for additional information. Radiator, condenser and hoses Check that the front of the radiator and condenser are clean and not blocked with leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 536 for additional information. 501 MAINTENANCE Battery Vehicle interior Your Lexus has a maintenance free battery. You do not have to add distilled water. For longer life of the battery, however, see page 581 for additional information. Items listed below should be checked regularly, e.g. while performing periodic services, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Brake fluid level Make sure the brake fluid level is correct. See page 547 for additional information. Engine oil level Check the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off and the vehicle parked on a level spot. See page 530 for additional information. Exhaust system If you notice any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have the cause located and corrected immediately. (See “Engine exhaust caution” on page 347.) Lights Make sure the headlight, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are working. Check headlight aim. Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers Check that all service reminder indicators and warning buzzers function properly. Steering wheel Check that it has the specified free play. Be alert for changes in steering condition, such as hard steering, excessive free play or strange noise. Seats Check that all front seat controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate smoothly. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position. Seat belts Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged. 502 MAINTENANCE Accelerator pedal Fluid leaks Check the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort or catching. Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after the vehicle has been parked for a while. If you smell fuel fumes or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected immediately. Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and the proper clearance and free play. Check the brake booster function. Doors and engine hood In a safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side when applied. Check that all doors, including trunk lid, operate smoothly and all latches lock securely. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood when the primary latch is released. Parking brake Tire inflation pressure Check that the pedal has the proper travel and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle is held securely with only the parking brake applied. Check the tire inflation pressure with a gauge every two weeks, or at least once a month and adjust as shown on the tire and loading information label. See page 548 for additional information. Brakes Automatic transmission ”Park” mechanism On a safe incline, check that your vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in ”P” position and all brakes released. Vehicle exterior Items listed below should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Wheel nuts When checking the tires, make sure to check the nuts for looseness. Tighten them if necessary. Tire surface Check the tires carefully for cuts, damage or excessive wear. See page 563 for additional information. Tire rotation Rotate the tires according to the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.) See page 563 for additional information. 503 MAINTENANCE DOES YOUR VEHICLE NEED REPAIRING? Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and visual tip−offs that indicate service is needed. Some important clues are:  Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging  Appreciable loss of power  Strange engine noises  A fluid leak under the vehicle (however, water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)  Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide leak. Drive with the windows open and have the exhaust system checked immediately.)  Flat−looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering, uneven tire wear  Vehicle pulls to one side when driving straight on a level road  Strange noises related to suspension movement  Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal, pedal almost touches floors, vehicle pulls to one side when braking  Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. It probably needs adjustment or repair. 504 CAUTION Do not continue driving with the vehicle unchecked. It could result in serious vehicle damage and possibly personal injury. MAINTENANCE EMISSION INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE (I/M) PROGRAMS Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On−Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system. When the OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system, the malfunction indicator lamp comes on. In this case, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle. Even if the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test as readiness codes have not been set in the OBD system. Readiness codes are automatically set during ordinary driving. However, when the battery is disconnected or run down, the codes are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the codes may not be completely set. Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had come on recently due to temporary malfunction such as a loose fuel tank cap, your vehicle may not pass the I/M test. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips, but the error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless about 40 trips or more are taken. If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test and the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re−testing. 505 MAINTENANCE 506 SECTION 6–1 SERVICE PROCEDURES AND SPECIFICATIONS Introduction Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine compartment overview (GS430) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine compartment overview (GS300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Do−it−yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 509 510 511 513 515 516 507 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION G61008 G61001 The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also on the Certification Label. The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This number is on the left top of the instrument panel and can be seen through the windshield from outside. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle. G61009 GS430 GS300 The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown. 508 INTRODUCTION THEFT PREVENTION LABELS (U.S.A.ONLY) 61l067a Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are approximately 47 mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.). The purpose of these labels is to reduce the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. The label is designed so that once it is applied to a surface, any attempt to remove it will result in destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring these labels intact from one part to another will be impossible. NOTICE You should not attempt to remove the theft prevention labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws. 509 INTRODUCTION ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW (GS430) G61002 510 1 Engine oil filler cap 2 Engine oil level dipstick 3 Brake fluid reservoir 4 Fuse box 5 Washer fluid tank 6 Engine coolant reservoir 7 Electric cooling fans 8 Condenser 9 Radiator 10 Fuse box 11 Battery INTRODUCTION ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW (GS300) G61003 1 Engine oil level dipstick 2 Engine oil filler cap 3 Brake fluid reservoir 4 Fuse box 5 Washer fluid tank 6 Engine coolant reservoir 7 Electric cooling fans 8 Condenser 9 Radiator 10 Fuse box 11 Battery 511 INTRODUCTION Removing the engine compartment cover Before checking and replacing the blade type fuses, etc. in the engine compartment, remove the engine compartment cover as follows: CAUTION Be sure to turn off the engine before removing the engine compartment cover. Failure to do so may result in burns from heated components or serious injury through becoming caught in moving parts. You must remove the front cover before removing the side covers. The location of the plastic clips is the same for all engine models. G61004 512 1 Turn the plastic screw until it turns freely. Although it is turned freely, it cannot be removed from the engine compartment cover. 2 Push the core of the clips and remove the clips. Remove the cover. Be careful not to lose the removed plastic clips. INTRODUCTION After checking the items, install the engine compartment covers and insert the plastic clips in their original positions. 1 When inserting the plastic screw, push it in. DO−IT−YOURSELF SERVICE PRECAUTIONS If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure given in this Section. You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing may result in operating problems. G61005 Performing do−it−yourself maintenance during the warranty period may affect your warranty coverage. Read the separate Lexus Warranty statement for details and suggestions. This Section gives instructions only for those items that are relatively easy for an owner to perform. As explained in Section 5, there are still a number of items that must be performed by a qualified technician with special tools. 2 When inserting the clips, do as shown above. NOTICE After install the engine compartment cover, make sure the cover is securely in its original position. For information on tools and parts for do−it−yourself maintenance, see ”Parts and tools” on page 516. Utmost care should be taken when working on your vehicle to prevent accidental injury. Here are a few precautions that you should be especially careful to observe: 513 INTRODUCTION CAUTION NOTICE  When the engine is running, keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt. (Removing rings, watches, and ties is advisable.)  Remember that battery and ignition cables carry high currents or voltages. Be careful of accidentally causing a short circuit.  Right after driving, the engine compartment − the engine, radiator and exhaust manifold, etc. − will be hot. So be careful not to touch them. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.  Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine compartment.  Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames around fuel or the battery. Their fumes are flammable.  Do not get under your vehicle with just the body jack supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or other solid supports.  Be sure the engine switch is off if you work near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille. With the engine switch on, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or if the coolant temperature is high.  Use eye protection whenever you work on or under your vehicle where you may be exposed to flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc.  Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid. 514  Add only ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology to fill the radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45% deionized water (for Canada).  If you spill some of the coolant, be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging the parts or paint.  Before closing the engine hood, check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc.  Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, or excessive engine wear could result. Also backfiring could cause a fire in the engine compartment.  Be careful not to scratch the glass surface with the wiper frame. INTRODUCTION POSITIONING THE JACK CAUTION When jacking, be sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of personal injury:  Follow jacking instructions. G61006  Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by the jack. Personal injury may occur.  Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.  Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission in “P” position. Front  Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point. Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury. G61007 Rear When jacking up your vehicle with the jack, position the jack correctly as shown in the illustrations.  Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone; use vehicle support stands.  Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle.  When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the jack. NOTICE Make sure to place the jack correctly, or your vehicle may be damaged. 515 INTRODUCTION PARTS AND TOOLS Here is a list of parts and tools you will need to perform do−it−yourself maintenance. Remember all Lexus parts are designed in metric sizes, so your tools must be metric. Parts (if level is low): Checking the engine oil level  Funnel (only for adding fluid) Parts (if level is low):  “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil. For recommended oil viscosity, see page 533.  FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid Tools: Checking battery condition Tools:  Warm water Tools:  Baking soda  Rag or paper towel  Grease  Funnel (only for adding oil)  Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts) Checking the engine coolant level Checking and replacing the blade type fuses Parts (if level is low): Parts (if replacement is necessary):  ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology. “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55% of coolant and 45% deionized water (for Canada).  Fuse with same amperage rating as original Tools:  Funnel (only for adding coolant) 516 Checking brake fluid Checking the cartridge type fuses Parts (if replacement is necessary):  Genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent with same amperage rating as original INTRODUCTION Adding washer fluid Parts:  Water  Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use) Tools:  Funnel 517 INTRODUCTION 518 SECTION 6–2 SERVICE PROCEDURES AND SPECIFICATIONS Engine Specifications (GS430) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications (GS300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel pump shut off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 523 526 528 528 530 530 534 536 537 519 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS (GS430) – GENERAL Model 4.3 L V8 (3UZ−FE) Type 8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline Bore and stroke 91.0 X 82.5 mm (3.58 X 3.25 in.) Displacement 4293 cm3 (262.0 cu.in.) Valve clearance (engine cold) Intake Exhaust 0.15 − 0.25 mm (0.006 − 0.010 in.) 0.25 − 0.35 mm (0.010 − 0.014 in.) Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment – FUEL 520 Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only Octane rating 91 (Research octane number 96) or higher ENGINE – LUBRICATION SYSTEM Oil capacity Drain and refill with filter without filter 5.1 L (5.4 qt., 4.5 lmp.qt.) 4.5 L (4.8 qt., 4.0 lmp.qt.) Oil grade ILSAC multigrade engine oil Recommended oil viscosity 5W−30 62L042 Outside temperature NOTE: “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the above grade and viscosity. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details. 521 ENGINE – COOLING SYSTEM Capacity 10.1 L (10.7 qt., 8.9 lmp.qt.) Coolant type ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology (Coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.) Do not use plain water alone. NOTE: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is used in your Lexus vehicle at factory fill. In order to avoid technical problems, only use ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.) Do not use plain water alone. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details. – IGNITION SYSTEM Spark plug – Make DENSO NGK – Gap SK20R11 IFR6A11 1.1 mm (0.043 in.) – ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Battery – Open voltage at 20C (68F): – Charging rates 522 12.7V Fully charged 12.3V Half charged 11.9V Discharged [Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the engine switch is off with all the lights turned off] 5A max. ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS (GS300) – GENERAL Model 3.0 L V6 (3GR−FSE) Type 6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline Bore and stroke 87.5 X 83.0 mm (3.44 X 3.26 in.) Displacement 2995 cm3 (182.75 cu.in.) Valve clearance (engine cold) Intake Exhaust Automatic adjustment Automatic adjustment Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment – FUEL Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only Octane rating 91 (Research octane number 96) or higher 523 ENGINE – LUBRICATION SYSTEM Oil capacity Drain and refill Two−wheel drive models with filter without filter Four−wheel drive models with filter without filter 6.3 L (6.6 qt., 5.5 lmp.qt.) 5.9 L (6.2 qt., 5.1 lmp.qt.) Oil grade ILSAC multigrade engine oil Recommended oil viscosity 5W−30 6.4 L (6.7 qt., 5.6 lmp.qt.) 6.0 L (6.3 qt., 5.2 lmp.qt.) 62L042 Outside temperature NOTE: “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the above grade and viscosity. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details. 524 ENGINE – COOLING SYSTEM Capacity 9.1 L (9.6 qt., 8.0 lmp.qt.) Coolant type ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology (Coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.) Do not use plain water alone. NOTE: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is used in your Lexus vehicle at factory fill. In order to avoid technical problems, only use ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.) Do not use plain water alone. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details. – IGNITION SYSTEM Spark plug – Make DENSO NGK – Gap FK20HBR11 ILFR6D11T 1.1 mm (0.043 in.) – ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Battery – Open voltage at 20C (68F): – Charging rates 12.7V Fully charged 12.3V Half charged 11.9V Discharged [Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the engine switch is off with all the lights turned off] 5A max. 525 ENGINE FUEL Fuel type Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline. To help prevent gas station mixups, your Lexus has a smaller fuel tank opening. The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will not. At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93 in Canada. Use of unleaded fuel with an octane number or rating lower than stated above will cause persistent heavy knocking. If severe, this will lead to engine damage. If your engine knocks ... If you detect heavy knocking even when using the recommended fuel, or if you hear steady knocking while holding a steady speed on level roads, consult your Lexus dealer. However, occasionally, you may notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is normal and there is no need for concern. Gasoline containing detergent additives NOTICE Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of leaded gasoline will cause the three−way catalytic converter to lose its effectiveness and the emission control system to function improperly. Also, this can increase maintenance costs. Octane rating Premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance. However, if such premium type cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91). 526 Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid build−up of engine deposits. However, all gasoline sold in the U.S. contains detergent additives to keep clean and/or clean intake systems. Quality gasoline Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for quality fuel named World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied world wide. The WWFC consists of four categories that depend on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 3 has been adopted. The WWFC improves air quality by providing for better emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better vehicle performance. ENGINE Cleaner burning gasoline Gasoline quality Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE is available in many areas. In a very few cases, you may experience driveability problems caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you continue to have unacceptable driveability, try changing gasoline brands. If this does not rectify your problem, then consult your Lexus dealer. Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions, and improve air quality. Oxygenates in gasoline Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE. If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87. Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol. NOTICE  Do not use gasohol other than stated above. It will cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.  If drivability problems are encountered (poor hot starting, vaporizing, engine knock, etc.), discontinue its use.  Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling. Gasohol may cause paint damage. Gasoline containing MMT Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). Fuel tank capacity 71 L (18.7 gal., 15.6 lmp.gal.) Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service. 527 ENGINE FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SYSTEM The fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine to minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision. To restart the engine after the fuel pump shut off system activates, turn the engine switch off once and start it. CAUTION Inspect the ground under the vehicle before restarting the engine. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the ground, it is the fuel system that has been damaged and it is in need of repair. In this case, do not restart the engine. FACTS ABOUT ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION Functions of engine oil Engine oil has the primary function of lubricating and cooling the inside of the engine, and plays a major role in maintaining the engine in proper working order. Engine oil consumption It is normal that an engine should consume some engine oil during normal engine operation. The causes of oil consumption in a normal engine are as follows.  Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil is left on the cylinder wall when a piston moves downwards in the cylinder. High negative pressure generated when the vehicle is decelerating sucks some of this oil into the combustion chamber. This oil as well as some part of the oil film left on the cylinder wall is burned by the high temperature combustion gases during the combustion process.  Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of the intake valves. Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber together with the intake air and is burned along with the fuel. High temperature exhaust gases also burn the oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve stems. 528 ENGINE The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the viscosity of the oil, the quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven. More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and frequent acceleration and deceleration. A new engine consumes more oil, since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls have not become conditioned. Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp·qt./600 miles). When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately. For example, if a vehicle is used for repeated short trips and consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not show any drop in the oil level at all, even after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This is because the oil is gradually becoming diluted with fuel or moisture, making it appear that the oil level has not changed. Importance of engine oil level check One of the most important points in proper vehicle maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so that oil function will not be impaired. Therefore, it is essential that the oil level be checked regularly. Lexus recommends that the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle. NOTICE Failure to check the oil level regularly could lead to serious engine trouble due to insufficient oil. For detailed information on oil level check, see ”Checking the engine oil level” on page 530. The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle is then driven at high speeds, as on an expressway, making it appear that oil is excessively consumed after driving at high speeds. 529 ENGINE USED ENGINE OIL CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL CAUTION  Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact with it. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water. G62025  Do not leave used oil within the reach of children.  Dispose of used oil and used oil filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and used oil filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer or a service station for information concerning recycling or disposal. GS430 G62002 GS300 With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick. 530 ENGINE 1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle should be on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine. 2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under the end and wipe it clean. G62006 3. Reinsert the dipstick and push it in as far as it will go, or the reading will not be correct. GS430 1 Add oil 2 O.K. 3 Too full G62005 GS300 (two−wheel drive models) 1 Add oil 2 O.K. 3 Too full 531 ENGINE G62006 GS300 (four−wheel drive models) 1 Add oil 2 O.K. 3 Too full 4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil level while holding a rag under the end. If it is between the full level mark ( 5 ) and the low level mark ( 4 ), it is O.K. NOTICE Be careful not to drop engine oil on the vehicle components. G62023 GS430 GS300 If the oil level is below or only slightly above the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine. Remove the oil filler cap and add engine oil a little at a time, checking the dipstick. We recommend that you use a funnel when adding oil. The approximate quantity of oil needed to raise the level between low and full on the dipstick is indicated as follows: 1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 lmp. qt.) For the engine oil capacity, see “Specifications” on pages 520 and 523. When the level reaches within the correct range, return the filler cap and turn the cap clockwise until you hear a click. 532 ENGINE NOTICE Engine oil selection  Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components. “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.  Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged. Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil.  Check the oil level on the dipstick once again after adding the oil. Recommended viscosity: 5W−30 62L042 Outside temperature SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for good fuel economy, and good starting in cold weather. If SAE 5W−30 is not available, SAE10W−30 may be used. However, it should be replaced with 5W−30 at the next oil change. 533 ENGINE Oil identification marks G62035 The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use. To ensure excellent lubrication for your engine, “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is available, which has been specifically tested and approved for all Lexus engines. CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL G62007 GS430 1 Reservoir cap 2 “FULL” line 3 “LOW” line Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details about “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”. G62008 GS300 1 Reservoir cap 534 2 “FULL” line 3 “LOW” line ENGINE Look at the see−through coolant reservoir when the engine is cold. The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the”FULL” and ”LOW” lines on the reservoir. If the level is low, add the coolant. (For the coolant type, see “Coolant type selection” described below.) The coolant level in the reservoir will vary with engine temperature. However, if the level is on or below the ”LOW” line, add coolant. Bring the level up to the ”FULL” line. If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing, there may be a leak in the system. Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap and drain cock and water pump. If you can find no leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap pressure and check for leaks in the cooling system. Coolant type selection Use of improper coolants may damage your engine cooling system. Only use ”Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic acids.) For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −35C (−31F). For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −42C (−44F). CAUTION To prevent burning yourself, do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. NOTICE Do not use plain water alone. 535 ENGINE Lexus recommends “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant,” which has been tested to ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor result in malfunction of your engine coolant system with proper usage. “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is formulated with long−life hybrid organic acid technology and has been specifically designed to avoid engine cooling system malfunction on Lexus vehicles. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details. CHECKING THE RADIATOR AND CONDENSER If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. CAUTION To prevent burning yourself , be careful not to touch the radiator or condenser when the engine is hot. NOTICE To prevent damage to the radiator and condenser, do not perform the work by yourself. 536 ENGINE SPARK PLUGS G62009a 62R031c GS300 Your engine is fitted with the designated iridium−tipped spark plugs. GS430 Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped spark plugs. NOTICE NOTICE Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gaps for engine performance or smooth drivability. Use the designated iridium−tipped spark plugs only. Do not adjust gaps for engine performance or smooth drivability. 537 ENGINE 538 SECTION 6–3 SERVICE PROCEDURES AND SPECIFICATIONS Chassis Specifications (GS430) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications (GS300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run−flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 544 547 548 551 561 562 563 563 567 569 570 571 539 CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS (GS430) – DIFFERENTIAL Oil capacity 1.35 L (1.42 qt., 1.19 lmp.qt.) Oil type and viscosity Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL−5 SAE 75W−90 or its equivalent NOTICE NOTE: The following label is affixed on the right side of the differential carrier. Use the type and viscosity shown on the label when the differential oil is replaced. Synthetic oil information label 540 Use of differential oil other than “Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL−5 SAE 75W−90” or its equivalent may damage the differential gear of your vehicle and diminish fuel efficiency. For the reasons mentioned above, Lexus recommends use of “Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL−5 SAE 75W−90”. Another differential oil of matching quality can also be used, (but note that despite the similarity in nomenclature between “Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL−5 SAE 75W−90” and oils that meet SAE 75W−90 specifications, compliance with the SAE specification does not guarantee that an oil has all characteristic required to avoid the problem described above.) If you are unable to locate an equivalent to “Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL−5 SAE 75W−90”, contact your Lexus dealer for further details or another duly qualified and equipped professional. CHASSIS – AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid capacity Drain and refill 1.7 L (1.5 qt., 1.8 lmp.qt.) Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF Type WS* *Change automatic transmission fluid only as necessary. Generally, it is necessary to change automatic transmission fluid only if your vehicle is driven under one of the Special Operating Conditions listed in your “Owner ’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”. When changing the automatic transmission fluid, use only “Toyota Genuine ATF Type WS” (ATF JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuring optimum transmission performance. NOTICE Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF Type WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle. – BRAKES Pedal clearance *1 73 mm (2.9 in.) Min. Pedal free play 1.0 − 2.0 mm (0.04 − 0.08 in.) Brake pad wear limit 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) Parking brake lining wear limit Parking brake adjustment Fluid type *2 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) 5 − 7 clicks SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 *1Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with the force of 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf.) with the engine running *2Parking brake adjustment when depressed with the force of 300 N (30.6 kgf, 67.4 lbf.) 541 CHASSIS – STEERING Free play Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.) – TIRES AND WHEELS Front and rear: Tire size Tire inflation pressure Recommended cold tire inflation pressure 542 245/40R18 93Y or P245/40R18 93V Front 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi) Rear 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi) For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 60 kPa (0.6 kgf/cm2 or bar, 9 psi) to the front tires and rear tires, but never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure molded on the tire sidewall. Wheel size 18 x 8 JJ Wheel nut torque 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.) CHASSIS Spare (Vehicles with standard tires only): Tire size T155/70D17 110M Tire inflation pressure 420 kPa (4.3 kgf/cm2, 4.2 bar, 60 psi) Wheel size 17 x 4T Wheel nut torque 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.) NOTE: For complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure” through “Aluminum wheel precautions” on page 548 through 570. 543 CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS (GS300) – DIFFERENTIAL Oil capacity Two−wheel drive models Four−wheel drive models Front Rear Oil type and viscosity 1.15 L (1.21 qt., 1.01 lmp.qt.) 0.70 L (0.73 qt., 0.61 lmp.qt.) 1.05 L (1.10 qt., 0.92 lmp.qt.) Hypoid gear oil API GL−5 Above –18C (0F): SAE 90 Below –18C (0F): SAE 80 or SAE 80W−90 – AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid capacity Drain and refill Two−wheel drive models Four−wheel drive models 1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 lmp.qt.) 2.7 L (2.8 qt., 2.3 lmp.qt.) Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF Type WS* *Change automatic transmission fluid only as necessary. Generally, it is necessary to change automatic transmission fluid only if your vehicle is driven under one of the Special Operating Conditions listed in your “Owner ’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”. When changing the automatic transmission fluid, use only “Toyota Genuine ATF Type WS” (ATF JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuring optimum transmission performance. 544 NOTICE Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF Type WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle. CHASSIS – BRAKES Pedal clearance *1 65 mm (2.6 in.) Min. Pedal free play 1.0 − 2.0 mm (0.04 − 0.08 in.) Brake pad wear limit 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) Parking brake lining wear limit Parking brake adjustment Fluid type *2 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) 5 − 7 clicks SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 *1Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf.) with the engine running *2Parking brake adjustment when depressed with the force of 300 N (30.6 kgf, 67.4lbf.) – STEERING Free play Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.) 545 CHASSIS – TIRES AND WHEELS Front and rear: Tire size Tire inflation pressure Recommended cold tire inflation pressure 225/50R17 94W or P225/50R17 93V Front 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi) Rear 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi) For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 50 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm2 or bar, 7 psi) to the front tires and rear tires, but never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure molded on the tire sidewall. Wheel size 17 x 7 1/2 JJ Wheel nut torque 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.) Spare (Vehicles with standard tires only): Tire size T155/70D17 110M Tire inflation pressure 420 kPa (4.3 kgf/cm2, 4.2 bar, 60 psi) Wheel size 17 x 4T Wheel nut torque 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.) NOTE: For complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure” through “Aluminum wheel precautions” on page 548 through 570. 546 CHASSIS CHECKING BRAKE FLUID G62010 It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the level is low, take your vehicle to a Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Do not drive your vehicle if the brake system warning light (red) is on. Call a Lexus dealer for assistance. If the fluid level goes down soon after your vehicle is serviced, it may indicate a serious mechanical problem. Have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. CAUTION GS430 Brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still feel uncomfortable with your hands or eyes, go to the doctor. G62011 NOTICE If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle, be sure to wipe it off to prevent damage to parts or paint. GS300 To check the fluid level, simply look at the see−through reservoir. The level should be between the ”MAX” and ”MIN” lines on the tank. 547 CHASSIS CHECKING TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE The recommended cold tire inflation pressure, tire size and the combined weight of occupants and cargo (vehicle capacity weight) are described on the tire and loading information label. You should check the tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. And do not forget the spare! The inflation pressure for the spare tire should be 420 kPa (4.3 kgf/cm2, 4.2 bar, 60 psi). The following instructions for checking tire inflation pressure should be observed: G63015  The pressure should be checked only when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1.5 km or 1 mile since, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.  Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance of the tire can be misleading. Besides, tire inflation pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.  Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.  Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passengers and luggage weight should be located so that the vehicle is balanced. 548 CHASSIS Inspection and adjustment procedure 6. Install the tire valve cap. If a gauge and air pump are not available, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer. CAUTION G63001  1 Tire valve 2 Tire pressure gauge 1. Remove the tire valve cap. 2. Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge to the tire valve. Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If the caps have been lost, have new ones put on as soon as possible. Incorrect tire inflation pressure may waste fuel, reduce the comfort of driving, reduce tire life and make your vehicle less safe to drive. If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. 3. Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge. 4. In case the tire inflation pressure is not within the prescribed range, insert the compressed air from the valve. In case of applying too much air, press the center of the valve and release the air to adjust. 5. After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage. 549 CHASSIS CAUTION Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and cause an accident resulting in death or serious injuries. Low tire pressure (underinflation):  Excessive wear  Uneven wear  Poor handling  Possibility of blowouts from an overheated tire  Poor sealing of the tire bead  Wheel deformation and/or tire separation  A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards High tire pressure (overinflation):  Poor handling  Excessive wear  Uneven wear  A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards 550 CHASSIS TIRE INFORMATION Tire symbols (Standard and run−flat tire) G63006 The illustration indicates typical tire symbols. 551 CHASSIS 1 Tire size: For details, see “Tire size” on page 555. 2 DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN): For details, see “DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)” on page 555. 3 4 552 Tire ply composition and materials : Plies mean a layer of rubber−coated parallel cords. Cords mean the strands forming the plies in the tire. Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure: For details, see “Checking and replacing tires” on page 563. 5 Uniform tire quality grading For details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” on page 557. 6 Maximum cold tire inflation pressure: This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. For recommended cold tire inflation pressure, see “Specifications” on page 546. 7 “TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE”: A tubeless tire does not have a tube inside the tire and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure. 8 Radial tires or bias−ply tires : A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked with “RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire. 9 Run−flat tire (RFT) or standard tire: This vehicle can be equipped with either run−flat tires (RFT) or standard tires. A “RFT” or “DSST” mark is molded on the sidewall of the run−flat tire. For details, see “Run−flat tires” on page 561. 10 Location of tread wear indicators: For details, see “Checking and replacing tires” on page 563. 11 Summer tire or all season tire: An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. The tire not marked with “M+S” is a summer tire. For details, see “Types of tires” on page 562. CHASSIS Tire symbols (Compact spare tire) G63007 The illustration indicates typical tire symbols. 553 CHASSIS 554 1 “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”: A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only. For details, see “Compact spare tire” on page 477. 8 “TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE”: A tubeless tire does not have a tube inside the tire and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure. 2 Tire size: For details, see “Tire size” on page 555. 9 3 DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN): For details, see “DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)” on page 555. Radial tires or bias−ply tires : A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked with “RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire. 4 Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure: For details, see “Checking and replacing tires” on page 563. 5 Maximum cold tire inflation pressure: This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. For recommended cold tire inflation pressure, see “Specifications” on page 540. 6 Tire ply composition and materials : Plies mean a layer of rubber−coated parallel cords. Cords mean the strands forming the plies in the tire. 7 Location of tread wear indicators: For details, see “Checking and replacing tires” on page 563. CHASSIS DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire size 63SA11a The illustration indicates typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) 1 “DOT” symbol 2 Tire Identification Number (TIN) 3 Tire manufacturer’s identification mark 4 Tire size code 5 Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters) 6 Manufacturing week 7 Manufacturing year 63ca01a The illustrations indicate typical tire sizes. Tire use (P=Passenger car, T=Temporary use) Section width (in millimeters) Aspect ratio (tire height to section width) Tire construction code (R=Radial, D=Diagonal) 5 Wheel diameter (in inches) 6 Load index (2 digits or 3 digits) 7 Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter) 1 2 3 4 The “DOT” symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. 555 CHASSIS Name of each section of tire G63005 63sa14  1 Section width 2 Tire height 3 Wheel diameter 556  1 Bead 2 Sidewall 3 Shoulder 4 Tread 5 Belt 6 Inner liner 7 Reinforcing rubber 8 Carcass 9 Rim lines 10 Bead wires 11 Chafer CHASSIS Uniform tire quality grading This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading. Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information. DOT quality grades − All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear − The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 − 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA, A, B, C − The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. Temperature A, B, C − The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 557 CHASSIS Glossary of tire terminology Tire related term 558 Meaning Cold tire inflation pressure tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile under that condition Maximum inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it is shown on the sidewall of the tire Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer Accessory weight the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not) Curb weight the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine Maximum loaded vehicle weight the sum of — (a) curb weight; (b) accessory weight; (c) vehicle capacity weight; and (d) production options weight CHASSIS Tire related term Meaning Normal occupant weight 68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1 that follows Production options weight the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity) the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity Intended outboard sidewall (a) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (b) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Occupant distribution distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1 that follows Rim a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat 559 CHASSIS Tire related term Meaning Rim size designation rim diameter and width Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges Vehicle maximum load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two Vehicle normal load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire Table 1 – Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants 560 Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle 2 through 4 2 2 in front 5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat CHASSIS RUN−FLAT TIRES This vehicle can be equipped with either run−flat tires (RFT) or standard tires. You may continue driving on the vehicle with run−flat tires even if any tire goes flat. It may be able to run for a maximum of 160 km (100 miles) at a speed below 90 km/h (55 mph) after the tire pressure warning light comes on. When you drive your vehicle after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the tire must be replaced. Do not use the repaired tire. Run−flat tires characteristics: The vehicle with run−flat tires helps you to continue driving for up to 160 km (100 miles) at the moderate speed and do not ever exceed 90 km/h (55 mph) even with a flat tire. After such usage, the tire must be replaced. If you are not sure, consult your Lexus dealer. If you have a flat tire, decrease the speed and drive at lower speed to reduce the extent to which the tire is damaged. However, in some conditions (such as at high temperatures), you could not continue driving for up to 160 km (100 miles). The use of non−genuine wheels may prohibit optimum performance. G63004 The run−flat tires equipped on this vehicle are ones dedicated for GS430/300. Do not use them on another model. Do not mix run−flat tires with standard tires. A “RFT” or “DSST” mark is molded on the sidewall of the run−flat tire. If you cannot distinguish between the standard tire and run−flat tire, consult Lexus dealer. If you have a flat tire, you have to take a different action depending on whether the tires are standard tires or run−flat tires. The tire warranty book covers the detailed information on run−flat tires. For details, see the tire warranty book. Tire pressure warning system The tire pressure warning system is equipped to warn you of the low tire inflation pressure. For details, see “Tire pressure warning system” on page 440. 561 CHASSIS TYPES OF TIRES Determine what kind of tires your vehicle is originally equipped with. 1. Summer tires Summer tires are high−speed capability tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow−covered or icy roads. For driving on snow−covered or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires. 2. All season tires All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use all year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving. 562 CAUTION  Do not mix summer and all season tires on your vehicle as this can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control.  Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s designated tires, and never mix tires or wheels of the sizes different from the originals as this could result in loss of control and could cause death or serious injury. CHASSIS ROTATING TIRES Before storing radial, snow or studded tires, mark the direction of rotation and be sure to install them in the same direction when using them again. Tires should be stored in a cool dry place. CHECKING AND REPLACING TIRES G63008 To equalize tire wear and help extend tire life, Lexus recommends that you rotate your tires according to the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.) However, the most appropriate timing for tire rotation may vary according to your driving habits and road surface conditions. The wheel assemblies must be rotated as illustrated above. When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire inflation pressure, improper wheel alignment, out−of−balance wheels, or severe braking. When to replace your tires G63003  1 New tread 2 Tread wear indicator 3 Worn tread Replace the tires when the tread wear indicators show. The location of tread wear indicators is shown by the ”TWI” or ”Δ” marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire. 563 CHASSIS The tires on your Lexus have built−in tread wear indicators to help you know when the tires need replacement. When the tread depth wears to 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indicators will appear. If you can see the indicators in two or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced. Vehicles equipped with 245/40R18 93Y or P245/40R18 93V tires: Your Lexus has been fitted with specially developed tires which provide exceptional dynamic performance under general road conditions. However your riding comfort may worsen a little and road noise may increase during driving. You may also notice that your tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced on the snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to have snow tires or tire chains on the snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully with the speed appropriate for road conditions. NOTICE Low profile tire like 245/40R18 93Y or P245/40R18 93V may have greater damage than usual tires to its tire wheel when receiving impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention to the following.  Be sure to use with proper tire inflation pressure. If the tire inflation pressure is low, the tire may have greater damage. For detailed information about tire inflation pressure, see page 542.  Avoid driving onto high, sharp−edged objects and other road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire damage. 564 CHASSIS The effectiveness of snow tires is lost if the tread wears down below 4 mm (0.16 in.). If you have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal damage, the tire should be replaced. If a tire often goes flat or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage, it should be replaced. If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer. If air loss occurs while driving, do not continue driving. Driving even a short distance can damage a tire beyond repair. Any tires which are over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if damage is not obvious. NOTICE  When you purchase new tires, consult your Lexus dealer. If you change from run−flat tires to standard tires, a spare tire should also be equipped.  When the tires must be repaired or replaced, have them repaired or replaced by your Lexus dealer or an authorized tire dealer. The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters will be affected by the installation or removal of tires.  When the tires must be replaced, replace the grommets for tire pressure warning valves and transmitters as well. Tires deteriorate with age even if they have never or seldom been used. This applies also to the spare tire and tires stored for future use. 565 CHASSIS Tire selection When replacing a tire, use a tire of the same size and construction, and the same or greater maximum load as the originally installed tires. Also, all the tires must be the same brand and have the same tread patterns. Using any other size or type of tire may seriously affect handling, ride, speedometer/odometer calibration, ground clearance, and clearance between the body and tires or snow chains. Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater. As for the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label. For details about the Certification Label and sidewall of the tire, see pages 508 and 551. 566 CAUTION Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.  Do not mix radial, bias belted, or bias−ply tires on your vehicle, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.  Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s recommended size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control. CHASSIS INSTALLING SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS When to use snow tires or chains Snow tires or chains are recommended when driving on snow or ice. On wet or dry roads, conventional or radial tires provide better traction than snow or studded tires. Snow tire selection If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Also, all the tires must be the same brand and have the same tread patterns. Do not use tires other than stated above. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tire installation Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. Installing snow tires on the rear wheels only can lead to an excessive difference in road grip capability between the front and rear tires which could cause loss of vehicle control. CAUTION  Do not drive with the snow tires incorrectly inflated.  Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph) with any type of snow tires. Tire chain selection Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location or type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains. Use SAE Class ”S” type radial tire chains, with the exception of radial cable chains or V−bar type chains. CAUTION Observe the following instruction. Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.  Do not use snow tires other than the manufacturer’s recommended size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control. 567 CHASSIS Chain installation Install the chains on the rear tires as tightly as possible. Do not use tire chains on the front tires. Retighten chains after driving 0.5 − 1.0 km (1/4 − 1/2 mile). When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the instructions of the chain manufacturer. CAUTION  Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.  Drive carefully avoiding bumps, holes, and sharp turns, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.  Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheel braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.  When driving with chains installed, be sure to drive carefully. Slow down before entering curves to avoid losing control of the vehicle. Otherwise an accident may occur. 568 NOTICE  When the snow tires must be repaired or replaced, have them repaired or replaced by Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer. The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters will be affected by the installation or removal of snow tires.  When the snow tires must be replaced, replace the grommets for tire pressure warning valves and transmitters as well.  Do not attempt to use a tire chain on the compact spare tire, as it may result in damage to the vehicle as well as the tire. If the chains are installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly. See “Tire pressure warning system” on page 440. CHASSIS REPLACING WHEELS When replacing the tiers and wheels, be sure to install tire pressure warning valves and transmitters. ID codes on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are registered on the tire pressure warning ECU. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. Have the ID code registered by your Lexus dealer. If the ID code is not registered, the system will not work properly. After about 1 hour, the tire pressure warning light blinks to indicate a system malfunction. When to replace your wheels If you have wheel damage such as bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the wheel should be replaced. If you fail to replace a damaged wheel, the tire may slip off the wheel or cause loss of handling control. Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage and could fail without warning. Also, bent wheels which have been straightened may have hidden structural damage and therefore should not be used. Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. NOTICE When the tires or tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be replaced, have them replaced by your Lexus dealer. The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters will be affected by the installation or removal of tires. 569 CHASSIS Wheel selection ALUMINUM WHEEL PRECAUTIONS When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.  When installing aluminum wheels, check that the wheel nuts are tight after driving your vehicle the first 1600 km (1000 miles). Correct replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.  If you have rotated, repaired, or changed your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000 miles). A wheel of a different size or type may adversely affect handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow chain clearance to the body and chassis.  Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrench designed for your aluminum wheels. CAUTION  When balancing your wheels, use only Lexus balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer. Observe the following instruction. Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.  As with any wheel, periodically check your aluminum wheels for damage. If damaged, replace immediately.  Do not use wheels other than the manufacturer’s recommended size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control. 570  When using tire chains, be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels. CHASSIS SUSPENSION AND CHASSIS CAUTION Do not modify the suspension/chassis with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control. 571 CHASSIS 572 SECTION 6–4 SERVICE PROCEDURES AND SPECIFICATIONS Electrical components Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing the blade type fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the cartridge type fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the headlight aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 581 584 584 587 589 589 594 573 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS SPECIFICATIONS − FUSES − FUSE LOCATION G64002 Right side kick panel G64001 G64003 Left side kick panel  1 2 3 4 574 Engine compartment Left side kick panel Right side kick panel Engine compartment 5 Trunk ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS g64004 Engine compartment G64006 Engine compartment (GS300) G64005 Engine compartment (GS430) G64007 Trunk 575 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS No. FUSE AMPERE 1 STR LOCK 25 Steering lock system 12 13 2 SECURITY 7.5 Smart access system with push−button start 3 TI &TE 20 Power tilt and telescopic steering wheel, Multiplex communication system 4 AM1 7.5 Starting system 5 STOP SW 7.5 Stop/tail lights, Multi−port fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, Starting system, Electronic control brake system, Vehicle stability control system, Shift lock system 6 OBD 7.5 On−board diagnosis system 7 FR P/SEAT RH 30 Power seat system Adaptive variable suspension system 8 AIR SUS 20 9 PWR OUTLET 15 10 CIG 15 Cigarette lighter 7.5 Multiplex communication system, Smart access system with push−button start, Rear view monitor system, Audio system, Air conditioning system 11 576 CIRCUIT ACC No. FUSE AMPERE CIRCUIT IGN 10 Multi−port fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, SRS airbag system, Stop/tail lights, Steering lock system, Electronic control brake system GAUGE 7.5 Gauges and meters 14 ECU−IG RH 10 Power tilt and telescopic steering wheel, Multiplex communication system, Smart access system with push−button start, Audio system, Air conditioning system, Shift lock system, Tire pressure warning system, Combination switch 15 FR S/HTR RH 15 Seat heater, Heated and ventilated seats 16 RH−IG 7.5 Seat heater switches, Front right door control system, Rear right door control system, Capacitor, Combination switch, Seat belt pretensioners, Intuitive parking assist 17 AM2 15 Starting system Power outlet ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS No. 18 FUSE FR DOOR RH AMPERE CIRCUIT 20 Front right door control system (Power door lock system, Power rear view mirror control system, Door courtesy light, Outside rear view mirror heater, Power window), Multiplex communication system 20 Rear right door control system (Power door lock system, Door courtesy light, Power window) 20 Rear left door control system (Power door lock system, Door courtesy light, Power window) FR DOOR LH 20 Front left door control system (Power door lock system, Power rear view mirror control system, Door courtesy light, Outside rear view mirror heater, Power window) 22 RAD NO.3 10 Audio system 23 H−LP LVL 7.5 Adaptive front lighting system (AFS), Automatic headlight leveling control system 19 RR DOOR RH 20 RR DOOR LH 21 No. FUSE AMPERE CIRCUIT 24 LH−IG 10 Charging system, Headlight cleaners, Exhaust gas sensor, Rear window defogger, Electric cooling fans, Rear left door control system, Front left door control system, Emergency flashers, Automatic transmission, Seat belt pretensioners, Intuitive parking assist 25 FR WIP 30 Windshield wipers and washer 26 PANEL 7.5 Steering switch illumination, Audio system, Glove box light, Automatic transmission selector lever illumination, Console box light, Adaptive variable suspension switch illumination, Cigarette lighter illumination, Air conditioning system, Traction control off switch illumination, Driving pattern selector switch, Seat heater or Heated and ventilated seat switches, Register ILL RH, Register ILL LH, Register ILL CTR 27 FUEL OPEN 10 Fuel filler door opener, Trunk lid opener 577 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS No. 28 578 FUSE ECU−IG LH AMPERE CIRCUIT 10 Vehicle stability control system, Electronic control brake system, Yaw rate and G sensor, Steering sensor, Cruise control system, Dynamic radar cruise control system, Electronic power steering system, Variable gear ratio steering system, Rear view monitor system, Four−wheel drive system, Front controller, Moon roof, Rain sensor 29 FR S/HTR LH 15 30 FR P/SEAT LH 30 31 A/C 7.5 Air conditioning system 32 TV 7.5 Audio system, Air conditioning system, Rear view monitor system 33 TRK OPN 10 Trunk lid opener 34 LH−B 10 Theft deterrent system 35 S/ROOF 25 Moon roof 36 ECU−B 10 Variable gear ratio steering system, Electronic power steering system, Driver’s seat switch module 37 ABS MAIN3 10 No. FUSE AMPERE 38 TURN−HAZ 15 Turn signal lights, Emergency flashers 39 IG2 MAIN 20 “IG2”, “GAUGE” and “IGN” 40 RAD NO.2 30 Audio system 41 D/C CUT 20 “DOME “ and “MPX−B” 42 RAD NO.1 30 Audio system 10 Multiplex communication system, Front controller, Door control system (Power door lock system, Door courtesy lights, Power windows, Power rear view mirror control system, Outside rear view mirror heaters), Power seat system, Steering sensors, Electronic control brake system, Power tilt and telescopic steering system, Gauges and meters, Combination switch Foot lights, Vanity lights, Gauges and meters, Steering spot light, Steering switch illumination, Rear personal lights, Automatic transmission selector lever spot light, Front personal lights Seat heater, Heated and ventilated seats Power seat system Electronic control brake system 43 MPX−B 44 DOME 10 45 ABS MAIN2 10 46 ABS MOTOR 30 CIRCUIT Electronic control brake system Anti−lock brake system ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS No. FUSE AMPERE CIRCUIT 47 ABS MAIN1 10 48 E/G−B 60 “FR CTRL BATT”, “ETCS” and “ALT−S” No. FUSE AMPERE CIRCUIT 58 RR J/B 80 “STOP LP R”, “STOP LP L”, “RR−B”, “RR TAIL”, “RR FOG”, “RR−IG1”, “PSB”, and “RR S/SHADE” 59 GLW PLG1 50 Glow plug heater Capacitor 49 ABS1 50 Vehicle stability control system, “ABS MAIN1”, “ABS MAIN2” and “ABS MTR” 50 RH J/B−B 30 “AM2”, “DOOR FR” and “DOOR RR” 51 VGRS 40 52 MAIN 53 60 RH J/B−AM 80 “AM1”, “OBD”, “STOP SW”, “TI &TE”, “PWR OUTLET”, “FR P/SEAT RH”, “STR LOCK”, “ECU−IG RH”, “RH−IG”, “ACC”, “CIG”, “SECURITY”, “FR S/HTR RH”, and “AIR SUS” Variable gear ratio steering system 61 ABS2 30 Vehicle stability control system, Anti−lock brake system 30 “H−LP R LWR” and “H−LP L LWR” 62 DEFOG 50 Rear window defogger, Noise filter STARTER 30 Starting system 63 FAN1 40 Electric cooling fans 54 LH J/B−B 30 “FL DOOR”, “RL DOOR” and “RAD No.3” 64 HEATER 50 Air conditioning system GLW PLG2 50 Glow plug heater P/I−B 60 Multi−port fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system 65 55 66 E/G−AM 60 “H−LMP CLN”, “FR CTRL−AM” and “A/C COMP” 67 LH J/ B−AM 80 “S/ROOF”, “FR P/SEAT LH”, “TV”, “FR S/HTR LH”, “ECU−IG LH”, “FR WIP”, “H−LP LVL”, “LH−IG”, “FUEL OPEN”, “A/C”, “PANEL”, and “LH−B” 68 FAN2 60 No circuit 69 FR CTRL−B 25 56 57 EPS ALT 80 150 Electronic power steering system “RH J/B−AM”, “LH J/B−AM”, “E/G−AM”, “RR JB”, “HEATER”, “DEFOG”, “FAN1”, “FAN2”, “ABS2”, “ABS MOTOR”, “ABS MAIN1”, and “ABS MAIN2” “H−LP UPR” and “HORN” 579 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 580 No. FUSE AMPERE CIRCUIT No. FUSE AMPERE CIRCUIT 70 A/F 15 Multi−port fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system 83 EFI Multi−port fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system 71 ETCS 10 Multi−port fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system GS430: 20 GS300: 25 84 INJ 20 Multi−port fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system 72 ALT−S 7.5 Charging system 73 EM VLV 10 No circuit 85 H−LP UPR 15 Headlights (high beam) 74 H−LP CLN 30 Headlight cleaner system 86 HORN 10 Horn 75 A/C COMP 7.5 Air conditioning system 87 WASHER 20 Windshield wipers and washer 76 DEICER 25 No circuit 88 FR TAIL 10 Parking lights, Side marker lights 77 FR CTRL−AM 30 “FR TAIL”, “FR FOG” and “WASHER” 89 FR FOG 15 Front fog lights 78 IG2 10 Starting system 90 RR S/SHADE 7.5 79 EFI NO.2 10 Multi−port fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, Evaporative system 91 PSB 30 Pre−collision system 92 RR−IG2 10 No circuit 93 RR−IG1 10 Pre−collision system, Rear electric sunshade, Seat belt pretensioners 94 RR−B 10 Luggage compartment light, Noise filter 95 RR FOG 7.5 Rear fog lights 96 STOP LP L 10 Stoplights, Back up lights 80 H−LP R LWR 15 81 H−LP L LWR 15 82 F/PMP 25 Right−hand headlight (low beam) Left−hand headlight (low beam) Fuel pump Rear electric sunshade ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS No. FUSE AMPERE CIRCUIT 97 STOP LP R 10 High mounted stoplights 98 RR TAIL 10 License plate lights, Tail lights, Rear side marker lights CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION Precautions CAUTION BATTERY PRECAUTIONS The battery produces flammable and explosive hydrogen gas.  Do not cause a spark by contacting the battery terminals with tools.  Do not smoke or light a match near the battery. The electrolyte contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.  Avoid contact with eyes, skin or clothes.  Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.  Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.  Keep children away from the battery. EMERGENCY MEASURES  If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the medical office. 581 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS  If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contacted area. If you feel a pain or burn, get medical attention immediately. Checking battery exterior  If electrolyte gets on your clothes, there is a possibility of its soaking through to your skin, so immediately take off the exposed clothing and follow the procedure above, if necessary. G64008  If you accidentally swallow electrolyte, drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Then go immediately for emergency help.  1 Terminals 2 Hold−down clamp Check the battery for corroded or loose connections, cracks, or loose hold−down clamps. 1. If the battery is corroded, wash it off with a solution of warm water and baking soda. Coat the terminals with grease to prevent further corrosion. 2. If the connections are loose, tighten the clamp bolts − but do not overtighten. 3. Tighten the hold−down clamp only enough to keep the battery firmly in place. Overtightening may damage the battery case. 582 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS NOTICE  Make sure the engine and all accessories are turned off before performing maintenance. Checking battery condition Checking by indicator  When checking the battery, remove the ground cable first and reinstall it last.  Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools. G64009  Take care no solution gets into the battery when washing it. If the battery is disconnected or run down The following functions may not operate correctly when you reconnect or replace the battery. In these cases, you should normalize each system referring to the following pages. Check the battery condition by the indicator color.  Power windows (See page 61.) 1 BLUE − Good condition.  Moon roof (See page 138.) 2 WHITE − Charging necessary. Have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer. 3 RED − Have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer.  Variable gear ratio steering system (See page 431.)  Intuitive parking assist (See page 387.) NOTICE Do not refill the battery with water. 583 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS BATTERY RECHARGING PRECAUTIONS CHECKING AND REPLACING THE BLADE TYPE FUSES During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen gas. Therefore, before recharging: 1. If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable. 2. Make sure the power switch on the recharger is off when connecting the charger cables to the battery and when disconnecting them. CAUTION  Always charge the battery in an unconfined area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.  Only do a slow charge (5 A or less). Charging at a quicker rate is dangerous. The battery may explode causing personal injuries. G64010 Left side kick panel G64011 NOTICE Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off. Right side kick panel 584 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS G64012 Engine compartment G64014 Trunk 1. Turn the engine switch off and open the fuse box lid. Determine which fuse may be causing the problem. The lid of the fuse box shows the name of the circuit for each fuse. G64013 Engine compartment 1 Pull−out tool 2 Spare fuses 585 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 64L013 2. Make sure the inoperative component is turned off. Pull the suspected fuse straight out with the pull−out tool and check it. If it has blown, push a new fuse into the clips. 64G008a Good Blown a. Look carefully at the fuse. If the thin wire is broken, the fuse has blown. If you are not sure or if it is too dark to see, try replacing the suspected fuse with one of the same value that you know is good. b. Install only a fuse with the amperage rating designated on the fuse box lid. If you do not have a spare fuse, in an emergency you can pull out the ”CIG”, ”RAD NO.1” or ”OBD” fuse, which may be dispensable for normal driving, and use it if its amperage rating is the same. If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one lower than, but as close to the amperage as possible. If the amperage is lower than that specified, the fuse might blow out again but this does not indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get the correct fuse as soon as possible and return the substitute to its original clips. 586 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS It is a good idea to purchase a set of spare fuses and keep them in your vehicle for emergencies. If the new fuse immediately blows out, there is a problem with the electrical system. Have your Lexus dealer correct it as soon as possible. CHECKING THE CARTRIDGE TYPE FUSES CAUTION Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any other object, in place of a fuse. This may cause extensive damage and possibly a fire. G64015 Engine compartment 587 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS NOTICE Before replacing the fuses, have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer. 64g104 Good Blown If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the blade type fuses are O.K., check the cartridge type fuses. If any of the cartridge type fuses are blown, they must be replaced. If there is an overload in the circuits from the battery, the fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged. CAUTION Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent for replacement. Never install an ordinary wire − even for a temporary fix. This may cause extensive damage and possibly a fire. 588 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ADDING WASHER FLUID CHECKING THE HEADLIGHT AIM G64020 If the washer tank becomes nearly empty, add washer fluid. You may use plain water as washer fluid. However, in cold areas where temperatures range below the freezing point, use washer fluid containing antifreeze. This product is available at your Lexus dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix with water. NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.  1 Beam angle gauge (horizontal movement for high beam) 2 Beam angle gauge (vertical movement for high beam) 3 Beam angle gauge (vertical movement for low beam) 4 Beam angle gauge (horizontal movement for low beam) Before checking the headlight aim: 1. Be sure that the body around the headlight is not deformed. 2. Park the vehicle on a level spot. 3. The driver gets into the driver’s seat and puts the vehicle in a state readying for a driving (with a full tank). 4. Bounce the vehicle several times. 589 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Adjusting the headlight aiming (low beam) G64022 G64021  1 Bubble  1 Adjusting bolt A 2 Adjusting bolt B 2 Acceptable range Vertical movement gauge: The bubble of the gauge should not deviate from the center of the gauge by more than 2 marks to either side of the gauge. If the bubble is out of the acceptable range of the beam angle gauge, adjust it using bolt A and B. 590 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS G64023 1. Turn the bolt A in either direction using a Phillips−head screwdriver. At this time, keep the turning direction and number of turns in mind. G64024 2. Turn the bolt B the same number of turns and in the same direction as step 1 using a Phillips−head screwdriver. If you do not know or cannot find the original position, or if you feel that there is a large deviation, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim. After adjusting the headlight in the vertical direction, check that the light has been shifted from the adjusted position in the horizontal direction. 591 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Adjusting the headlight aiming (high beam) G64026 G64025  1 Bubble  1 Adjusting bolt A 2 Adjusting bolt B 2 Acceptable range Vertical movement gauge: The bubble of the gauge should not deviate from the center of the gauge by more than 2 marks to either side of the gauge. If the bubble is out of the acceptable range of the beam angle gauge, adjust it using bolt A. 592 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS G64027 Turn the bolt A in either direction using a Phillips−head screwdriver. 64G084  1 Red line 2 Acceptable range Horizontal movement gauge: The red line should not deviate by more than 2 blue lines to either side of the gauge. If the red line is out of the acceptable range of the beam angle gauge, adjust it using bolt B. 593 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS REPLACING LIGHT BULBS G64028 Turn the bolt B in either direction using a Phillips−head screwdriver. If you do not know or cannot find the original position, or if you feel that there is a large deviation, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim. The illustrations on the following pages show the locations of light bulbs. If it is necessary to replace a bulb, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Use bulbs with the bulb numbers and wattage ratings given in the table. The tail lights, stop lights, high mounted stoplight and rear side marker light consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced. If two or more LEDs in a stoplight burn out, your vehicle may not conform to local laws (SAE). CAUTION  To prevent burning yourself, do not replace the light bulbs while they are hot.  Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and require special handling. They can burst or shatter if scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb only by its plastic or metal case. Do not touch the glass part of a bulb with bare hands.  Do not touch the (High−intensity discharge headlight’s) high voltage socket when the headlights are turned on. An extremely high voltage of 20,000 V will be discharged and could result in serious injury or death by electric shock. 594 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS  Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam headlight bulbs, connectors, power supply circuits, or related components. Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death. Call your Lexus dealer for headlights repair or servicing, including replacement of bulbs and bulb disposal. LIGHT LOCATION G64017 NOTICE Only use a bulb of the listed type. The inside of the lens of exterior lights such as headlights may temporarily fog up when the lens becomes wet in the rain or in a car wash. This is not a problem because the fogging is caused by the temperature difference between the outside and inside of the lens, just like the windshield fogs up in the rain. However, if there is a large drop of water on the inside of the lens, or if there is water pooled inside the light, contact your Lexus dealer. Light Bulbs Bulb No. W Type 1 Headlight (High beam) HB3 60 A 2 Parking light −−− 5 D 3 Front turn signal light −−− 21 E 4 Headlight (Low beam) D4S 35 B 5 Front side marker light 194 5 D 6 Fog light HB4 51 C 595 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS G64018 Light Bulbs 596 G64019 Bulb No. W Type Light Bulbs Bulb No. W Type 1 High mounted stoplight −−− 3.6 G 1 Front interior lights −−− 0.1 G 2 Tail light −−− 0.9/0.5 G 2 Front seat spot lights −−− 0.1 G 3 Tail/stop light −−− 0.9/10.8 G 3 Vanity lights −−− 8 D 4 Trunk light −−− 5 F 4 Rear seat spot lights −−− 0.2 G 5 Rear side marker light −−− 0.5 G 5 Door courtesy lights −−− 0.2 G 6 Rear turn signal light −−− 21 E 6 Foot lights −−− 0.2 G 7 Back−up light 921 16 D 7 Glove box light −−− 0.2 G 8 License plate light −−− 0.85 G ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS A: B: C: D: E: F: G: HB3 halogen bulbs D4S discharge bulbs HB4 halogen bulbs Wedge base bulbs (clear) Wedge base bulbs (amber) Double end bulbs LEDs (Light−emitting Diodes) 597 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 598 SECTION 6–5 SERVICE PROCEDURES AND SPECIFICATIONS Body Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protecting your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing and waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 601 602 604 599 BODY SPECIFICATIONS − DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT Overall length 4825 mm (189.9 in.) Overall width 1820 mm (71.6 in.) Overall height Two−wheel drive models Four−wheel drive models 1425 mm (56.1 in.)* 1435 mm (56.4 in.)* Wheelbase 2850 mm (112.2 in.) Tread 1535 mm (60.4 in.) 1540 mm (60.6 in.) – Front – Rear Vehicle capacity weight (occupants + luggage) 370 kg (815 lb.) *Unladen vehicle − FUEL TANK Capacity 600 71 L (18.7 gal., 15.6 lmp.gal.) BODY PROTECTING YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION Proper care of your Lexus can help ensure long−term corrosion prevention. The most common causes of corrosion to your vehicle are:  The accumulation of road salt, dirt and moisture in hard−to−reach areas under the vehicle.  Chipping of paint or undercoating caused by minor accidents or by stones and gravel. The following conditions will cause or accelerate corrosion of your vehicle, so it is important to keep your vehicle, particularly the underside, as clean as possible and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings as soon as possible.  The presence of road salt or dust control chemicals, salt in the air near the sea coast, industrial air pollution.  High humidity, especially at temperatures just above freezing point.  Certain parts of your vehicle are wet or damp for an extended period of time, even though other parts of the vehicle are dry. To help prevent corrosion on your Lexus, follow these guidelines: Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing. In addition, observe the following points.  If you drive on salted roads in the winter or if you live near the ocean, you should hose off the undercarriage at least once a month to minimize corrosion.  High pressure water or steam is effective for cleaning the vehicle’s underside and wheel housings. Pay particular attention to these areas as it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to simply wet the mud and debris without removing them. The lower edge of doors, rocker panels and frame members have drain holes which should not be allowed to clog with dirt as trapped water in these areas can cause corrosion.  Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter is over. See ”Washing and waxing” on page 602 for more tips. Check the condition of your vehicle’s paint and trim. If you find any chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or scratches have gone through the bare metal, have a qualified body shop make the repair.  Components of the vehicle which do not dry quickly due to lack of proper ventilation are exposed to high ambient temperature. 601 BODY Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can accumulate under the floor mats and could cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals, cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc. These should be transported in proper containers. If a spill or leak should occur, immediately clean and dry the area. Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated garage or a roofed place. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. If you wash your vehicle in the garage, or if you drive it covered with water or snow, your garage may be so damp as to cause corrosion. Even if your garage is heated, a wet vehicle can corrode if the ventilation is poor. WASHING AND WAXING Washing your Lexus Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing. The following cases may cause weakness to the paint or corrosion to the body and parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible.  When driving in a coastal area  When driving on a road sprinkled with antifreeze  When exposed to coal tar, tree sap, bird droppings and carcass of an insect  When driving in areas where there is a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust or chemical substances  When the vehicle becomes remarkably dirty with dust and mud Hand−washing your Lexus Work in the shade and wait until the vehicle body is not warm to the touch. CAUTION Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot. When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns. 602 BODY 1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road salt from the underside of the vehicle or the wheel wells. Road tar: Remove with turpentine or cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces. 2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap, mixed according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and keep it wet by dipping it frequently into the wash water. Do not rub hard − let the soap and water remove the dirt. 3. Rinse thoroughly − dried soap can cause streaking. In hot weather you may need to rinse each section right after you wash it. Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−pressure car wash, for example) at or near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler door opened. If the water enters the air vent, you may experience trouble with refueling or rough engine idling. Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic wheel ornaments are damaged easily by organic substances. If any organic substances splash an ornament, be sure to wash them off with water and check if the ornament is damaged. Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent. Plastic bumpers and side moldings: Wash carefully. Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper and side molding faces are soft. Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub them with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights. 4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not rub or press hard − you might scratch the paint. NOTICE  Do not use organic substances (gasoline, kerosene, benzine or strong solvents), which may be toxic or cause damage.  Do not scrub any part of the vehicle with a hard brush, which may cause damage. Automatic car wash Your vehicle may be washed in an automatic car wash, but remember that the paint can be scratched by some types of brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the washing process itself. Scratching reduces paint durability and gloss, especially on darker colors. The manager of the car wash should be able to advise you whether the process is safe for the paint on your vehicle. 603 BODY Waxing your Lexus Polishing and waxing is recommended to maintain the original beauty of your Lexus’ finish. Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle surface does not repel water well. 1. Always wash and dry the vehicle surface before you begin waxing, even if you are using a combined cleaner and wax. 2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If the finish has become extremely weathered, use a car−cleaning polish, followed by a separate wax. Carefully follow the manufacturer ’s instructions and precautions. Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim as well as the paint. CLEANING THE INTERIOR CAUTION  Be careful not to splash water or spill liquid on the floor. This may prevent the SRS side airbags from activating correctly, resulting in serious injury.  Do not wash the vehicle floor with water, or allow water to get onto the floor when cleaning the vehicle interior or exterior. Water may get into audio components or other electrical components above or under the floor carpet (or mat) and cause a malfunction; and it may cause body corrosion. 3. Wax the vehicle again when water does not bead but remains on the surface in large patches. Leather−trimmed interior Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses. If you accidentally put wax on the light surfaces, wipe or wash it off. The selected leather is used in your Lexus. Due to characteristics of leather products, some parts of leather may be rough, uneven or scratched originally. To keep good appearance, we recommend you to clean it periodically twice a year. Remove dirt on the leather in the following ways: 1. Wipe it off lightly using a soft cloth (e.g. gauze) dampened with 5% solution of neutral detergent for wool. 2. Wring water from a clean cloth and thoroughly wipe off all traces of detergent with it. 3. Wipe off the surface of the leather with a dry soft cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a ventilated shaded area. Excess of wet may cause the hardening or shrinking of the leather. 604 BODY NOTICE  Dirt or sand adhered to the leather may damage the treated surface and cause it to wear earlier. Remove dirt or sand using a vacuum cleaner.  If a stain should fail to come out with a neutral detergent, apply a cleaner that does not contain an organic solvent.  Never use organic substances such as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or alkaline or acid solutions for cleaning the leather as these could cause discoloring. Non−leather trim (Dash and sun visors) The non−leather trim may be easily cleaned with a mild soap or detergent and water. First vacuum over the upholstery to remove loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the non−leather trim. After allowing it to soak in for a few minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt and wipe off the soap with a clean damp cloth. If all the dirt does not come off, repeat the procedure. Commercial foaming−type cleaners are also available which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.  Use of a nylon brush or synthetic fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the fine grained surface of the leather. NOTICE  Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be especially careful to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your upholstery always clean. Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline or window cleaner on the interior.  Long exposure to direct sunlight may cause the leather surface to harden and shrink. Keep your vehicle in a shaded area, especially in the summer.  The interior of your vehicle is apt to heat up on hot summer days, so avoid placing on the upholstery items made of vinyl or plastic or containing wax as these tend to stick to leather when warm.  Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could result in discoloration or staining. 605 BODY Carpets, Windows and Seat Belts Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove as much dirt as possible. Several types of foam cleaners are available; some are in aerosol cans and others are powders or liquids which you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the carpets, use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water − the best results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. Read the shampoo instructions and follow them closely. The seat belts may be cleaned with mild soap and water or with lukewarm water. Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts for excessive wear, fraying or cuts. NOTICE  Use a good foam−type shampoo to clean the carpets.  Do not use dye or bleach on the belts − it may weaken them.  Do not use the belts until they become dry.  The windows may be cleaned with any household window cleaner.  When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires. 606 Air Conditioning Control Panel, Audio System, Instrument Panel, Console Panel, and Switches Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning. Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly wipe off any dirt. NOTICE  Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions. These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or peeling of the surface.  If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure their ingredients do not include the substances mentioned above.  If you use a liquid car freshener, do not spill the liquid onto the vehicle’s interior surfaces. It may contain the ingredients mentioned above. Immediately clean any spill using the method mentioned above. If you have any questions about the cleaning of your Lexus, your local Lexus dealer will be pleased to answer them. SECTION 7 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S. OWNERS Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 607 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S. OWNERS REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S. OWNERS If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll−free: 1−800−25−LEXUS). If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll−free at 1−800−424−9393 (or 366−0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. 608